Home

procedure - Pro

1. rA Data Sampling List Data Sampling List shows data sampling settings created in the edited project file You can confirm the status of each data sampling setting there You can also change the data sampling settings on the list Usage Pattern When editing or deleting Select Desired Item and View gt Data Sampling List Editor Delete It the key The following is the Data Ssampling List local screen example The edit method of this list is the same as that of the Parts list 2 7 5 Parts List All tab Opens the selected Data Sampling Setting for editing Deletes the selected corresponds to Data Sampling an device ad E Setting dress is auto r matically written in the Descrip tion field Using Device a Comment a Sagan Here the device comment that Copies Data Sam cor pling Setting Pastes Data Sam pling Setting Click on cos _ to close the Data Sampling Setting Moves Data Sampling Setting one position List screen Pressing the Esc key will also close the screen LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide higher on the list Moves Data Sampling Settingone position
2. 1 2 START The Light rema until the Power_Off_pushbutton is pressed The Pow me sushbu a starts the soft drink machine SolA1 a Sole OF Sat 0 0 Power On pushbutton Power Off_pushbutton Light l Ti ae i T aed Off Off Off 60X1 0 0 Light J 2 Select the Controller menu Write to Controller 7 2 2 Passwords command or click on the icon to send logic pro grams Ifa ae has been registered enter the password Logic programs alone are sent a LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs E Receiving Logic Programs PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select Control menu Edi 1 2 3 Creating Ta Editing Saving Logic Programs tor command or click on the icon to start the Logic Program Editor 2 Select the Controller menu Read from Control ler command or click on the icon to receive logic programs MASAA 7 2 2 Passwords If a password has been registered enter the password Password Confirmation Enter password Logic programs alone are received LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide TAD 7 3 Options Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS In addition to transferring receiving screen data you can check the screen information on the connected LT Unit using the LT Editor program
3. I Diawing Board Factory A Screen Edi View Option Draw Pars Special Library window Help os elolalaal gt lef o s ale soose xran A OOC amp A m 2S alw wl aaa Fle ay 3 Bes ge i E i ap 5 al G i a ES E i 7 amp a 9 B 10 aa 1 Vz rte F Farts ical Objects 14 Ghangeciy Teee 1z ro D Link Seect E Change Order 34 4 720 Ready ce REMARKS When the Screen Editor has already been started skip step 1 Selecting the Screen menu s Open command or clicking on and entering an unregistered screen number can also be used to open a new screen Enter the screen number and title when saving the screen 1 2 4 Saving a Screen under a Different Name Up to twenty screens can be simul taneously opened Multiple types of windows can be opened on any one screen at the same time LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 12 From Star toT Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals E Opening a Previously Saved Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Screen Setup menu s Editor com When the Screen Editor has already mand or click on in the Project Manager been started skip step 1 The Screen Editor s opening screen will appear 2 Select the Screen menu s Open command or click on E 3 Use this screen to select a screen name from the list When JOE double click on the d
4. 3 Click the right mouse button to register the above setting E Display When Called Up to a B Base Screen When this function is set to Transparent If at least one dotis ONina These blocks block this block is dis contain played in the background ON dots color d The block with no ON dots becomes transparent and you can see the objects on the base screen When this function is set to Background color The block with no ON dots is displayed in the background color 3 20 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Canceling a Command Undo This function is used to cancel a command and return to the previous condi tion immediately before the command was made Undo is only effective for the command immediately before it PROCEDURE REMARKS After deleting a circle unintentionally 1 Select the icon The deleted circle is restored and the screen returns to the previous condition E Redo Command This function is used to redo the command canceled with the Undo com mand The Redo command is effective only for the command immediately before it PROCEDURE REMARKS After deleting a circle you have selected the icon to return to the previous condition but you realize that ac tually the circle must be deleted 1 Select the icon The screen return
5. 2 172 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yz Saving Libraries and Quitting When a Library file s contents are changed the changed data will automati cally overwrite the old data and be saved However if the Library file has been newly created when you attempt to create or select another Library file a prompt will appear asking if whether the new file is to be saved or not When is clicked on the Save As Dialog box will appear E Saving a Library File Under Another Name Here the Library File will be saved under a different name PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Save As command from the Library Browser s File menu 2 The currently selected Library file name and its com The file name can be input within ment data if any will appear 255 characters including a path and Input a new file name and change the desired settings extension Op4 objb cow 0p4 objh cpw Op4 objc cp Op4 objd cpw Op4 obje cow Op4 objf cpuy Op4 objg cou File name Op4ibl cpu save save as type Windows Library Files cpw F Caneel Description Data Input equipment 3 Click on the Sse button to save the Library When a project with the same name already exists a prompt asking whether the new name should overwrite the old name will appear to do so click on the button When you do not want to overwrite cl
6. 7 3 2 gt gt KK we B ale i z i EA I ogic Progra itor Soda g e E 2 ga techn ey pink Minty MI A me Si 9 unk Ei eoo E 1 a E ET oe E sce aan ar be a a O A ae a G all ES YS Reagan E e eee eee ew re Powe cca Se Lasts MESS B f e 2 START E The Light remains on until the Power _Off_pushbutton is pressed ae The Power m Son ae a te El Sole 0 0 ole OF So GlaT 0 0 bt Power _On_pushbutton Power Off_pushbutton Light 293 237 382 22 Numeric Display H D TA 1 Off Off Off Sole 0 0 2 134 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Select an instruction to convert and determine by A list of instructions to which the double clicking on it copied Part can be converted will The instruction will be inserted appear OI x Screen Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Library window elp TERRERO DETTE mal u F Logic Program Editor Soda jol x File Edit Yiew Search Insert Data Controller Help lt J as 21x4 le z
7. Project Info Project Screen SRAM Information Humber of Screens Total Screens 1 Number of Basic Alarm Messages Eoo o Humber of Channels E SRAM Information The number of channels and the screen number that are used in the project are displayed The situation with the use of the backup SRAM in the current project is displayed on a function basis Project Info Project Available SAAM Size Data Sampling LS Backup Loging Data Filing Data Remaining SRAM Size KBytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes 4 36 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 4 Information Display 4 4 2 Screen Information The Screen Information screen displays the settings for the currently open screen aS Well as the date and time of its last revision To use this command select the Project menu s Screen Information command E Screen Screen Information Screen Project Hame Factory B External Device Type OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Curent Screen Size 17a Bytes Project Name Displays the file name of the currently selected project file External Device Displays the External Device selected in the current project file Current Screen Displays the screen type and screen number of the current screen Description Displays the title of the current screen Size Displays the data volume of the cu
8. Cross reference will be displayed for local settings each screen s Parts and D scripts and data sampling and global D scripts registered for all the screens For the global cross reference setting display will not be sorted for each functions and screens but the address designation conditions will be displayed for the entire Project File Since to display the global cross reference address information for all the ay t screen will be acquired it can take a long period of time N The global cross reference does not display the condition of addresses that have been designated via LT System Settings E Cross Reference Local Data Sampling Global D script Usage Pattern Local Close Cross Refer or Select either st List gt Data Word or Bit Confirm or Sampling U s the Esc key or Global D script View gt An example of the Cross Reference List dialog box in the case of Local is as shown below Select whether to display by Bit Address or Word Address Cross Reference List Local J l Bit Address word Address Click to change the a_i lt Display Start Ad dress Addresses 9 Used Selects the Address Al Display condition LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 229 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Global Cross Reference The global cross reference has two display methods 1 e list display same a
9. Node Edit The Node Edit dialog 7 Deletes the selected peak Adds a node The added displays zert in Front l zert in Back i node is the same as the selected node If the screen capacity is exceeded by the added value the Insert in Front and Insert in Back buttons are highlighted and cannot be specified If the node edit is selected the selected point in the displayed dialog is marked with a cross E Editing a Node on a Continuous Line PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the desired continuous line 2 3 1 Selecting an 2 Select Node Edit K from Edit E Object 3 Select the coordinate value that you want to edit 4 Click on the Edt button 5 Enter the X Y coordinate values in the coordinate change dialogs Hode Edit x EA v fe Fi 6 Click on the button to run the coordinate TO cancel the coordinate change change Click on the button 2 150 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS eee Convert Import Bit map This section describes how to convert image data bit map BMP file created using other drawing software or imported using a scanner for use on a LT Image I screen bit map conversion which can then be placed on the Base Trend Graph and Keyboard screens For Bit Map Conversion data refer to 3 5 Creating Image Data Image E Converting and Placing a Bitmap PROC
10. j To cancel the loading click on the ja icon TEMPER RUN CONTROL MONITOR TROUBLE ote When calling up a filled object When the current screen s graphics overlap loaded filled painted graph ics depending on the color used unfilled areas may be created To correct this add a fill to the current screen s unfilled area 2 2 6 Fill B100 Bit ys B10 Load B100 onto B10 Add a fill in the unfilled area If a background color is selected for the screen used for screen call up the object placed on the screen will not be displayed on the LT E Important To call up the screen for which a background color has been selected specify the center of the screen as the call up posi tion and then place the screen LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 117 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing 2 2 11 Load Mark Marks dot images created in a Mark screen can be loaded and used repeat edly on a Base screen E Loading a Mark Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Load Mark command or click on the icon 2 Select a desired Mark screen from the list or enter that screen s number directly on the Screen No field via the keyboard and then click on the but ton The Mark s outline will appear in the drawing area next to your cursor Designate its color and size before clicking
11. Decompression 3 Click on the Decompress button to perform data decom pression The process is finished when the word Normal appears 3 28 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide gt SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT A s you use the LT Editor file management work such as copying and deleting created screens and projects will increase thereby improv ing your work efficiency This chapter covers Information Management of your data MM E E T E E E E Screen Editing cL E A E TE AE Project Editing Gi Eaa Project Compression Decompression a E E E E Information Display LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 1 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT mi Screen Editing This section describes the commands used to edit a screen such as listing screens and copying deleting a specified screen 4 1 1 Listing Copying Deleting Screen You can list the number size and title of all existing screens for each screen type You can also print out this screen list 9 1 Print Settings Usage Pattern Screen list Select a Screen Type appears Copy or delete a desired screen Screen Open Screen or Click on E Listing Screens This feature lists screens for the current project PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or c
12. E LT Editor Part Type Summary Each of the Parts used in LT Editor 1s listed below Name Function Reference a Used to change a External Device s Bit Address data Changes a Extemal Device s Word Address data Used to go back to the previous screen a to switch screens and to reset the LT Lamp Tums ON or OFF according to whether 2 1 4 Lamps ee or OFF Address data in a bar graph Address data in a pie graph Me pais dtainateergaghe nn Address data in a Meter graph as absolute values in a trend graph 3 Keypad Display Used to enter a PLC s Word Address data Alarm Display When monitored Bits are tumed ON a _ 2 1 11 Alarm Displays list of Basic Alarm summary messages appear that have been previously registered in the Alarm Editor Filing Data Displays data registered in the Filing 2 1 12 File Name Display corresponding file number Half PieGraph Displays the Extemal Device s Word 2 1 7 Half Pie Graphs Address data in a Half Pie graph 2 2 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Logging Display Displays Extemal Device data loaded in 2 1 13 Data Logging the data logging settings by specifying Display the address for the corresponding block number Numeric Display Displays the External Device s Word 2 1 14 Numeric Displays Address numeric data as an absolute value Message Display Displays a pre
13. 1 2 2 Saving a Project File under a Different Name E Selecting an Existing Project Select the Project Manger s Project menu Select command or click on ba When you select a project the following setting screen appears Used to select the folder containing the target project file Lists the current E SS folder and existing project files eo Fie name JL seve Save as type Windows Project Files Ite i Display Type LogiT ouch Type COH Displays the project file name selected from the list You can specify the project file by typing the file name Displays the project file s Used to select the comment and the selected project file type desired LT unit and External Devices File Types The only project file that can be selected is the one created with the LT Editor lte Note Double clicking on the file project file Ite itself in Explorer automatically NY starts LT Editor and opens the file LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide l 7 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals PROCEDURE 1 Select the Project Manger Project menu s Select command or click on ba 2 Select a project file from the list that appears or type the project file name Select Factory A Select Mite Factory A To type a file name via the keyboard Pie ana type the Fles of vpe file name Description Dene Display
14. 2 208 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 6 Data Sampling Data Format Sampo Sampling Address oo I Trigger Bit Address poo I Top White Address sis i No of Sampl Addr 1 BackUp Data Backup The sampled data will be backed up in the LT s backup memory Synchronous Mode With this mode selected when the LT s power is turned ON data will be sampled following that data stored be fore the LT s power was turned OFF With this mode unselected when the LT s power is turned ON data sampling will start from the value 0 For nor mal operation select this mode E Synehanaus blade ok Cancel Hep Data stored in the backup SRAM is erased when e The memory is initialized important Screen data is transmitted e The LT system and protocol are set up e The LT self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area is performed Data Storage Example The following is an example of data stored from the storage start address When the trigger bit is turned ON the data is stored into the LS Area e The stored data count is stored in the storage start address e The stored data count number n is in the Bin format e When the stored data count is less than the sampling data count the Word Addresses up to that number will be cleared to 0 Storage start address Stored data count n O Q m S
15. 4 In the Graph Settings tab select the graph s dis The area to enter the number of the play direction and input the number of Axis Divi divisions will appear only for a graph sions type which has axis divisions Bar Graph Settings BA_001 T Left Enter 10 here Select Up 5 After all of the graph s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Bar Graph s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Bar Graph s top left To cancel the placement click on corner is to be placed the icon If necessary use the Bar Graph s handles to adjust its To change the Part s size refer to SIZE 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes The Bar Graph s sizing handles are located inside the graph 2 30 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yan Pie Graphs Pie Graphs create an area where a External Device s Word Address data is displayed as absolute values The graph s display will change to reflect changes in the designated Word Address data E Pie Graph General Settings Attributes lt When displaying the data using absolute values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter commen Pie Graph Setti
16. Usage Pattern Project Selecta Click on the Manger Transfer Option desired gt ok item or button Click on E 7 3 1 LT Internal Screen Data Information LT internal information will be displayed here Functions such as Screen List Memory Info and LT Version are included E List Screens The screen name data volume and title of the screens stored in the LT unit are listed by screen type PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Options menu Screens List command Listed Screen Types Screens of the current project will be listed Base screens Image screens 2 After confirming the displayed information click on T the button to close the screen list Messages summaries Upload Information Indicates if the upload infor LT system settings mation has been transferred to the LT unit or not J Upload Information 126 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS E Memory Information 7 3 Options The LT unit s current memory capacity for a specified memory area bank is dis played Its maximum internal memory capacity is also displayed PROCEDURE 1 Select the Options menu Memory Info command The receiving of memory information begins 2 After confirming the displayed information click on the button to close the memory informa tion window Max Block Size Displays the LT unit s allow ab
17. fea bate Tire vatue value vatue e ose pa Data bata pared paa parr e e When using the above display settings the Total value data will be written to the LS area as follows The Total values Total Average Max and Min are all written as 32 bit data Also the Total values will be written from the left column All values except Data and Item will be automatically shifted to the left in a column Write to LS area 0 Ist column s 1stcolumn s values Ist column s 2 4 2nd column s i 2nd column s values 6 2nd column s i 8 3rd column s 9 total value 10 3rd column s 11 average value 3rd column s values Se Note If the size of the Total value data exceeds the LS Area size that data cannot XVX be transmitted LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 43 10 2 Logging Si o Chapter 10 Advanced Features WEY gt Display Settings E Display Settings In the Display Settings dialog box the settings made in the Display tab can be viewed and edited Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Display Write Settings M Display ON OFF Row Settings IY Display Block Mame Display Setting dialog box Column Settings M Display Block Name No of Block Name Rowe No of Char ltem No of Data Rowe No of Data Col No of Calc Rowe No of Char Dats 78 a Preview l Display
18. lt Memory Set memset gt As the number of Addresses increases the more the time is required for writing data to the External Device Depending on the number of Addresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes Although it will depend on the number of Addresses to be copied data will be read from the original copy data then divided into pieces and copied to the copy destination There fore even if a communication error occurs during data read data may be partially written Unless data write is completed for the designated number of Addresses screen displays such as Parts will not be updated or refreshed Also screen changes will not be performed Although this function designates Address es they are not counted as D script Address es When using device addresses for the Assign operation the write values will not be assigned immediately due to the LT to External Device transmission time LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E g memset w D0100 0 10 Initializes D100 to D109 as 0 w D200 w D100 Assigns D100 data to D200 In this case value 0 written to D100 as the operation result has not been assigned to D200 yet e When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address an integer array must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to
19. 1 Via the Project Manager select the Screen Setup menu LT System Settings command or click on the icon 2 Click on a desired menu tab Each tab s setting items will be displayed LT Settings Factory Bite x Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings LT Settings 1 0 Settings Mode Settings Menu Tabs Ww Check Surre w Touch Buzzer Screen Mo Data Type H Bin T Screen Level Change Flow Password Settings Standby Mode Time Minutes Change To Screen No Com Port Start Up Delay Sec ftw oom oe 3 After entering all the necessary items click on the button LT Settings Factory Bite Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Conmunication Settings 1 0 Settings LT Settings Mode Settings w Touch Buzzer Screen Mo Data Type H Bin ii Screen Level Change Flow Password Settings Standby Mode Time Minutes Change To Screen No Com Fort Start Up Delay Sec a Loa Len a LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup REMARKS To reset each item to its default value click on the Default button 6 7 Memo 6 8 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide fa TRANSFERRING SCREENS h o display screens created with the LT Editor on the LT unit or to run the created logic program on the LT unit you must first transfer data to the LT Convers
20. 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features 2 Selecting a file name Select the desired setting by touching Block 2 s LT screen data 3 Backup SRAM gt LS Area Touching the SRAM gt LS key will transmit data from SRAM to the LS Area 4 Data Editing Touch the Keypad Display to display the Pop up Keypad Adjust the data using the Pop up Keypad 5 LS Area to External Device The edited data is transmitted to the External Device by touching the LS to External Device key LS gt DEV External DEY Device Sis 10 26 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging WPS Logging Function The External Device data is loaded to the LT s backup SRAM at bit based or time specified timings to display it in a tabular form on the screen or print it on the printer Logging data can be displayed via a Logging Display 2 1 13 Logging Display Logging data can be displayed with its Total Average Max and Min values which can be set via the Data Calculation Settings Logging data can be entered into a database for data analysis M _ Designated 0064 Sampling Word Addresses 0024 E z E Hi 10 2 1 Logging Function E Data Logging Flow This flow chart shows the logging data flow and each trigger condition LT External Device LS Area Logging D
21. 2 3 15 Changing Attributes mPa al Be sure to use the Alarm Summary s display area only for displaying Alarm Mes sages i e never place over lap or overlay another Part or object in this area 2 60 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 12 File Name Display Data registered in the Filing Data settings 1s displayed 2 1 Parts Tag Reference Manual 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Function E File Name Display General Settings Attributes File Display FD O01 General Settings Display Display Style Color Styler Color Switch Settings Switch Settings Specify Enter a descrip tion if desired Enter the ID number for the File Name Display and its function switch whether or not Use LS Area I Use LS Area to use the LS Top Write Word Address area E het H Enter the start word address of the LS area aer Se Device Transfer I Use Transfer Completed Bit Address ID Mo Transfer ome Bit Address Enter the File No of filing data to be displayed Set up the External Device Trans fer Completed Bit Address Description Enter a description using a maximum of 20 single byte characters IDNo The File Name Display is linked to its function switch File Name Key Specify the number to identify this link is here This number is available up to 255 File No Enter the file number regis
22. 3 In the Library Image area input the No of library items No of Lib used Picture Display Settings Lw_002 Enter 4 General Settings Library Image ot anes Erase Color Fo LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 91 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Select a state to register an item as and then click on the button Here perform settings for state 0 Picture Display Settings L _007 General Settings Library Image Erase Color one meek Bo E C ek O Pattem JE 7 ERS Select 0 S Select a Library to be displayed for state 0 from the 2 4 Libraries Browser To select a Library from a file dif File Edt View Window Hel Tear ferent from the currently displayed Ou one click on the Library Browser s icon 6 Drag the selected item to the Dialog box s black item 2 4 Libraries display area Select foreground or background Colors if desired Picture Display Settings L _002 General Settings l Library Image No of Lib 2 92 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE Picture Display Settings L _002 General Settings Library Image F 7 Mo of Lib E _ ey ES Erase Color re _ Ik Cok 7 For States 7 and 2 repeat steps 4 to 6 Since State
23. 3D template switch parts Ale Edt View window Help Tool Bar Reverse video indicates that roh th IS item IS 5W_3D001 ON Do 30002 OFF gt SW_3D002 ON 5 SW_3D004 OF the differ currently se nt item lected el ems either left right u Displays the 6 SW _3D004 ON g SW_3D005 ON SW_3D006 OFF 10 SW_3D006 0 at i p item s registra or down tion number and title 11 SW_3D007 OF 12 SW_3D007 ON 13 SW_3D008 OF 14 SW_3D008 ON 15 Sw_3D009 off Status Bar 2 158 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Editing Library Items Three Library Item editing functions are available F Cuts a Library item which is then moved to the Clipboard the d Library item can then be moved to another screen using the Paste function Copies the selected Library item to the Clipboard Pastes the Library item Cut or Copied and temporarily stored in the Clipboard to another screen The Library item can also be Pasted to another Library file You can remove a Library item using the Delete function To do so select the Delete command from the Library dialog box s pull down Edit menu 2 4 3 Editing Library Items E Changing the Library s Display The Library s image display size and type can be changed Also you can change from one Library file to another Library Size When either the gi a 1 or a ico
24. Bo Oe o E Ea Up to 20 channels can be desig D _ nated for a Project file including the Data Sampling frequency num 6 After all of Part s attributes have been entered or ber selected click on the button Up to 8 Trend Graph display areas The Trend Graph s outline will appear in the Base screen can be placed on a single screen next to your cursor 7 Click on the point where the Trend Graph s top left To cancel the placement click on corner is to be placed the hal icon If desired use the Trend Graph s handles to alter its size To change a Part s size refer to after placement 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 50 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Se te NG Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS ra ROS Keypad Display Here the area used to display Pop up Keypad data is created When the Keypad Display is touched a Pop up Keypad appears allowing you to enter a value When the Keypad display is placed the Pop up Keypad will automatically be set You don t have to place a new keypad for entering numerical data E Keypad Display General Settings Attributes Keypad Input Display Settings KD_002 Enter comment data here General Settings Display Format Shape Color Description Word
25. Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing Here the procedure for pasting an object that has been Copied or Cut to the Clipboard is explained E Pasting an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 First Copy or Cut an object 2 3 5 Copy 2 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Then the outline of the object copied from the previous screen to the Clipboard will appear 3 Position the cursor and click on the point where the To cancel the paste click on the object is to be Pasted icon The object stored in the Clipboard will be Pasted to the new location When an object is copied from an other screen it will be automati cally placed at the same coordinates as its original ones To place the object at different coordinates move it after this automatic place ment I An area where text graphics or both that have been Cut or Copied are temporarily stored The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted copied from the Clipboard using the Paste function However once the Copy Cut command is executed the data stored in the Clipboard is replaced therefore only the data from the most recent Copy Cut command can be Pasted 2 130 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 1 Pasting Instruction Data By copying and pasting to the Screen Editor a logic program instruction created w
26. Confirm Script Delete Do pou want to delete this scnpt id 00000 desc warming view LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 181 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script E Editing D Script Settings Here registered D Script settings are changed After selecting the D Script settings to be changed from the D Script list and clicking on the modiy button an additional registration screen will appear Click on the button to change the D Script settings To cancel the Change command click on the button It is not possible to use the Project Manager Utility s Con vert Address area to modify addresses used in a D Script Any D Script program that requires address conversion will need to be edited manually E Important If the Save As function has been used to change a project file s External Device the D Script program will not be able to automatically change those addresses Be sure to not use D Script to perform any life threatening or possibly damaging actions E D Script Settings Copy and Paste PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down Special menu s D Script com mand 2 Click on the cow button D Script List D Script 0000 Pumo ON 3 When the button is clicked on the D Script This D Script can also be copied to copied in step 2 will be added The D Script s ID another screen number will automatically be as
27. External Device Describes the methods for connecting the LT to external Connection devices of various manufacturers provided as a P DF Manual ile Available on Describes the methods for setting the LT Editor s windows the LT Editor Online Help and dialog boxes instructions and functions of logic screen programs as well as how to seteach driver e Address settings described in these manuals are for explanatory purposes Ge re only Appropriate addresses must be set according to your requirements N External Devices Connection Manual e If you have any questions about the contents of this manual please contact your local LT distributor LT distributors will answer to your technical inquiries and provide you with technical consultation Software Trouble Report If you have any question about your personal computer or Microsoft Windows please contact your PC distributor or manufacturer LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 5 Preface E Chapter Breakdown This manual contains 10 chapters and an appendix The following is a general description of each chapter CHAPTER 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF LOGITOUCH EDITOR This chapter describes the operation of the LT Editor from start to finish It also explains the overall structure of the LT Editor Project Manager Logic Program Editor and Screen Editor areas CHAPTER 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS This chapter describes the basic operations and terminology used
28. Important Before changing the LT type check the preset data since the drawing area and func tions vary depending on the type of the LT unit File name WE 4 2 6 Changing a Save as type Windows Project Files Ite al P roject s LT Type Descinton A Important External Device Type Once the External Device is changed you must change the addresses of the Parts D Scripts and alarms and 3 Click on the button to save the file perform the LT system setup again If a project file with the same name exists LT Editor will ask if you want to replace overwrite the existing 4 2 7 Changing project file with the project file you are attempting to Your Project s External Device save If so click on the button If you do not wish to To open another overwrite the existing project file click on the project file see 1 2 2 ll Creat button ing a New Project or Selecting an Existing Project C LogiT ouchdatabase F Ade already exists AN Do cf en to erie pent ee eee y Reference as To close LT EDI TOR for Windows see 1 2 5 Quit ting LT Editor for Windows LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 9 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish A e When a Vertical LT unit is replaced with the horizontal type or vice versa the displayed screen will rotate 90 relative to the Important original data In this case you must edit the displa
29. LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish 1 4 From Start to Finish This section describes the LT Editor program s operation flow from start to finish Usage Pattern Create Select a Create Edit a Start project file with the gt Project Manager wun ne Eee Logic Program Program Editor Create Edit a Save the project screen with the and quit the Screen Editor Project Manager E Starting LT Editor 1 2 1 Getting Started The following explanation assumes your PC is turned on and the Windows desktop has appeared PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Click on the Start button and point to the Programs LogiTouch menu Then click on the 1 Project Manager command AT 1 Project Manager H ile 2 Rebuild LogiT ouch Accessories Favorites b ea StartUp P L 3 Pack Tool fis MS DOS Prompt ReadMe Documents H E windows Explorer TGF Uninstall 2 The Project Manager starts At start up a splash will appear LegitouchEcitor Ver 1 0 Project Ale Splash screen Graphic Logic Controller j Transter B Pro face Ready LogiT ouch Type A 1 4 If you double click directly on a previously made project file Ite file in Windows Explorer LT Edi tor will automatically start Click on the splash screen to close it LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 12 TR rr Oe imh Chapter
30. e The specified Word Address data is sampled each specified time or with a desired time cycle and stored it into the LS Area via the trigger bit e Data can be sampled per word and data for up to 640 words can be stored in series e Sampled data can now be backed up The backed up data can be stored in the LS Area via the Trigger Bit e Decide a channel name for each piece of sampling data e The number of channels that can be set is up to 20 for the entire system including trend graph channels When more than 20 channels are set channels after 20th will be disregarded according to the following rules Data sampling will be given priority over trend graphs Data sampling channel numbering will begin from those set previ ously 2 6 1 Data Sampling Settings Add Edit or Special Data Sampling Delste 5 se An example of the Data Sampling Setting dialog box is shown below Data Sampling Settings Registers additional Data Sampling Settings Lists the l Changes the Data registered Data Sampling Setting Sampling attributes Settings Channel name and description Deletes the regis tered Data Sampling Settings LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 207 2 6 Data Sampling Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Registering Data Sampling Settings Additional Data Sampling Settings are registered When the _4cd__ button is clicked on the Data Sampling Setting scr
31. from a Library file different than a 100 switch the currently displayed Library file click on the icon 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files 2 Via the Library Browser select the Edit menu Cut command or click on the icon The selected Library will be cut A 100 switch 3 Open a desired Library file and via the Library To register the Library item to a Browser select the Edit menu Paste command new Library file click on the or click on the icon icon To register the Library item to a Li The following steps are the same as those used for a brary file different from the cur Library Item registration rently displayed one click on the 4 Input the Item s Cell Number and Description icon In the Register Number area the smallest number in the currently open Library file s empty numbers will be au tomatically displayed To change it input the desired number 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files Cell Number Description zw 2 170 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the button to register the Library Item The registered Library will be displayed on the Browser Gull cpw production File Edit View Window Help E Copying a Library Item Here a previously registered Library item will be copied PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Open th
32. menu screen Confirm Alarm Replace Alarm Mo 5 already exists Overnyrite The selected alarm data is moved to the specified line Bit AGGEESS Type ae oose simmer Pon a a am e 1 E A p3 o n wp hye 3 0 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing E Copy Copies the selected line of alarm data and stores it on the clipboard PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the alarm line to be copied Even if bit addresses have been lta line 1Mcaae specified if message data has not 1 x000 Bulletin Tank temperature UF been entered the Alarm Editor data 2 ASOO050 Suniel Tarik J mperature LIP cannot be saved a Ne 00051 Summary Tank C temperature UF 4 s 00052 To select several lines drag the mouse between the target lines or 2 Select the Edit menu Copy command or click click on the target line while on the 3 icon to import alarm data to the Clipboard olding down the or The selected alarm data will be copied to the clipboard key BitAddess Type Message 1 xom Summary Tank A temperature UP 2 xo0050 SUMMA Tank B temperature UP a xo OO O aren Tank C temperature UP e T 3 Select the destination line BitAddess Type Message 1 xom SUMMA Tank A temperature LIF 2 xo SUMMA Tank B temperature LIF 3 feos Buletin ank C a xoo52 Summary
33. n Pasting Other Software Bitmap Data 2 152 Nesting 2 116 No of Display Digits 2 51 Number of Copies 2 131 2 136 2 137 Numeric Display Alarm Settings Attributes 2 74 Initial Screen Settings 6 5 Interlock 2 15 Justification 2 112 Keyboard Compatibility List 4 Keypad Display Color Shape Attributes 2 52 Keypad Display Display Format Attributes 2 51 Keypad Display General Settings Attributes 2 51 Label 2 10 Label Attributes 2 15 Library Browser 2 158 Library Size 2 159 Line space 2 11 Line Type Conversion DXF to PRW 2 232 Line Polyline Attributes 2 96 Link Select 2 220 List Display 2 226 List Screens 7 16 Listing Screens 4 2 Load Screen and Search Screen Settings 4 17 Loading a Mark Screen 2 118 Loading a Screen 2 116 Logging Data Read Timing 10 31 Logic Program Restrictions 10 LS Area Filing Data Structure 10 5 LT Editor Part Type Summary 2 2 LT System Settings 6 7 LT Type 1 5 Managing Filing Data in Group 10 3 Numeric Display Display Format Attributes 2 73 Numeric Display General Settings Attributes 2 73 Numeric Display Shape Color Attributes 2 74 Co Opening a New Screen 1 12 Opening a Previously Saved Screen 1 13 Operation Bit Address 2 14 Operators 2 183 Options Dialog Box 9 3 overseas products 1 Cr Pasting a Logic Program Instruction to the Screen 2 132 Pasting a Part placed to the screen to a Logic Pro 2 134 Pasting an Object 2 130 PDB File 2 6 Pi
34. next to your cursor 2 84 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the point where the Date Display s top left To cancel the placement click on corner is to be placed the bal icon If desired use the Date Display s handles to alter its size Regardless of whether the Date Display is scaled up or 7 change a ia eee _ a f down the character size will not change To change the Slee Ce a character size and position directly select the charac Bown ters inside the border Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings evga 2 3 15 Changing Attributes When scaling up or down the dis play area if the key is pressed at the same time the characters will scale in unison with the border LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 85 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 86 2 1 17 Time Displays Time Display areas can be created based on the LT s internal calendar function Time will be expressed in 24 hour format E g 2 25 pm gt 14 25 Only one Time Display Part can be used per screen E Time Display General Settings Attributes Time Settings TD_001 Select the Enter Comment Character Size General Settings data here Description Character Size j pas Border Color Ean iin oO
35. 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing the Data Logging Display The procedure for setting the Data Logging Display is described below The logged data for the block number stored at the block number desig nated address is displayed A Date Time Data D0100 i gt ON 15 0 mom ro If 3 is stored at D0100 The logged data in block No 3 will be displayed PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Data Logging Display com mand or click on the gg icon 2 In the General Settings tab specify the block num 2 1 13 W Data ber designated address data edit and whether the Logging Display General Set interlock is enabled or disabled tings Attributes Block Number Specify D0100 for the block number designated address Address Logging Display LG_001 General Settings Data Type Color Switch Setting Switch Shape Coler Enter D0100 Description Block Number Address E im Data Edit T beaet Interlock Address ay Dooooooa 3 In the Data Type tab specify the display settings If necessary select a clear color in the Color tab Logging Display LG_001 x General Settings Data Type Color Switch Setting Switch Shape Color Enter 7 Border Type Flow E order ee E oe H Spacing ia i Scroll Total with Data aiaa raS E DE E EEA K a Ce ee e LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operatio
36. 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 13 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 After confirming that the file name is correct select the Actions menu Start command or click on the icon The selected file will then be rebuilt AP Rebuild BE File a Se ics Rebuild File D ProPBwin database Process prey Status Actons Help Total Job To cancel file rebuilding click on File Actions Help aang the icon Rebuild File D 4ProPE Winkdatabase Process prw Status Total Job 5 Select the File menu Exit command or click on the icon and finish the rebuild operation 4 14 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing ia Converting Addresses and Device Codes This feature allows you to change a Part s addresses This address conver sion can be performed on either word or bit addresses This command is useful for changing both addresses or an address device code PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Utility menu Convert Addresses command 2 Select the type of the address conversion to perform In word address conversion mode Word Address or Bit Address Part addresses specified by a bit ad Address Conversion E dress can also be changed within a specified range When
37. 2 908 amp PE E 1 10 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 2 From Start to Finish E Saving a Logic Program PROCEDURE 1 Select the Logic Program Editor s File menu Save s command or click on The logic program you are saving will replace the exist ing program E Closing a Logic Program PROCEDURE 1 Select the Logic Program Editor s File menu Exit command 2 The Logic Program Editor will close If you attempt to close an updated logic program with out saving it the system asks if you wish to save the current program If you click on the button the system saves the updated data If you click on the button the system closes the Logic Program Editor without saving the updated data C LogilT ouch SAMPLES oda D Do you want to save the changes to C SLogiT ouch S4MPLE SS oda LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals REMARKS After saving the program the Logic Program Editor remains open When saving a logic program vari ables registered with the Logic Pro gram Editor will be registered with the Symbol Editor as Logic sym bols 4 2 5 Symbol Editor Important When variables are used in a drawing be sure to make a drawing after saving a logic program REMARKS You can also close the logic pro gram by clicking on the x button at the
38. 5 xo Buletin 6 OOO Summary 00055 Summar e xo0086 Is J 00057 Summar 4 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the A icon to paste alarm data to the destination from the Clipboard If the same data already exists the system asks 1f each file item must be overwritten If you select l the desired file will be overwritten If you ele the desired file will not be overwritten and the system will ask the same question for the next alarm If you select vestoai all existing alarms will be over written If you select you will return to the menu screen LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide JT 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS PROCEDURE REMARKS Confirm Alarm Replace Alarm Mo 5 already exists Overste The selected alarm data is copied to the specified line s l a ee ee ee l rr a ee ee 3740 O00 2 on on ey oe Ps TOSS Serer rr E Undo This feature allows you to cancel the previously performed command and return to the previous condition PROCEDURE REMARKS When an alarm has been unintentionally deleted 1 Select the Edit menu Undo command or click Edited message characters cannot on the icon be restored with the Undo com a mand 1 somo o Bulletin Tank temperature UF 2 xo OoOo Summary Tank B temperature UP 3 0005 Summary Tank C
39. CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Function The Word Switch s functions are as follows Word Set When the Word Switch is pressed constant data is written to the External Device s designated Word Address Fixed or default values will be written to the timer counter etc Add Sub Every time the Word Switch is pressed the Data value is added to the data currently in the External Device s desig nated Word Address and the result is then written to the External Device s address If a Data value is positive the function will increment and if it is negative it will decre ment Digit ADD Every time the Word Switch is pressed the designated decimal place s data will be added by the Constant s value The result will not be carried up to the next digit so 9 simply rolls around to 0 Select the data format from Bin and BCD Digit SUB Every time the Word Switch is pressed the designated decimal place s data will be subtracted by the Constant s value The result will not be carried down to the lower digit so 9 simply rolls around 0 Select the data format from Bin and BCD Interlock Only when a bit designated via Interlock Address 1s in a state that has been selected via Touch available condition radio buttons the switch becomes effective Whether the switch is effective in ON state or in OFF sate is selectable here Touch Available Interlock Address Touch Available Condition Status
40. Data Edit 2 1 Parts The logged data can be modified by directly touching the frame of each item in the Data Logging Display placed on the LT If Data Edit is enabled touching the cell of data that can be modified in the table will cause the buzzer to sound and allow you to enter data If Data Edit is disabled this touching will be invalid and the buzzer will not sound logged The data that can be modified is only Date and Value that have been If a block or logged data is selected by changing the block number during on screen modification of data the data edit mode is canceled If the cell is moved beyond the display area using the scroll keys during the data edit mode the data edit mode is canceled Interlock The interlock can only be activated when the data edit capability is enabled If the interlock is enabled data can be modified only when the bit address for the interlock is ON If the interlock is disabled data can always be modified by touching it Note If the bit address for the interlock is turned OFF during on screen modifica NY tion of data the data edit mode is canceled 2 68 Select a Border Type of the display area Specify whether the scrolling of the total width data section is enabled or disabled Border Type E Data Logging Display Data Type Attributes Logging Display LG_001 x General Settinge Data Type Color Switch Setting Switch Shape Color Border
41. E g Nesting Objects Twice 3 layers B100 B10 B1 C c o D o Do g i c 6 Load Screen B100 Load Screen B10 e The load screen nesting condition can be viewed via the load screen nesting XVX display function 2 7 9 Display at Screen Level Change Structure E Loading a Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Load Screen command or click on the icon 2 Select a desired screen from the list or enter that Only screens in the currently used screen s number directly on the Screen No field via Project file can be loaded Screens the keyboard and then click on the button in other project files can not be Then the screen s outline and center point will appear in loaded the drawing area next to your cursor The current selected Screen can not be loaded on to itself Load Screen screen No 11 Operation Monitor 13 Trouble 14 Keyboard In 2 116 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 Click on the point where the Screen s top left corner A loaded screen cannot be edited is to be placed while it is being used on a different The image s center point is left top corner of its border i e loaded screen You will need and for other objects the screen center mark will be the to open the original screen to per placement point form any editing oe a ce Soe OPERATION MONITOR
42. Enter M0064 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select ing a Part Shape Shape Browser F 2 gt aur MD_3D001 MD_3D004 MD_3D005 MD_3D006 Current POE File c propbwin pdb pdb pdb Title MD_ 30001 ia 2 80 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE 4 In the Messages area input the number of the mes sages and characters used General Settings Messages Enter 16 No of Disp Messages Characters sili Delete eg ta C Message Style oli el Normal oo Enter 4 i Raised Color Text Color Mil A m C E Plate Color Hi ME Ce Lo 5 Enter your Alarm Messages Select the message number to be registered and enter the message When displaying a border with no mes sage be sure to delete the words Undefined Select Colors and Character Size if necessary Example When registering the message A Unit Op erating as message Number 1 Message Display Settings MW_001 Enter A Unit Messages l Ho of Display operation Messages Ch racters Selected Message La PE Message Stl H PE 2 tm oo Faised Color Select 1 Test Color i OCS as Plate Color i CE oe co 6 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Message Display s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor LogiTouch Editor
43. If you do not set a title the title of the original BMP file will be specified Convert Bitmap to Image Screen s Source Effects Destination Screen Title LTEditor bmp Coe e J 5 Click on the Convert button to perform data con version The image data conversion starts Then the converted image will be displayed Convert Bitmap to Image Screen s Effects Destination I Screen Color Monochrome 2 B Color 1 BA Eala 1 E Calar Source Screen Title LTE ditor bmp Size 14476 Screen Layout First Screen 1 tere Heb 6 If the displayed image is correct click on the Sae button An Image screen is created Image Screen Preview 7 Click on the button to quit the conver sion mode Bitmap Convert G Bitmap Image Screen conversion completed successfully LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen REMARKS The number of colors specified for Screen Color must be equal to the number of display colors supported by your LT series If the number of colors 1s differ ent the display speed will be low ered Any colors that are not supported with your LT series cannot be dis played If the same screen number already exists the system asks if you want to replace the existing screen with the one you are attempting to save If so selec
44. Important not be answered e Understand that it may take some time for us to respond since your question must be carefully checked and recreated Pro face FAX and Email Information e Pro face Europe FAX No 31 0 20 6464 358 Email support proface com e Pro Face Korea FAX No 82 0 2 3664 6839 Email proface proface co kr e Pro Face Taiwan FAX No 886 0 2 8773 7892 Email proface proface com tw e Pro face America North and South FAX No 1 630 351 1102 Email support profaceamerica com Digital Japan FAX and Email Information e Digital Electronics Corporation FAX No 81 6 6613 5982 Email support digital co jp Also if you require instruction about the correct usage of your LT Editor software please use the above information to contact your local LT Editor distributor LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 25 Appendix 4 Software Trouble Report Appendices software Trouble Report Company name Department TEL Your name FAX Company Address Software SerialNo _ J We cannot respond to any questions without your software s serial number Software name LT Editor Other Ver Your LT model Type of External Device PC Manufacturer Model Printer Manufacturer Model Driver version Describe the details and how to reproduce each problem Also please include a list of any related documents Prepare one report sheet for
45. JF Base Screen F Alarm Message F Sampling Data Ja Eiling Data M Data Logging Settings J Global O Script m D Script Function 4 16 x C Close R C After Start Address jon Screen Range i All 4 Selection Screens From 1 To f1 ie Line Mo Fror 1 To i Fe LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS 7 Click on the Start button The progress of the address conversion will be displayed Conversion Status Converted Screens alo Ld 8 To stop the address conversion prior to normal completion click on the Close button Conversion Status Converted Screens 4 2 4 Convert Load Screens This feature allows you to convert the currently loaded screens to different ones via the Load Screen command all at once E Load Screen and Search Screen Settings Here specify the screens to be converted Enter the numbers of the Search Screens on which Load Screens have been called up and called up Load Screens Specify the Load Screen Conversion range of Load os Screen No g Convert Screens before r Betore Screen Type i Start Mo conversion r Base End No Clim kiak Specify the Top Hep Specify the T Image Screen number p a Load Screen of the Load Type screens after CoO nversion Screen Search Result fi Screen Specify the aan
46. No of Data Blocks Description Heat Control No of Data Item Data Storage Start Address ooo o FEI Data Format jeer fF Display Format E Data Transmission via External Device Trigger Automatic Data Transmission Block 1 s data is transmitted when the Control Word Address changes Filing Setting Write Settings From Filing Data to P Filing ON OFF SRAM Control Word Address DOO200 i aae TE Write Completed Bit Address M00001 External Device amp SRAM Direct Data Write Completed Bit Address pea Transmission Settings External Device amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings Control Word Address D00201 D External Device Controlled Transfer Tran smit C ompleted B it Addre SS Control Word Address 00 0000 Pe eee M00002 Transmit Completed Bit Address og ooqo00 fe ieee AN When using multiple folders the Control Word Addresses will be D00200 to Note D00201 which overlap with the following transfer setting SRAM amp External y Device Control Word Address D00201 Write Sethings From Filing Data To SAAM LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 15 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 16 E Filing Data Data Transfer LT Internal memory Filing data p Back up SRAM External Device Filing data SRAM When the 0 Bit of a data transmission s Control Word Address D00200 is turned ON all the filing data i
47. When the number of the divisions is specified as 8 a total of 9 divi sion lives will be displayed LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS The following explanation is divided into two parts first when creating a linear type scale and second when creating a curved type scale Creating a Linear type scale Vertical with 8 divi sions Specify the area of division lines by a rectangle 3 Use the mouse s cursor to create a rectangle in the drawing area i e left click to indicate the linear scale s start point a 4 Complete the rectangle by left clicking on the Scale s Holding down the key while end point b performing step 4 will draw a per The rectangle shape will disappear and be replaced by fect square division lines When using the keyboard to per a form drawing press the J key to designate the start and finish points To cancel the drawing click on the ja icon g it ty Creating a Curved type scale 8 divisions Specify the area of division lines using double circles 3 Use the mouse s cursor to create a circle on the draw ing area i e left click to indicate the curved scale s start point a LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 109 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Click on the r
48. and start and end coordinates FoR Ree eK ca i N me eo 2 184 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e Circle Draws a circle at the designated point When the Pattern check box is checked a filled circle will be drawn Select and enter the line type or fill pattern when selecting a pattern color attributes center coordinates and radius value CH Fil aes aes eee oR PPO kK ik bl N a Centre Jo Sl Radius e Square Rectangle Draws a square at the designated position When the Pattern check box is checked a filled square will be drawn When selecting a beveled square a beveling dot can be entered Select and enter the line type or fill pattern when selecting a pattern color attributes and start and end coordinates Square Hectangle T ok as es Pe ee E d i jm j mmga LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 185 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Math Operators e fe 7 e Addition Adds the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded Subtraction Performs subtraction on the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting from the
49. be allocated Offset Address i ee FSET we EE Offset Addresses can be designated Only temporary Word Addresses can be designated for offset value storage Addresses The offset Address format is as follows Word Address Offset Value Storage Address lt Constant Data Entry Ranges gt Data Format em O s oes Bin16 32768 32767 Bin32 2147483648 2147483647 coe OL RD eoa OO o E g Read w D0200 w D0100 t 0000 Offset Word Address Read Write gt w D0100 t 0000 100 Offset Word Address Write This Address becomes the Word Address Temporary Word Address value For the above example when the value 2 is used for t 000 the Address becomes w 0102 lt Offset Address gt The device designated as storing the offset value is not always read from the External Device It is read only when D script processing is performed If a communication error occurs dur ing device read the offset value will become 0 and the LT s internal special relay LS2032 bit 12 is turned ON When the data read is completed normally this bit is turned OFF E Important LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 191 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Word Addresses used in the offset address format are not counted as D Script Addresses e When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address an integer array
50. character size and position select the characters directly To change a Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down When scaling up or down the dis play area if the key is pressed simultaneously the characters are also scaled up or down together with the border Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 87 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Yams Picture Displays Registered Library items are displayed according to External Device Word Address changes Parts and Tags however cannot be displayed in these displays Up to 16 different kinds of Library items can be displayed on a single Picture Display 2 4 Libraries With the LT Type C the Picture Displays will not be displayed on m the LT when transferred if the LT has not been communicating Important M with the external device E Picture Display Description Attributes Picture Display Settings LB_001 Enter the Enter Comment General Settings Library Image Address to be data here ar aa monitored BScCnplori Tess o z ate The currently selected Part State s image Selects the appears here Operation Mode Address Here either a Bit or Word Address is entered after first selecting a Type either Bit or Word Mode There are two methods used to switch the Li
51. closes without saving the updated data Saving the screen Drawing Board Do vou want to save the changes to C LogiT ouch databaseFacton A Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals iyey Quitting LT Editor REMARKS When you are working on the Screen Editor or the Logic Program Editor quit the Screen Editor or the Logic Program Editor or select the Project Manager 1 2 4 W Quiting the Screen Editor LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 17 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 3 Project Manager im Project Manager All LT Editor system level settings and functions are controlled via the Project Manager 1 3 1 Project Manager Areas and Functions Here each of the Project Manager s features is explained To begin working with LT Editor simply click on the desired button a Title Bar GT Factory Alte Factory A Project Manager Project Control Screen Setup _Litiity Help 5 Copy b Menu Bar c Pull Down Menu e Function Buttons Logis Program Editor Transfer fis d Status Bar Pro face LogiT ouch Type A a Title Bar Displays the current project s file name and title b Menu Bar Displays the menus used for the operation of LT Editor When you select a desired menu using the mouse or keyboard one of the pull down menus described below will appear c Pull Down Menu When you select a desired item on the menu
52. e Memory Copy memcpy Memory Copy memcpy Copies device memory all at once Data for the number of Addresses will be copied to the copy destination Word Addresses beginning from the copy original Word Address The number of Addresses effective is 1 to 640 Format memcpy Copy destination Word Address Copy original Word Address the number of Addresses LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 187 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script A E Important 2 188 Example When copying data of D0100 to D0109 to D0200 to D0209 memcpy w D0200 w 0100 10 lt Memory Copy memcpy gt Original copy data will be read from the External Device only once when required If a communication error occurs during data read the LT s internal special relay LS2032 s Bit 12 will be turned ON When data read is completed normally Bit 12 will be turned OFF As the number of Addresses increases the more time Is required for writing data to the External Device Depending on the number of Addresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes Although it will depend on the number of Addresses to be copied data will be read from the original copy data then divided into pieces and copied to the copy destination There fore even if a communication error occurs during data read data may be partially written Unless data write is completed for the designated number o
53. emergency stop switch Also for other kinds of systems similar mechanical switches must be provided to ensure safe operation of those sys tems Do not turn off your personal computer s power switch during the execu tion of a program Do not change the contents of this product s project files using the Text Editor software 8 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Preface Drawing e The LT Editor s display screen and descriptions used in the manuals are based on the color display when the LT main unit is in the REVERSE LCD mode Please note that white black color on the LT Editor screen and LT main unit screen will be reversed when the LCD is in the NORMAL mode LogiTouch Series User Manual e When an LT unit is vertically installed the panel s coordinates will differ from those used on the screen editor software Therefore when you enter screen coordinates using tags or D Script please consider the LT s orientation 0 0 on the screen editor software 0 0 on the LT series panel Functions and Settings e Certain functions and settings supported by the LT unit are not supported by the LT Editor program and vice versa Setting and functions set via the LT unit Not by LT Editor Language Font selection LT Date Time settings LT Self Diagnosis Function Functions and settings supported by LT Editor only Not by the LT unit The following sett
54. filing data stored in the LT s internal memory screen data is written to backup SRAM This prepares for filing data transfer In order to tranfer data to the External Device you need to first write data to backup SRAM Only 1 item of filing data can be written to backup SRAM ve When using filing data be sure to enter the Write Settings data NG LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 9 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features Control Word Address Filing Data SRAM Designate a Word Address to use as a trigger or designate the mode to use when writing to backup SRAM This trigger controls the data write timing When using multiple filing data items designate the folder numbers The Control Word Address will be as follows When Using Multiple Folders When Not Using Multiple Folders Trigger Mode Trigger Mode 1 Folder No 1 to 64 lt Trigger Mode gt 1 109 87 l 5 Reservation Reservation All OFF All OFF 0 0 Trigger ON Write OFF Notwrite Write mode Fixed to OFF Screen data to SRAM Write Completed Bit Address Filing Data gt SRAM Designate a specific Bit Address to be turned ON when the data write to LT backup SRAM is completed Rote If data cannot be transmitted to backup SRAM due to insufficient memory XX LS2032 s Bit 9 will be turned ON When data is transmitted to backup SRAM again use either the designated com
55. if the number of vertices is more than 5 Fill will not be converted and only its trace will be con verted into POLYLINE CONTINUOUS Load Screen e The screen will be retrieved from its attributes and screen number and if it exists and each drawing data will be converted e The called up screen s data will be converted in the same layer as other drawing data e Only Base screen will be converted TEXT e Characters written horizontally will be converted into BIGFONT Those written vertically will be converted into TATEGAKI vertical type of BIGFONT e 1 4 sized characters will be all converted into half sized characters e Half sized 1 4 sized characters written horizontally will be converted with a relative scale of 1 2 in the X direction and other size characters will be converted with a relative scale of 1 e Both half and full sized characters written vertically will be converted with a scale of 1 for their height and width Therefore the half sized characters will become the same size as the full sized characters e Character types of Bold and Raised will not be converted e Due to font difference and other elements text will be different from the Base screen after conversion Load Mark e The Mark screen will be retrieved from the screen number if that screen exists the dot pattern will be converted into POLYLINE CONTINUOUS Part e Each Part s data will be converted into drawing data Log
56. is ON lights up is OFF turns off PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Lamp command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings area enter a Bit Address Lamp Settings LA_001 Enter X00017 here Stake 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select Select Colors and input a Label if desired ing a Part Shape Shape Browser i PDB File Curent PDE File c propb3winkpdbop4 3d01 pdb Title LM 30001 F 2 24 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 4 Switch the state of the lamp with the On Off but tons and then select Colors and input a Label Lamp Settings LA_001 General Settincs SrapeColar Label Descriptiar Bt Address State Switches the lamp On Off Ercwser 5 After all of the Lamp s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Lamp s outline will appear in the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Lamp s top left corner is to be placed If necessary use the Lamp s handles to alter its size REMARKS With the Blink check box checked cal and if the Bit is turned ON the Lamp will blink Lamp blinking can also be seen via the pull down menu View s Preview com mand 2 7 3 Preview Screen To cancel the placement click on the he icon To change the Part s s
57. it is only scaled up to the desired location or down click on and drag the ob ject while holding down the key gt Also you can move the object by zooming out the screen or using the keyboard 1 5 2 Display Area 50 100 200 To cancel the movement click on the icon Q te To move an object horizontally or vertically do so while holding the Shift X key down In this case the object will be moved in either the horizontal or vertical direction where the moving distance is greater To move and scale up down an object designating its coordinates can be used 2 3 16 Changing Coordinates 2 126 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Scaling means changing the size and proportion of an object This function allows you to easily scale an object up larger or down smaller Be sure the object s handles are displayed as E Scaling An Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Click on the object to select it The object s handles 2 3 1 Selecting will appear to show that it is selected Objects L Re sizing will depend on which handle is dragged 2 Place the cursor on an object s handle and after the double arrow cursor appears drag the handle to re Ex To scale a square up or down size the object Corner Handles proportionally Top Bottom handles vertically Right Left hand
58. its color address etc Also with objects of the same type you can change the same attribute of all the objects of that type at the same time E Changing Attributes PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 First select an object to change its attributes O20 Selecine In this case an unfilled rectangle drawn with a solid line Objects While the attributes of Grouped ob jects generally cannot be changed 2 Select the Edit menu Change Attribute command the same type objects can be hanged at the same time When or click on the 7 icon caang Grouped Parts have been selected only their addresses can be changed 2 3 15 Chang olor ing Attributes Confirming Ad ee aek dresses 3 Select a new attribute from the dialog box Here a dotted line is selected Fo Pee oo icki ro s m Ko Instead of clicking on the gT icon simply double click on the object 4 Click on the button to register your change When selecting it to display the At tribute Settings dialog box skip quare Rectangle x step 2 E Ori i op olan Cemer Cancel ZZEE Fo Pelee Ko om _ j Je You can reverse the attributes changes only for the most recent change by clicking on the x icon To cancel the attribute changes click on the button in the dialog box GX re You can select more than one object of the same type and change the at X tributes of each at the same time With all the desired
59. lt 2048 When using loop operation the number of blocks needs to be designated to decide the Logging area size LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 35 10 2 Logging i Chapter 10 Advanced Features The External Device monitors bits at approximately 150 ms intervals Therefore a slight time delay may occur until the LT Important detects the Trigger or the Data Clear Bit Set these Bit change Se te NG 10 36 intervals to the length of communication cycle or to 150ms whichever is longer e Each piece of data to be logged inside the record is only 16 Bits long When the External Device device uses 32 Bit length addresses only the lower 16 Bits of data are logged e The LT s internal clock controls time using the last two digits of the year display Therefore the logging data s year is controlled by these digits e When the Start and End times are the same or when the time interval is lt 0 data logging is performed once for each block e Data stored in the backup SRAM is cleared via the Data Clear Bit Address when the Clear Bit changes from OFF to ON e When the LT s power is turned ON if the Data Clear Bit Address s Bit has been turned ON the LT deletes the backup SRAM logging data and turns OFF the Clear Bit e With loop operation and time setup designated when Data Logging Auth Bit Address is turned OFF or when the LT s power is turned OFF after the
60. same ID No for multiple Filing Data Displays File No 1 Enter the previously entered filing data number Display File Display FD_O01 No of Display Lines 3 No of Display Characters 10 Direct Selection Selected Cursor Position Control Selected No of Display Lines No of Display Characters 10 E Mj Direct Selection lt Cursor Position Control gt e Even when the screens are changed on the LT monitor the current File Name Display s cursor position can be preserved e Cursor Position Control can be designated when setting up the File Name Display e When the LT s main power is turned ON or the LT is reset the cursor will appear on the first line e The cursor position will be stored for each ID No The storage area of an ID No and its cursor position correspond to each other To retain the cursor position be sure that the File Name Display ID Nos do not overlap each other on any of the screens For more detailed information about the File Name Display Operation Manual 2 1 12 File Name Display Style Color File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Border Type Display color NoBorder Fo MMC COMI No bk IF al 6 BOOS COM N e F oH Eras e Color Be O88 Oe Border Type Outer and inner borders Display Color Select desired colors Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and
61. 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Tiling Patterns Nine different tiling patterns are available These patterns can be selected for squares circles filled squares and polygonal objects When combining foreground Fg and background Bg colors a variety of filled patterns can be drawn Select a pattern fo eee __ When a square or circle is drawn only the line type will be displayed 1in1 tially To display the pattern selections check the Fill check box check mark will appear i DY Fo Pome ek Fo Pee ek fo Be me eo e Bee eK Circle O val Circle O val Dots can be drawn in 1 2 3 and 5 dot units To draw a dot simply click on the desired point E Dot Attributes Select the dot unit used Displays the currently for drawing selected dot s image i 2Dots i Dots ta SDots Fo O90 Kn Select colors and blink ing if desired LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 270 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing E Creating a Dot PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Dot command or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes of a dot to be drawn Select a dot type and colors if desired Dot type fe 1Dot i 2Dots i Dots i SDots Fo OOO Ko 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area A dot will be When using the keyboard to draw drawn at
62. 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 31 Memo 1 39 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Ya CREATING BASE SCREENS commands can all be used Also Edit commands can be used to modify any Parts or objects that you have created In addition to editing these screen objects the procedures for registering Library Items and Windows are also explained T o create Base screens the Editor area s Part Draw and Menu Bar PA EE EA EA A N EI E E T Parts PAS E E AONA E Drawing pA E E A E O N Object Editing PA EE T E OOIE OEE EOE TIES EA Libraries PA E E E D Script Global D Script D E E Data Sampling Ded ES E T Efficient Drawing Techniques BD E DXF Conversion LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 1 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Parts such as Switches Lamps and Graphs can be placed on Base screens Each Part s attributes such as setting Addresses and colors will be desig nated via the dialog box Switches and Lamps can be selected while viewing their images via the Browser After designating all the necessary Part at tributes decide their position and size on the object drawing area The Parts menu s commands are effective only on Base screens Usage Pattern Decide on Select the specific Specify its Place it Parts atypeof Partfrom the Fata onthe Ar Part Browser Screen Select a desired icon from the Parts Tool Bar
63. 1 2 From Start to Finish PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Project Manger s Project menu New command or click on i e LegitouchEcitor Ver 1 0 l Ei Project A og i Pro face LogiT ouch Type A I Z 2 Enter a description and select the LT Display and When entering a description you External Device Then click on ok can use up to 60 single byte char acters n Soa To set the Exter eae nal Device see LT Editor Exter LogiTouch Typed nal Device Connection Manual External Device Type 3 The LT Editor will then ask you if you wish to create 1 2 3 Creating a Lop program or a screen If you click on the Editing Saving a Logic Pro l button the Logic eta Editor gram 1 2 4 Opening Closing will start If you click on the button Saving a screen the Screen Editor will start If you click on the f button you will go back to the Project Manager Screen Edit Screen 1 6 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 2 From Start to Finish Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals Sr If you attempt to create another project file without saving a newly created Note YY project file the system asks if you wish to save the current file If you click on the ve button the Save As dialog box appears If you click on the a button the system opens a new screen without saving the current project file
64. 1 is substituted in D100 Otherwise O is substituted in D100 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 203 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Yao Application Example In this example we create a program for a temperature management system which checks an error bit in the host External Device to detect the tem perature 70 or above and 30 or below If an error is found the LT displays alarm messages accordingly This system also counts the detected errors Error bit M0001 Temperature information gt D200 Error counter 70C or above LS300 Error counter 30C or below LS301 Alarm message screen number storage address LS302 1 From the Special menu select the D script option Special D 5 cript Global D 5cript Data Sampling 2 When the D Script List appears click on the Add button The D Script Editor will appear D Scrpt List D Sccript Show Toolbox 2 204 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 3 Enter an ID number and Description In this example enter 00000 in the ID field and enter Alarm Display in the Description field o m Descriptiory Alarm Display 4 Select a trigger type In this example select the Bit Rising left side option and designate a bit address M0001 Edge Bit Addre
65. 2 is used to delete Library item from the screen nothing is specified for it 8 After all of the item s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Picture Display s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 9 Click on the point where the Picture Display s top left corner is to be placed Here the Picture Display s border dotted line or filled square and the Library item will appear At this time the Library item corresponding to the state currently se lected in the Dialog box is displayed on the Picture Dis play Regardless of whether the Picture Display s border is scaled up or down the Library item s size will not change The border size is common through all the Li braries The Library item s size and position can be al tered by clicking directly on its inside border REMARKS To delete a Library item click on the button To cancel the placement click on the icon Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings Also switching the states allows you to view the Library display status 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Changing the state via the Parts State Change Tool Bar after plac ing a Part allows you to check each state s Library display condition ote Every time the screen is opened the state will be reset to 0 If a state with no Library registered is designated n
66. Address Enter the The currently LL E Word Address selected Part s used to store image will appear display data here Calls up the Part ma Shape Browser Browser Parts can be selected directly from the Browser Pace J Cancel Hep Word Address The Word Address is used to store the keypad display s data E Keypad Display Display Format Attributes Keypad Input Display Settings KD_O01 x The decimal General Settings Display Format Shape Color point is not Data Display Format included in the esi No of Display Digits TE display digits E Asri j Enter the No JE Bit 29 Bit Decimal Places i Di mp a i Character Size O isplay When Numeric is i Decimal 3 Decimal Di it 1 Hex i Hex IGItS selected these rs BCD 4 BCD selections appear 5 oa Enter the No of Digits after the decimal point Select the Data Length and Data Format Cancel Character size can be selected here Data Display Format Here the data s Format Code and Bit Length are selected When selecting decimal negative numeric data can also be displayed by clicking on the Code check box No of Display Digits Here the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point is input LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 51 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Decimal Places Here the number of digits to the right of the decimal point
67. Alarm Display With Alarm Message text the horizontal and vertical size of the text is specified in the Setup Area s Initial Setup screen menu or in the LT unit s Setup mode Character sizes can be set to either x 1 x 2 or x 4 When the horizontal and vertical sizes are set to 1 x 1 an alphanumeric character occupies 16 x 8 dots and a Chinese character occupies 16 x 16 dots The Alarm Display and Alarm Message will display on the LT unit s panel screen as shown below Alarm Display Part Vake Alarm Valveo Alarm Alarm No Valet Alarm lt Right to left scrolling display Usage Pattern Select the alarm type Screen gt Alarm Editor Alarm Message Sum Setup or mary Click on Enter a Set up Alarm save the Alarm message Message Summary Editor 5 1 1 Alarm Editor Via the Alarm Editor messages and monitor bits are registered for each alarm type An example of an Alarm Message screen used for entering a message is as follows The tab width for each item in the Alarm Editor messages can be adjusted by positioning the mouse pointer on the border between items and then dragging it The changed size will be saved and used on the subsequently opened screens LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing E Alarm Message Summary Screen
68. Blk blink Erase Color Select the desired color Select the display area color to use when a Filing Data Display is cleared When using a monochrome LT select Black LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 19 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features Switch Settings File Display FD_O01 B Send To External Device From SRAM General Settings Display Style Calor Switch Settings SwitchType Color Selected Automatic Switch Placement Method Saas Send To SRAM From External Device ai Extemal Device gt SRAM C LS o SREM Selected Rel Up C Giemal Berea Us Roll Up Not selected J Rall Down CLS gt ExtemallDewiee Roll Down Not selected Send To LS From SRAM Not selected Send To SRAM From LS Not selected Send To LS From External Device Not selected Sending To External Device From LS Not selected Switch Type Color File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Border Color BB OS OME Nobn iF Border Color Select the desired color Select the desired color for the Filing Name Display s border E Place Click on the Place button to display the Filing Name Display If desired change the Part s size via its sizing handles E 1234567890 or 2 TA J DEW ora kd To change the Filing Name Display s layout or attributes first ungrou
69. C OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES a 2 To change the External Device click on the desired External Device Change External Device Type External Device Type OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES MEMORY LINK SIO Type REC CBASA Mini SERIES SHINEO TECHNOS INDICATING OMRON THERMAL NEO SERIES TOHO ELECTRONICS TTM SERIES A YAMATAKE SOC SERIES E Change External Device Type x Important Once you change a project s External Device Type SKEMA PEVCE VOU MUSHIE enter that project s device ad dresses for Parts D script and alarms 4 28 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 3 Project Compression Decompression i Project Compression Decompression Compressing a project file reduces the size of its data to accomodate a standard floppy disk s limited capacity A compressed project file and its screens however cannot be edited To edit the screens you must first de compress the project file Usage Pattern Start LogiTouch Pack Tool gt Action gt Compress Project File Designate a Project Click onthe Decompress Project File file to be compressed or ai decompressed Click on or Ea A general description of the compression tool is as follows button am Pack Tool Action Help Displays the file name of the project to be compressed Fis Name fd decompressed Status Displays t
70. Click on the oval s radius point b In step 4 holding down the Ctrl An oval will appear and the arc s base line will be dis key draws a circular arc played gt 5 Click on the arc s start point c or on its elongation When using the keyboard to draw an arc use the arrow keys to move the cursor first to its center point then to another point on its circum ference radius point and then to its start and end points Press the key after specifying each of these points 6 Click on the arc s end point d The arc will be drawn registered To cancel the drawing action click on the ja icon E d Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set h tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes E Drawing a Pie Sector Follow the same steps used for the drawing of Arcs When using the same procedure to draw an Arc LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 103 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing To use the Fill command simply left click your cursor on top of an object s enclosed area The selected Fill pattern will then spread outward until it reaches a boundary A boundary can be any line or Fill that is the same color as that chosen for the Fill s foreground background or border 7 lt Cautions when Filling an Object gt important Be sure that the area to be filled is com
71. Device Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the External Device to the LS area Send To External Device From LS Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the LS area to the Exter nal LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 63 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E File Name Display Switch Type Color Attributes Specify colors border colors for the function switches which are placed automatically 2 1 3 Function Switches E Place File Name Display Shows how to call up the File Name Display Registered File No 1 s filing data is displayed on the File Name Display with 3 display lines and 10 display characters By pressing a function key File Name Key filing data can be transferred from the SRAM to the External Device or from the External Device to the SRAM For filing data list and regis tering filing data refer to 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Function PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu File Name Display com mand or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings tab enter the File No of E File Name Dis filing data to be transferred and the File Name play General Settings Attributes Display s ID No Here since File No 1 s data is transferred enter 1 for the file number The File Name Display s ID No is 0 To transfer Filing Data via the LS area mark the check box for Use LS Area in the
72. Direction Select the Trend Graph s display direction either Up Left Down or Right that part To let the shade displayed properly click on the button Sr If Display Direction is changed for a 3D part its shade is rotated along with Note Na and select the part again from Shape Browser Axis Scale Enter the number of units that the X and Y axes are to be divided into When no divisions are necessary input 0 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 47 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 48 E Trend Graph Channel Settings Attributes Designates or enters the num ber of data lines channels to be displayed on the Trend Graph Designates the channel being currently se lected Trend Graph Settings TR_001 l General Settings l Graph Settings Channel Settings Shape Color l Alarm Setting No of Channels Word Address Current Channel Fo Pee ek Bo Bee ek Number of Channels 2 1 Parts Enters the Word Address used to store the current channel s display data Selects the color and type of line used for the current channel Enter the number of channels used in the Trend Graph Use the Current Channel area to select which channel is being specified Up to 20 channels can be entered in a Project file LTE file including the Data sampling frequency number Word Address Enter the Word Address used to indicate where the
73. Display Format lapat ween Alam Settings Display Style No of Display Digits 99 Decimal Places Date Displays the date Time Display Format Ym Displays the time Display Format Select the desired time date display for mat LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging Se te There are two types of settings in the Date Time settings i e date settings and time settings Time is expressed only by the 24 hour system e For date mm dd yy mm dd yy mm dd dd mm yy e For time hh mm hh mm ss General Info Column Type Value Value Selecting this option displays actual logging data in the Display Settings eneral Info Data Format Size Style Alam Settings Column Mo 2 Column Type pValue Date Time 2 Char Col Data Type Display Format area Input nen Alam Settings Display Style No of Display Digits 9 Decimal Places Absolute Peat Sew en Sete ___ Displays Logging Address area Address 7 Relative d ata Data Logging Address pooo j Address Offset The Logging Address is changed by the iia offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words is 4 the offset value becomes 0 to 3 Display Data Format Select the desired data format from Dec Hex and BCD Code Check this check box when displaying negative values Only available when select
74. Dooroo tt H pooto1 LIT Ii titi i When 32 bit data 65539 is The maximum number of stored in addresses D00100 digits is 10 with 2 decimal and D00101 places PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Numeric Display com mand or click on the E icon 2 In the General Settings tab input the Word Ad dress used to store the display data Numeric Display Settings ND_O01 General Settings Display Format Shape Color Alarm Settings Description Word Address l Enter D00100 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Part Select If desired set an Alarm and Colors from the Alarm Set ing a Part Shape tings and Shape Color area Shape Browser Current PDE File c Apropbwins pdb pdb pdb Tite ND_30001 ia LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 75 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Display Format area specify the Data Dis play Format and input the No of Display Digits and the Decimal Places Specify the Character Size 1f desired Numeric Display ND_001 General Settings Display Format Shape Color Alarm Settings Enter 10 Data Display Format No of Display Digits 16 Bit 32 Bit Decimal Places E E nter 2 9 Decimal Decimal Character Size 2 Hex X Hex 8x16 oa Select 32 bit Decimal 5 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click
75. E Drawing a Square Rectangle or Filled Square Filled Rect angle Filled Square Rectangle command or click on the or m icon 2 Click on a point a and drag the mouse on a diago 1 Select the Draw menu Square Rectangle or nal axis in the Mark drawing area Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS If you press and hold the key in step 2 you can draw a square Hoo E SSG oe eee ee Be eee ee PCC CoCr e000 00000 88 COCR LEH Ll k F T E m E E E E A square or rectangle is defined 3 Click on the end point b 3 7 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Drawing Circle Oval or Filled Circle Filled Oval PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Circle Oval or Filled Circle Filled Oval command or click on the or icon 2 Click on a point a and drag the mouse on a diago nal axis in the Mark drawing area 3 Click on the end point b If you press and hold the Ctrl key in A circle or oval is defined step 2 you can draw a circle mr BEEEEEEEE Bee BERR EEEEEE BERR Be BEREEREEEEEE SERRE BP se BERBER dB P te Fy TT TT BERR hve SERRE eee ptt T tee eT 3 8 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Filling a Mark PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Se
76. EN For details about bit operations Note w 3 1 7 Bit Operation Examples Priority and Associativity The following table shows the trigger priorities If two or more operators have the same priority follow the direction shown by the associativity High t f lt mw o o gt ee E lt s gt Kess gt 4 ow j LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 193 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script E Statements Branch Statements e if if endif When a condition enclosed with brackets becomes true the process following the if statement is executed The Assign character cannot be used in a conditional expression e if else if else endif When a condition enclosed with brackets becomes true the process following the if statement is executed When the condition is false the statement after else is executed The Assign cannot be used in a conditional expression Note For details about the execution path Nl 3 1 8 Conditional Branches Statements E er et e loop loop endloop Loop repetitive processing 1s repeated according to the number stored in the temporary Addresses designated in the brackets y A L e The loop format is as follows Important E g loop number of loops lt Designates the temporary Address where the loop repetition number is designat
77. Elk L Text Color MAN M 7 e Select Border Plate Color H iil i ek Character and Plate colors The currently selected item s image appears here Calls up the Part Shape Browser Part Shapes can be selected directly from the Browser Color Here the Time Display s Border color character display color Text and background color Plate can each be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Time Display The Time Display is placed using the following procedure Display the time PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Time Display command or click on the H icon 2 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select If desired select Colors and Character Size ing a Part Shape Shape Browser TD_3D004 TD_3D005 TD_3D006 Current PDE File ccSpropbwinpdb pdb pdb Tite TD_30001 ia 3 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Time Display Part s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 4 Click on the point where the Time Display s top left To cancel the placement click on corner is to be placed the icon Change the size if necessary Regardless of whether the Time Display is scaled up or down the character size will not change To change the
78. FHA 1 Monitor florian Eik ddjess a ce Function Option state can change Bit Set JZ Buzzer click here i Bit Reset C Dre Shot 2 Momentar ee Bit Inver i Set the buzzer to J Interlock ON or OFF Interlock Address Bp E Touch available condition Se lect the B it ae eM Invert function Poe eet tee 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser If desired Select the desired color s and input a Label from the Shape Color and Text areas Shape Browser x fd ae 1 Cancel I I BE E e SW 30002 SW_NO BOR sW 3D004 sW 30005 s 30006 i Current POB File c propbSwinypdbsop 3d01 pdb Tite S4v_ 3D001 ig 4 After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Switch s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 2 16 REMARKS When the Change State function se lected after entering the Bit Ad dress if you attempt to perform another area s operation before en tering the Monitor Bit Address the dialog box shown below will ap pear Click on the button to input the same address as used for the Bit Address To enter a dif ferent address click on the button and input the de sired address Bit Switch Do vou want to use the same Bit Address for the Monitor Bit Address 2 1 Parts Select ing a Part Shape LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BAS
79. G in g Shape Color Label Switch Address Description Operation Bit Address Image of the Eie When creating Monien Birddiiese a Bit Switch T with two states Function Option check this box ie Bit Set 4 Buzzer i Bit Reset T OneStat a Momentary fp N currently se A lected Part Shape and enter the alternate Bit Calls up the Part Shape Browser Browser where different 5 Bit Invert Switch Address Part Shapes can Eies below be selected Interlock Addreds Joora00000 TE Touch available condition fe Bik Di 2 Bint l OF Cancel r BA Sets the buzzer Sets the switch s to ON OFF function Selects the Interlock function state Operation Bit Address Here the Bit Address data controlled by the Switch 1s input Monitor Bit Address Only after the Monitor check box is checked can the Monitor Bit Address used to change the Switch s display setting be entered The Switch s state ON OFF display can be specified so that it will change according to changes in this Bit Address Addresses input in the Bit Address area can also be done here Appears only when creating a Bit Switch with Bit Switch Settings B5_001 General Settings Shape Color Label two states Description Operation Bit Address eee z switch s state State i T Monitor either ON or OFF Mona EAS allowing you to mpoo HE set the attributes a of
80. GR change atiute Ta tate changecoorinates El am ee E Rotere fo Danat anganan to E oeron eson Note The tools shown above can also be used from a menu by right clicking the mouse LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 119 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 3 1 Selecting Objects Two methods are available for selecting objects 1 clicking on an object directly or 2 dragging the mouse to enclose and select single or multiple objects Also you can select individual objects that have other objects either on top of or overlapping them When the tool bar s icon is clicked on active an object can be se lected To activate this icon click on it directly or select the pull down Edit menu s Select command Also while drawing objects right clicking anywhere on a desired object allows you to select it Either a W or a mark will be displayed on the sides of the selected object These square marks are called handles Handle Types There are two types of handles those that can be used to scale the object and those that can not W Can be used to scale the object L Cannot be used to scale When an object has been be selected the Selection Tool box will automati cally appear When multiple objects are selected all the selection Tool box s functions are available Selects all of the After selecting a group objects in a
81. Here you can register the messages to be displayed as either Alarm Sum mary Alarm Display Part or as Alarm Message right to left scrolling display olix AlarmPrint Message MEECEEOO an Daswsecre Color OOOO e fs BIA eyes e summery ieee a T 3 Basic Alarm Settings Factory Bite Pop up Keypad Alarm Edt View Help Bit Address Alarm Type _ es a A a a a a E a a A a Message Bit Address Specifies the monitor bit To specify the bit address for the Alarm Sum mary mode select a device that can be specified in Word units LT Editor External Device Connection Manual Alarm Type The Alarm Editor provides two types of alarms Alarm Summary and Alarm Message The Alarm Summary mode lists messages specified by the Alarm Part The Alarm Message mode displays a scrolling message at the bottom of the LT s screen Up to 128 messages can be entered into the Alarm Editor Any message beyond this setting range will not operate on the LT unit s panel screen Message Enter your message here Up to 160 alphanumeric characters can be entered for one message Pop up Keypad A pop up keypad is displayed allowing you to enter the bit address using the mouse Message Color Designates message s color Select the display color Fg and background color Bg and specify whether to blinking Blk is used or not Automatic Address Increment Aft
82. In that case check the Display Mode check box 2 26 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS lt When displaying External Device Word Address numeric data in rela tive values gt l l Select the Relative value display Enter comment Used to store the data here a Graph Settings BA_001 graph S data General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings a currentl se re Word Address lected Part Dy Ma BitLength jie f Select the pi nput Range Input Code display data s Calls up the vin vane P E ae a lormai Part Shape Max vave P5555 TE mse Browser Part ee Select the data s Shapes can be A Input Code selected di rectly from here Specifies data s Bit Specifies data Length Input Range Relative According to the Input Range designated for the Word Address data the data is converted and displayed as relative values Word Address Here enter the Word Address used for storing the Bar Graph s data Display Mode When this check box is checked negative numeric data can also be displayed Bit Length Specifies the Bit Length of data stored in the Word Address Input Range Specifies the data s Input Range Input Code When No Code is selected only positive data can be entered To enter negative number data select 2 s Complement or MSB LogiTouch Editor Ver
83. Ke amp k wk wk x Counter setup D k wk x amp warege 92 210 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 B k wk wk amp merg 21 2 2 0 0 fofofo i l k x x amp J oint Register Z k x x amp sanese 2 210 2 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W k wk wk x wrge 2 2 0 0 9 0 0 0 010 0 0 LS wk wk amp System Area ofofofo ofofa a o o o ofofo R Joint Register is only for FA M3 c Oo N L gt c O O hom O wj ma Appendix 20 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables E Yamatake Yamatake SDC Series DMC10 Data Ls Conversion E Rika Kohgyou CB SR Mini Series NODo MFE serre owe o o E Omron THERMAC NEO Controller SS After Conversion Before Conversion E Shinkoh Technos C FC FIR GC FCL PC 900 Series After Conversion Before Seting Value M emory ololol o sais jo o o jo LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 21 Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables Appendices E To Electric FRENICS FVR Series SIR TATO smes ee rammairmal gt o ofolofololofo atts eleteletelelete C meg o ojo ofolojojo ofo e o e ofojofo ofo o o Je ejo lofo ofolofo o commana Data ofolojofolofo ono Data o o o olo oflo o o o bhille LS E Fuji Electric Micro Controller X Before Conv
84. MT_001 Word Address Th General Settings Graph Settings Shape Coler Harm Settings used to store e Cu rrent y Description 3 Absolut di ub isplay data selected Meter s ro Wa Baer image appears freee I Display Mode here BitLenath fiey f Select the E E eae desired Data Calls up the Part iA 2 s Complement Format Shape Browser Parts Shapes Specifies the can be selected __ Help data s Input directly from the x lt Code Browser Specifies the data s Specifies the effective Bit Length data s Input Range Relative According to the Input Range designated for the Word Address Data the data is converted and displayed as relative values Word Address Here enter the Word Address used to store Meter data Display Mode When this check box w checked negative numeric data can also be dis played Bit Length Specifies the Bit Length of all data stored in the Word Address Input Range Specifies the data s Input Range Input Code With No Code selected only positive numeric data can be entered To enter negative numeric data select either 2 s Complement or MSB LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Meter Graph Settings Attributes Meter Graph Settings MT_001 General Settings Graph Settings Color Shape Alarm Setting Only when a graph type Select the which has Meter s data divi
85. Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS When a Library that contains Parts is called up the Confirm Device Address screen will appear After entering each Part s address click on the button To cancel these settings click on the button 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Address Confirmation When the Library placed on the screen is double clicked on the Confirm Device Address dialog box shown below will appear allowing you to change the Part s previously entered addresses Confirm Device Address Bit Address x00042 Bit Set C ema TL Address Range Conversion E Using the Cut Copy and Paste Functions Library items can be Cut Copied and Pasted from the screen drawing area to the Browser First select the desired Library item in the drawing area and Cut or Copy it then Paste it to the Library Browser LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 167 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items 2 4 3 Editing Library Items Library Items can be Edited Deleted Copied Cut or Pasted E Editing a Library Item Here a registered Library item is edited PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select and double click the Library item to be edited In order to call up a Library item from the Browser from a Library file which is differ ent from the currently displayed aj file click on the z icon 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files When
86. Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 9 Printing 9 1 Print Settings E Printing Screen Tab Select the screen type and contents to be printed Select the screen Print z type to be printed l Print Project Information Screen f Screen Type Dietna J Mark Screen L Image Screen Displays the Poceen Range Specify the Sd currently printing range Screens Fom Tol selected item using individual screen numbers When you select All A all screens will be printed Details Click on the button to specify detailed information of printing Base Screen Specify the printing items related to a Base Screen Prints a list of the Base Screen screens loaded Outputs onto a specified Contents screen hard screen M Screen Hard Copy p J Parts List Information charctar er g Prints a list of the 8 Genera 2 Beta een items can be i We jec a pee Parts placed on i oacnaeecale T Dece hiess specified the Base Screen Select whether to a Information charctor size print the sum 8 Momal 7 Stall Select Infor mary or details of mae mation the Part list Y Grid cahacter s ste On OO snp iri Prints the address gt en select designation for ing Small 1 Only the preset a a eani printe 2 7 7 When making Cross Reference Global Prints the D Script a screen hard Cross Reference copy The settings Parts ON OFF status can be specified The same status is specified for a
87. Not Available ON Touch Available OFF Touch NotAvailable ON Touch NotAvailable OFF TouchAvailable E Word Switch Shape Color Attributes Here a Word Switch s color and pattern can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors The color and pattern settings available will differ depending on the Switch s settings such as its shape and Change State condition E Word Switch Label Attributes Here the text characters shown engraved on the Switch button face are input 2 1 Parts Creating Labels 2 18 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Word Switch An example of how to place a Word Set Switch is shown below A coo When the button is pressed 34 is sent to D00001 PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Word Switch command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings area input the Word Ad dress and Constant data and select a function Word Switch Settings P S_001 Ea General Settings Shape Color Label Description Word Address Enter D00001 Constant Function T 4 Word Set Enter 34 a Add Sub t9 DigitfADD Option T DigitfSUB ae Select Word Set nterloc TESS poroooo0o le Touch available condition i Bik On L9 Bik Di 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select If desired select Colors and input a Label from the Shape ing
88. Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 13 Preface Dots Re VIC WC a ede veecnns aac sepea teaser tenet ten neat E A 2 219 DA OCU CAA TA SG ar E A ccusta E E E E A A N 2 219 2 J gt Part Reference LiSt 1c cicssecessassaneisensedesnnssetetsansansdnasangnsaivnesdseueadencavpededieuscesssosenes teat 2 221 ZO Dar ampin L e T 2 223 Det S Ee ee LAGU eara AN EE AEEA N EEE AA 2 225 Dita Load Screen Lisi acers inae a E ER EE ERT 2 228 2 7 9 Display of Screen Level Change Structure eoeeneosssssssoeeeereessssssssssssssrrresessssss 2 229 28 DAFCOnYE SION csccarccccsensvestesucecetcteceseseatensctctucesasauterscicustceseatensctcvusesisestenets 2 230 2 8 1 Conversion from DXF File to Base Screen DXF Screen woe cece 2 230 2 8 2 Conversion from Base Screen to DXF File Screen DXF woes 2 236 CHAPTER 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS CREATING and USING SCREENS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen u cccccccssssssssssccccccccsssssscsscccsssessess 3 2 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen a uua cccccccsssssscssccccccccssssssssssccooees 3 23 CHAPTER 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT Ns CROC RP INNS oiera EEEE EEE 4 2 4Ad l Listing Copying Dele ng SOREN essit einsi iaaiiai nii iia iia aiai 4 2 4 1 2 Copying Screens from Other Projects cccccccccccceccecccaeeseeeseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeses 4 7 d2 Project Edi sasen NEE NIN EES 4 11 ADM Delene Project FIIS sesser n E E E EE E EEE 4 11 4 2 2 Rebuilding A Project
89. Rees A 1 EJ E Ice Maker Pe TO Gp geen Comes CLR ee 1 E E A oe ate apts Off By eE e tad teas R B gg 2 START e Light remains on until the Power _Off_pushbutton is pressed The Light i il the P Off hb i d aa The Power Qn pushbutton starts the i soft drink machine Sole 0 0 ole OF eG 0 0 a Power_On_pushbutton Power Off_pushbutton Light BEET J EZA Nunes DenND 3 T DD Off Off Off wa LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 133 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E Dragging and Dropping Copying and pasting of an instruction or a Part can be performed by the drag and drop operation Before dragging and dropping an instruction or a Part you have j aA to allocate a variable to the instruction or the Part Instructions ponant or Parts without a variable allocated cannot be dragged and dropped Dragging and dropping of a Logic Program Instruction to a Part By dragging a logic program instruction created with the Logic Program Editor to the Screen Editor you can place a Part that corresponds with the instruction xi Before dragging and dropping an instruction be sure to save the logic program Important amp Logic Program Editor Soda File Edit Wiew Search Insert Data Controller Help ia d 4 0 2 9 me EN DON 4000M QUT Fill Tirner PT 2000 ae ee ee ee Medium pushbutton MOW 7
90. Settings Data Char Size Option Add Copy Paste Cut OOOO meen fate Tin Value Item E i ee e te When using loop operation regardless of the logging frequency the data SS display row will be designated as only a single row 10 44 Settings Rows and columns can be selected to change their attributes Add Select a Data row or Value column and click on the Add button to create a new row or column Copy Copies the currently selected Data row s or Value column s data is copied to the Clipboard Paste Pastes data row or Value column data copied to the Clipboard with the Copy button in the desired position Cut Deletes the currently selected Data row s or Value column s LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging E When copying row or column data with the same attribute multiple times 1 Designate the No of Block Data and No of Char Col 2 Set the attributes for a row or column to create the original data for copying 3 Select that row or column 4 Click on the Copy button 5 Select the destination row or column to paste the copied data to When copying multiple times select multiple rows or columns 6 Click on the Paste button to paste the same attribute to all the selected rows columns 1 Item Name Settings Display E Enter Item Names Enter the Item Names for
91. Symbol Editor LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 4 E Entering Addresses Here Addresses that are operated for Parts functions and that are monitored are designated A variable to be used in a logic program Logic symbol can be designated as a Part s address 4 2 5 Symbol Editor When a function requires consecutive addresses and a variable Logic symbol is used as a start address an integer array must Important be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecu tive addresses needs to be allocated Bit Switch Settings BS_001 Description State 0n or aati Enter the address data Monitor Bit Address here a e0000 Function fo Bit Set Browser ce Bit Reset 2 Momentary Bit Invert Ci Interlock Interlock Address 0000 Blz Touch avallable condition 2 Bik Dr i Bib Oth Entering from a keyboard Click on the address entering field and the cursor will appear there which indicates data entry is now effective Then enter device and address data via the keyboard Entering from a pull down list Click on the I box next to the Address entering field and a pull down list appears including symbols and Logic symbols selected via the Symbol Editor and device comments together with corresponding Addresses Select ing a symbol Logic symbol or device comment from the list desi
92. T the Past lick on th O ajal lt xlsA le 2 atl o 2 2 e S ol O cance e rasung CliCk on tne i eae EE E ee ae 4 ol ol gt mr rr ea tlel T BEA Se S o a Beans l ih ee us The Light remains on until the Power _Off_pushbutton is pressed oa e ial Tes ee anne ae a 3 O The Power On 1con E ge es a pushbutton starts the a soft drink machine be ONS Oe ee wae ole 0 0 Sols 0 7 oT 0 0 i Power _On_pushbuttan Power_Off_pushbutton Light 3 E me et ae Of OF TU Nabe oak Pe ahs eee CTO Mumber_ot_5 malls B CTUD Numberof Smalls Hj So Gla 0 0 Light a 1 Ti Off Hl a 233 140 3228 Numeric Display NO oT 0 0 Light 4 IPH gt gt Reset_Counters lt lt Off Ice is dispensed for as long as the push button is pressed providing a cup is present Md 1d Ana AAN 1 J Rung 3 Programming Mode 114000 LogiT ouch Type A E Drawing Board Screen Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Library Window E Help Demjlajajaajs jeje e aaja AOO amp a 2 m ran aa WM ee ze A e E ed e Edit iew Search Insert Data Controller Help a Hla el xka laka eoe e m Fe ele 5 xo Meo tos e om wn a E 0 SS This program runs a typical fast food restaurant soft drink dispensing machine E ma kaea oe
93. TABLE secton ofthe DXF file to be read Add the ENDTAB record 0 N W SEQEND Not Found line SEQEND to be used as a pair wih VERTEX following the POLYLINE entty is not specified Add the SEQEND record t the error line Insufficient Data line The essental data for the element ofeach entty is insufficient Add the required data to the error line Appendix 12 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix I Error Messages E DXF File Conversion Errors from previous page Code Error Message Cause Solution LTYPE Not Defined line LAYER Not Defined line STYLE Not Defined line BLOCKS Not Defined line 7 BLOCKS Not Found W BLOCKS Over Nesting Limit W Conversion Data is Over 16 Kbytes W Check Sum Error W Library Screen Not Found W Mark Screen Not Found The line type name specified when the entity line type is individually set is not defined in the TABLE section Add the data of the presetline name to the TABLE section The layer name setin the entity is not defined in the TABLE section Add the presetlayer name to the TABLE secton The character style name used in the entity is not defined in the TABLE section Add the character Style name to be used to the TABLE section The composite picture name which is referenced by the INSERT and DIMENSION entites is not defined in the BLOCK sect
94. The possible ranges vary depending on the Input Code Format Display Range Min Value Max Value Designates the range of values dis played in the N tag The possible ranges vary depending on the Display Format and Code settings LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging Size Style Display Format _ eS General Info Data Format size Stle Alarm Settings ay Forma Display Format No of Display Digits Color Sethi gg mmMmm Display Color n MET EE O JE J N E N j Shift Right Hil Zero Suppress 1 Shift Left t Auto Clear OFF No of Display Digits Designates the number of digits for the display within the range of characters designated in the Display tab usually as 1 to 16 digits The length designated here includes digits after the decimal point but not the decimal point itself Decimal Places Auto Clear ON Designates the number of digits dis played after the decimal point usually as 0 to 14 digits This setting is valid only for Dec and BCD formats Enter 0 when not displaying decimal place numbers Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink When the Alarm option is se lected the color attributes designated here are used for normal display Display Style Shift Left Shift Right Select the displa
95. Transfer Method 1 Sondre Transfer Status Prepare Status Per E Overall Progress pd Ready NUM Te e After the Prepare command is finished you can check the LT unit s Ds current memory capacity with the Project Information feature MSAA 4 4 1 Project Information e Once you use the Prepare command you do not need to use it again for the same data unless the data has been updated e If the Project File to be transferred is stored on your PC s floppy disk copy it to your PC s hard disk prior to using Prepare to reduce transfer time LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 9 7 10 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS L When Sending Screens and Logic Programs Together To the LT To display screen created with LT Editor and to run created logic programs on the LT panel you must first transfer data from the LT Editor to the LT unit The Al Send command transfers the screen data and logic programs at the same time You can also send logic programs alone 7 2 5 When Sending Logic Programs 7 In the case of LT Type C if the LT is not connected to the exter m nal device when the screen data are transferred to the LT and Important the Change State function is set to Yes bit switches toggle switches lamps and objects will not be displayed on the LT panel after data transfer PROCEDURE 1
96. Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS Automatic Setup Use Extended Program a Force System Setup TF Simulation 2 Do NOT Perform Setup Setup CFG file 3 English 2 Japanese 2 Selection C LOGITOUCH protocol gpsetupe ctg Automatic setup Set up operation is performed if necessary according to the LT s status Normally select this setup mode Force system setup Setup operation is performed every time screen data are transferred regardless of the LT s status Do not setup Setup operation is not performed and only screen data and logic pro grams are transferred Setup CFG file This is the file storing the setup information Normally you need not use this setup mode If you select English and perform setup the OFFLINE screen on the LT unit will be displayed in English A if you have changed from Japanese to English or vice versa be sure to force the system setup E Important Use Extended Program When using the Simulation Function with the LT Type C you need to transfer a simulation protocol in advance 8 1 Simulation 7 6 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs ED Passwords E Registering a Password You can enter a password to restrict user access to the data transfer function ny e Be sure to keep a copy of the password in a safe p
97. Trend graph s data is stored E Trend Graph Shape Color Attributes The Trend Graph s border color division color Axis Color and Trend Graph s display area color Graph Area Color can be selected 2 1 Part Selecting Colors E Trend Graph Alarm Settings Attributes If desired an alarm s settings can be set here 2 1 Part Setting Alarms LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Trend Graph An example of a Trend Graph scrolling left to right is shown below Data stored in D00102 is displayed on the Trend miaa When 34 22h is stored in D00102 the graph will look like this PROCEDURE 1 Select the Parts menu Trend Graph command or click on the icon 2 After clicking on the General Settings tab select the data format Trend Graph Settings TR_OOT Channel Settings _sShapeColor Alam Settings ne General Settings Graph Settings Description im Display Mode Select Bin Data Format i Bin ta BCD Browser 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser You can also use the Alarm Settings area to enter Alarm settings and select Colors if desired TR 3D003R Curen t POE File JeSpropb3win pdb op4 3d07 pdt opbswir pdbop4 3d01 JeSpropb3win pdb op4 3d07 pdt w Sampling Time 10 sec Axis Diw ver 10 Hor 10 REMARKS Data in the range of O to 100 can be
98. Use LS Area File Display FD_ 001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Use LS Area im Use Ls Area Top Write Word Address 0020 Extemal Device Transfer I Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Description Transfer Completed Bit Address Enter 1 2 64 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 In the Display tab specify the No of Display Lines Display Characters Direct Selection and Cursor Po sition Control If necessary specify the display color in the Style Color tab File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ype Color Mo of Display Lines se E nte r 3 I Mo of Display Characters 1 ey Enter 10 E Cursor Position Control oe co 4 In the Switch Settings tab select the function switches which are being placed automatically and specify the number of lines being rolled up or down File Display FD_001 x General Settiacs Dispar StyesColor Switch Sebings SwicaTypeColsr Aulometic Suatch Placement b elhod Select E eens these two Send To SRA F PLC Sardi To SRE Fiam WS H E a p enes switches Cl Rel Up O Ssd Tols Fiam PLE 5 Specify the border colors for the function switches in the Switch Type Color tab 6 After setting all the attributes click o
99. X Number of blocks 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces For example when loop operation is not selected the number of block 1s 1 and the number of logging is 2048 the capacity available is approximately 32 KB assuming that the logging data consists of 2 words If the number of pieces of data is 32 the maximum the memory required becomes approxi mately 153 KB which is too high I Regardless whether loop operation is designated or not when the number of logging data items is an odd number add I to the above calculation For example when the number of logging data items is 7 it is considered as 8 Words 10 28 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging Backup SRAM usage priority order 1 Data sampling 2 Trend graph 3 LS Area backup 4 Logging data 5 Filing data Memory area is used starting from 1 To check the amount of memory available Operation Manual 4 4 1 Project Information Data stored in backup SRAM is erased at the following times e When initializing LT memory Important When transmitting screen data from your PC to the LT e When setting up the LT system and protocol e When performing LT s self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area E Loop Operation Loop operation can be designated in logging mode With loop operation selected when data logging capacity becomes full logging data will repeat edly be o
100. a Part Shape Color and Label areas Shape Browser Rs poe seal Cancel BEN Svv_3D002 sw_No S _3D004 PDE File Current PDE File cc propbSvin pdbop4 3d01 pdb Tite S SD001 ia 4 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Switch s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 19 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the point where the Switch s top left corner To cancel the placement click on is to be placed the lal icon If desired use the Switch s handles to alter its size To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Here a touch panel with special functions can be created E Function Switch General Settings Attributes Enter Comment Function Switch Settings FS_001 data here General Settings Shape Color Label Select the Description ie p Switch s opera 7 Eoo ot Previous Screen The Function 2 Go To Screen efi H tion Switch s image Presse a ears here 2 File Name Key PP ID No When Go To Calls up the Part oe Screen is a Off line Shape Browser selected the Parts can be Go To selected directly i sc
101. a filled square check the Fill check Beveling types box instead of selecting line types 5 quare Rectangle JC Fil i Jatu Comer 8 2 SAnS Fo eee E E Bo D a a O E JL Select a pattern Square Rectangle I Fil 7 Comer 8 SI fo eee me _ 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on the In step 4 hold down the key first of the diagonal s points a to draw a square When using the keyboard to draw a square use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the rectangle s two di agonal points and press the led key to start and finish the rectangle To cancel the placement click on the icon 4 Click on the diagonal s other point b The rectangle is automatically drawn registered Double clicking on any object a drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set tings b 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2799 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing 2 2 4 Circle Oval To draw a circle or an oval click on its center point and drag the mouse to the circumference point and click again Holding down the key draws a perfect circle To draw a filled circle or oval select the desired pattern E Circle Oval Attributes Check this check box if a filled Circle Oval is desired Cicle O val Displays the currently selected Circle Oval image Select a Line
102. address Bit address Word address Word address Word address Word address Channel 0 word address Word address Word address Block number designated address Word address Address ddress ampling Address LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Duplicating PROCEDURE REMARKS lt When Duplicating a Switch 5 times in both the X and Y directions gt 2 Select the pull down Edit menu s Duplicate com mand 3 Enter the number of copies to make in the X and Y When duplicating an object posi directions spacing between copies tioning will be decided based on the If desired click on the Address Increment check box to top left handle of the copied mas increment addresses automatically ter object Enter 5 Enter 5 4 Click on the button to duplicate the object To cancel the duplication click on the icon To stop duplicating press the key LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 157 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing may Delete Here the procedure for deleting an object is explained E Deleting an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select an object 2 Select the pull down Edit menu s Delete command Instead of selecting the Delete or click on the icon command the computer keyboard s Delete key can also be used To cancel the de
103. address of the home page If Digital Electronics Corporation s home page address is changed in the future please edit the currently registered address E Connecting to the Home Page PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Help menu Connect to Home Page command in the Project Manager 2 Select the target home page address Home page Home page 3 Click on the button to start connection 1f a browser has not been specified The browser is started and you will be connected to the ag one Eiatoe Doman beats Specify a browser and re start the home page connecting procedure Project Manager Internet browser Not Selected yet Please select a Browser 1 30 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals E How To Register a Home Page Address PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Help menu Connect to Home Page command in the Project Manager 2 Click on the button Home page Home page Digital s Homepage 3 Enter a home page title and address to be registered and click on oox h The specified home page address will be registered Home page address x Title Fro tace Service Shop O K N Cancel Address pl fia fa plaza com proface indexhtmil ie Home page Home page Digital s Homepage Pro face Service Shop Connect home page LogiTouch Editor Ver 1
104. alignment Calls up the Part Character Size desired for the Shape Browser text of the Part Shapes can Display be selected Select the directly from the Operation Browser Select a Mode Character Size Address Enter an Address to be monitored Select either Bit Address or Word Ad dress according to operation Mode Border Color The Message Display s Border color can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors Alignment Here the text s alignment can be selected Center Left Mode There are two methods to change messages displayed on the Message Display 1 e via Bit s turning ON OFF and Word state changes Here select either mode Mode When selecting Bit Messages will change according to the specified Bit Address changes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 11 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Mode When selecting Word Messages will change according to the state changes of the desig nated bits consecutively from the specified Address s OO bit According to the number of the messages either 2 4 8 or 16 a bit is automatically assigned from the specified Address s 00 bit Numbers of Number of Messages Bits Used When the value set in the No of Messages is 16 bits 00 to 03 are When the value set in the used Nee No of Messages area is 4 bits 00 and 01 are used 03 02 01 00 When the value set in the No of Messages area is
105. and margin size Enter the initial page number to be printed on the first page of the Prints the black white reversed screen color Check this box to print the page document number on each page of the docu Margins ment Top Left Specify the upper ai Bottom 20 00 mm fp Fight i i When printing page lower right and numbers specify if be numbered left margin sizes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Ja 9 1 Print Settings Chapter 9 Printing E Printing Project Information Tab You can check the created screens and Part designation status through printer output Prints a project Print Displays the information fir Eee omens E currently summary list Project Information selected item I Screen List Prints the list of settings of Data Sampling Settings List the item I Filing paal E I Data Logging Settings List marked with a TF felch Scitia chec k C D Script Function List C Symbol List C Global Cross Reference Ligt Details Click on the button to specify detailed information of printing Screen List Select the screen type to be printed Screen List Contents T Mark Screen T Image Screen Date Sampling Settings List Select whether to print the summary or details of the data sampling settings Data Sampling Settings List ii Bengal is Detail T Cross Reference List JA LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation
106. arrow cursor to the hairline cursor Switch 17 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 21 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Setting Screen Property Color Select the Grid Fill Point and Screen Background colors here When the drawn image data s and system s colors are the same the screens will be hard to see Here these colors can be changed to remedy that Screen Property Display Color Grid Color ree le Fill Point Color ro A E Screen Background Pattern Ih ERBE E m fo E Bo E eo Grid Color Selects the grid point s color Fill Point Color Fill Points designate the point where a fill will begin this setting determines the color of the fill point Screen Background Select the Base screen s background color the color selected here is also displayed on the LT If any background color is specified for the screen to be loaded no on screen object will be displayed on the LT unit important To load a screen whose background color was specified specify the loading position at the center of the screen 2 218 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques mam Preview Screen With this feature you can confirm how an image will appear on the LT unit This image will differ depending on each LT display device type Select th
107. by LT Editor is connected Check the model of the connected device Core ID Command failed An error has occurred during data transfer from the PC The cable may be disconnected or the LT is OFF Retry data transfer Data Transfer Port initialization error Initialization of the communicaton port has failed Check the transfer serial portsetings and transfer cable connecton Do you want to download the simulation When you wantt transfer the simulation protocol protocol click OK Otherwise click cancel ERROR Incomplete Transmission Screen transfer to the LT has been aborted Refer t the error message code ERROR No Configuration File The fle required for setup was not found in the Specified folder Re install the system from the M aster disk or check the transfer path setings Transfer S etings area ERROR Cannot Transfer Data A communication error has occurred and transfer has failed Reset the LT and PC and retry data transfer ERROR Cannot open Screen The system is trying to transfer the screen to the mee cometoneseee__rbtcomiuperterpctti o Handshaking ERROR LT not The LT power supply is turned OFF the data Responding cable is unplugged or the LT may be in OFFLINE mode Check all these points When the LT main unitis in OFFLINE mode reset tt to transfer mode Also check the serial port Invalid address substituted for unknown When using a symbol in the device address use aliases or invalid address error the symb
108. click on the oo but ton Clear Mark Screen s Partial Clear 9 Clear All 3 Specify the range to be deleted in the same manner as drawing a square rectangle LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS PROCEDURE 4 Click in the range to be deleted The specified range will be deleted Deleting the Entire Mark 2 Select Clear All Clear Mark Screen i Partial Clear fe lear All semen SPPP sss 3 Click on the button to delete the entire Mark The entire Mark will be deleted 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen REMARKS LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 17 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 18 E Mirror X Mirror Y The Mirror X and Mirror Y functions move a Mark symmetrically relative to the vertical and horizontal axis respectively To execute the Mirror X and Mirror Y functions click on the icon respectively Example Mirror X H H U d E Turn Counterclockwise O Turn Clockwise N The Turn Counterclockwise Turn Clockwise functions turn the mark counterclockwise and clockwise 90 respectively To execute the Turn Counterclockwise and Turn Clockwise
109. conditions are continuously monitored Global D Script operation is suspended during screen changes or other LT operations e After the LT s power is turned ON Global D Script actions are not per formed until all data reads are completed for the initial screen However after the initial screen changes Global D Script actions may be performed before the data reads are completed e The maximum number of devices in Global D Script is 255 When this number exceeds 256 the D Script does not function Since these devices always read data regardless of the screens be sure to use only the minimum number of device settings in your D Script Otherwise operation perfor mance can be degraded e The maximum number of Global D Scripts available is 32 The currently used function also counts as one Global D Script When the number of the Global D Scripts reaches 32 any new Global D Scripts are ignored LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2402 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script yao Notes on Operation Results E Overflowing Digits Overflowing digits resulting from operations are rounded E g When performing an operation on unsigned 16 bit data e 65535 1 0 Produces overflowing digits e 65534 2 2 32766 Produces overflowing digits e 65534 2 2 65534 Does not produce overflowing digits E Difference of Residual Processing The result of a residual pro
110. contains an error Enable the syntax help in the option seting menu and enter the address by clicking the icon or enter itfrom the keypad Negative numbers not supported select A negative number cannotbe used as a constant correct data type Enter a positve number download Do you still want to register this Even if this scriptis registered the operation will data and quit the D S cript editor be not performed Ww WARNING Statement has no effect and has The entered instruction is ignored because tt will been removed notinfluence the expression These messages are displayed only when the syntax check in the option setting menu is selected OT fi script expression is not legal it will not The preset D Script expression has an error Appendix 6 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix 1 Error Messages E Alarm Editor Errors Cause Solution Can t Add Messages Insufficient memory Memory is not suficient t add the messages Quit other applications re allocate memory and try to add the messages again Can t import more alarm message Summary During message import the number of alarm Alarm message summary limit has been message summary has exceeded the designated limit Delete the messages currently set and adjust the seting range so that the messages to be imported can be stored Data in Blocks 2 and 3 cannot be uploaded to Since the Block feature was turned OFF
111. continuous straight line will be converted into LINE If this number is other than 2 it will be converted into POLYLINE e When a line has an arrow at one end a solid filled triangle will be drawn at the end coordinates and when a line has arrows at both ends solid filled triangles will be drawn at both ends Square Filled Square e Any line will be converted into POLYLINE e Any Fill will be converted into SOLID 2 238 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion Regular Circle Filled Regular Circle e Filled regular circle s border will be converted into CIRCLE and its filling will be converted into SOLID Oval Filled Oval e Any lines will be converted into POLYLINE e Filled oval s border will be converted into CIRCLE and its filling will be converted into SOLID Arc Pie e Pie s straight line section will be converted into POLYLINE Divisions e When the divisions are marked on a straight axis their coordinates will be calculated based on their start and end coordinates direction and the number of divisions and will be converted into LINE e When the divisions are marked on an arc axis their coordinates will be calculated based on their start and end angles external circle s radius internal circle s radius number of divisions and will be converted into LINE Filled Polygon e Fill will be converted into SOLID However
112. destination Mark screen JIa LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Copying a Specified Range Duplication A specified range in the Mark drawing area can be duplicated by dots PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Edit menu Duplicate command or click on the icon 2 Specify the copy range in the same manner as draw ing a square rectangle A box appears indicating the specified copy range i Important 3 Move the box to a desired position where the data in If you copy a mark into the the specified range will be copied position where another Mark Data in the specified range will be copied to the position has already been created the where you click new data will overwrite the existing data and the exist ing data will be deleted You can continue the copy mode until you click the right mouse but ton 4 To quit the copy mode click the right mouse button LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Deleting a Mark Delete the Mark or a partion of it PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Edit menu Delete command or click on the icon The procedures for deleting part of a Mark or deleting a whole mark are separately described Deleting Part of a Mark 2 Select Partial Clear and
113. double clicking on a Library item s title the title editing screen will appear Prop erty Screen L Important 3 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Save Once an item is edited it command or click on the icon on the Main Tool 2 0t be Undone Bar ey 100 switch 2 168 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Deleting a Library Item Here a registered Library item is deleted PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Library item to be deleted from the In order to call up a Library item Browser from a Library file which 1s differ ent from the currently displayed AJ roe swith file click on the icon 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files 2 Select the Delete command from the Library Browser s Edit menu A dialog box appears to confirm your command lt 2 Are you sure you want to delete 7 Once an item is deleted it 3 Click on the button and the Library item C N0t be Undone will be deleted A 100 switch LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 169 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items E Cutting a Library Item from a Library File and Pasting Here a registered Library item is Cut and Pasted PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select a Library item to be cut out from the Browser In order to call up a Library item
114. double clicking on the inside of their border Desr pior C lz ecdrees acl Se tt e i ES Can be edited directly Can be edited by double clicking LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 22 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 222 Ge re For the labels and messages of more than one line use as the carriage A return RESET ao n m BUTTON E eseti Button E Deleting Items from the Part Reference List Parts can be deleted directly from the Part Reference List Click in the middle of a Part to be deleted and it will be highlighted Then click on the button and a dialog box will appear Clicking on the button will delete the Part from the Part Reference List To close the box without deleting the Part click on the button When multiple Parts are selected all the Parts will be deleted by clicking on the vea button and by clicking on the Noar button the box will be closed Confirm Delete Are vou sure you want to delete BS O01 E Copying a Part on the Parts List Any Part can be copied on the Parts list Select the left most number for the Part being copied by clicking on that number The selected Part will be highlighted After this selection click on the button and then the button The Part will be copied to the bottom line of the list E Reflecting a Device Comment on the Parts List The device commen
115. e LT s self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area is performed e As the number of Addresses increases the more time is required for writing data to the External Device Depending on the number of Addresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe e When data is being written screen displays such as for Parts may not be updated refreshed or may appear slowly Screen changes may also be performed slowly If screens are changed at this time screen data such as for Parts will also be read out and data writing to the External Device will be performed at a slower than normal speed e DO NOT perform any of the following operations at the same time e Data transfer between the LS area and the External Device e Data transfer between SRAM and the External Device via the File Name Display e Data transfer between SRAM and the External Device via the Control Word Address using Transfer Settings Be sure to perform data transfer after the current data trans fer is completed e During the current data write the succeeding data write op eration cannot be accepted received E LS Area Filing Data Structure Designated address a A o Block Names 32 characters ee sO oo O at Data m 15 number of data pieces 16 Bit length Hm D 15 number of data pieces x2 32 Bitlength st Dat
116. each cell satia copy Pasta I Titi ete E Attribute Settings To change the Item Name attributes select the Item Name title area and click on the Settings button Display Settings eti an Peat ew Es Tine Data General Info Item Settings Color 1 This tab page provides information about the current settings for the Item Name General Info Column Mo Column Type LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 45 10 2 Logging 10 46 Chapter 10 Advanced Features Color Block Name Color Berea Cer Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk Block Name Fo AMT YF No kr blink display s MOO OO hoon ok di cance Hee 2 Column Settings Display E Attribute Settings To enter column attribute data click on a Date Time or Value title top bar and then click on the Settings button Display Settings Ea Cony Faa Cut yyimimit ___ Total General Info Column Type Date Time This tab page provides information about the current Column settings Column Type Select the desired display item from Value Date Time or Char Col eneral Info Data Format Size Style Alam Settings Column Mo 2 Column Type t Value 4 Char Col pelin Data Type Date yy mind
117. from the Browser MAGUI 2 1 Parts Select You can also use the Alarm Settings area to enter Alarm ing a Part Shape settings and select Colors 1f desired Shape Browser Current POE File cc propbwinkpdb op4 3d01 pdb Title W T_30001 m 2 44 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE 4 In the Graph Settings area input the number of divisions and data display direction Meter Graph Settings MT_O01 i Graph Settings Color Shape Alarm Setting Enter 10 Select Clockwise 5 After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Meter s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Meter s top left corner is to be placed If desired use the Meter s handle to alter its size LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS REMARKS The Axis Divisions will appear only when Absolute display is se lected To cancel the placement click on the xa icon To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 45 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 1 9 Trend Graphs This Part displays Word Addr
118. help to increase your drawing efficiency 2 7 1 Grid Snap Grid Points are placed at regular intervals on your screen and divide the drawing area into a coordinate grid pattern when the Snap to Grid func tion is enabled objects that are drawn will automatically snap be aligned on this grid pattern Use the Grid Point Spacing command to adjust the density of the Grid points and to display the grid or not Also grid points can be displayed as grid lines not as dots Grid Points are not shown on the LT unit s display Select the pull down menu Option s Grid Snap command E Grid Snap Settings dialog box Turns the display of the Grid Points Grid Snap Settings ON or OFF Spacing Designates the eag Eo Grid Point Y 3 199 oi Touch Area Grid Shift Start Point display s being drawn on top of or under screen objects ed Style Turns the Snap function ON or OFF Registers a Grid pattern 4 Dot 3 Line Registers the grid pattern that has been designated in Spacing to the position high lighted in the Grid Spacing List Designates the grid display style i e as dots or grid lines Display Enters the desired Grid Point spacing Sets up the grid to the optimal 20 x 20 dot size Enter the coordi nate for the start point Set the start point in a center area that is to be the start point for calling up the screen The
119. image data can be dis played on the LT series panel Even though your original image file can be up to 256 colors since the LT can only display in 64 colors the file s colors will be converted to the LT s 64 colors You can load an Image screen onto a Base screen Trend Graph screen or Keyboard screen by selecting the Draw menu Load Screen command 2 2 10 Load Screens Se te You can animate the Image screen by using the L tag However the Image screen cannot be opened To convert image data into Image screen data for the LT series use the Utility menu Convert Bitmap command This command can convert image data of up to 800 x 600 dots You can also perform the bit map conversion by selecting the Edit menu NX Convert Place Bitmap command 2 3 18 Converting and Placing a Bitmap i Important Image screens cannot be edited To edit the image data you must use the original file and then convert this file into Image screen data The Image screens can be checked on the screen list 4 1 1 Listing Screens 3 2 1 Bitmap Conversion Convert image data bitmap BMP file created with another editor soft ware or read with an image scanner into an Image I screen for the LT series The LT Editor can convert image data displayed in 2 colors mono chrome data 16 colors 64 colors and 256 colors With a color Image screen when the data volume becomes large the LT series display speed is incre
120. in the position where acter pattern has already been cre you click A Mark can be created using this pattern ated the new pattern will overwrite SUTERTERTERTESETEETERTERTERTESTTSTTESTEnTERTERTS the existing pattern and the exist ing pattern will be deleted LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 11 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 2 Editing a Mark To edit a Mark you can use the following editing functions This section describes the operating procedure for each function E Cutting a Mark The Cut command deletes the data of the selected screen and stores it in the clipboard The deleted screen can be moved to another screen but cannot be moved to the original screen The Cut command can be ex ecuted for the entire screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the original Mark screen to be cut This description assumes that several screens have al ready been opened 2 Select the Edit menu Cut command or click on To delete the Mark screen perform the icon to store the Mark data in the Clipboard steps 1 and 2 only Data of the original data screen will be cut I When the Copy or Cut command is executed the copied or cut data are temporarily stored in the clipboard When you execute the Paste command the data stored in the clipboard will be pasted to the select
121. internal memory 1 Filing Data folder indicates the File Settings Adds folder and file settings g Fina Data Edits the contents of folder and file settings Copies folder and file settings Pastes copied folder and file settings Deletes folder and file settings Lists registered Lists registered filing folders and files settings E Registering Filing Data Here the procedure of adding Filing Data Setting is explained 10 12 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Registering Folders When multiple folders are used select Internal Memory and click oni Add to display the screen for creating a new folder Save As Folder No Filing data number Folder Type Filing Datallntemal K A value between 1 and 64 can be set Folder No 1 g Cancel Folder Title mwe o o Enter a title Commas are not al lowed Registering Filing Data When multiple folders are not used the filing data setting screen is dis played When multiple folders are used you can display the filing data setting screen by selecting 1 filing Data and click on the Add button ling Data File No men EE No ofDateBlocks PE Filing data is controlled in individual Design Hot Datettens po file units Here designate the file num Date Sterese StatAdtess pomon FINE ataFoma bers of filing data to be registered Up etock wane P
122. left sides Value 0 zero is regarded as OFF and other values as ON N1 or N2 is true if either N1 or N2 is ON and false if otherwise e not NOT Negation NOTs the right side Value O zero is regarded as 1 and other values as 0 not N1 is Oif N1 is 1 and 1 if N1 is 0 e lt Smaller than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is smaller than N2 N1 lt N2 e lt Equal to or smaller than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is equal to or smaller than N2 N1 lt N2 e lt gt Not equal Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is not equal to N2 N1 lt gt 1 N2 e gt Greater than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is greater than N2 N1 gt N2 e gt Equal to or greater than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is equal to or greater than N2 N1 gt N2 e Equal Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant The result is true if N1 is equal to N2 N1 N2 R re For details about logical operations N 3 1 6 Logical Operation Examples Memory Control
123. loop 2 break Escape from loop 2 endloop break Escape from loop 1 endloop e If loop operation is finished without using the escape com mand the temporary Word Address value becomes 0 e The range available for the temporary Word Address value will differ depending on the data format Bin BCD bit length and code used If code has been designated and the temporary Word Address becomes a negative value the condition is judged at the beginning of the loop and the loop processing stops e DONOT use a External Device device in the loop formula Instead use an address from the LT s internal LS area s user area device or a temporary Word Address For example the following description preforms data write to the External Device many times in a short period 100 times in the follow ing example This can cause a system error since communi cation processing the time required to write to the External Device cannot be performed at this speed LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 195 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script E g t0000 100 Loop100 times loop t 0000 w D0200 w LS0100 Write data to D0200 w LS0100 w LS0100 1 Increment LS0100 endloop Change as follows t 0000 100 Loop100 times loop t 0000 w LS 200 w LS0100 Writes data to D0200 w LS0100 w LS0100 1 Increment LS0100 endloop w D0200 w
124. lower on the list 2 223 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 224 Setup Channel tub All Setup Channel Trigger Bit Addr Top write Addr No of Sampling Ad Data Backup 0o00 0020 Mo Saves the Data Sampling Setting List in a CSV file Scrolls the display left right up and down when the Data Sampling Setting List is bigger than the screen size Wot The tab width for each item can be adjusted by positioning the mouse pointer on the border between items and then dragging it E Changing the Data Sampling Setting Order The Data Samplings will function in the order that they have been set up the order displayed on all the pages of the Data Sampling List on the LT screen To change this order click on either the Move Up or Move Down key When multiple Data Sampling are grouped that group will be moved up or down E Exporting a CSV File The Data Sampling Setting list information can be saved as a CSV file 2 7 5 Parts List Exporting a CSV File LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques 2 7 1 Cross Reference List The Cross Reference List feature is useful when displaying the current address condition of Parts and other items Here the exact address used for each Part can be checked
125. lt lt 4 Result The data in D200 is shifted 4 bits to the left w D200 gt gt 4 Result The data in D200 is shifted 4 bits to the right 12 0000Ch is stored in D301 using the BIN format w D200 w D300 gt gt w D301 Result The data in D300 1s shifted 12 bits to the right and assigned to D200 Bit AND 0 amp O Result O QO amp I Result O 1 amp l Result 1 0x1234 amp OxFOFO Result 0x1030 BitOR 010 Result O Oll Result 1 1 1 Result 1 Ox 1234 0x9999 Result Ox9BBD Bit XOR 0 0 Result O 0 1 Result 1 1 1 Result O Bit One s complement NOT When the data format is Bin16 O0 Result OxFFFF Result OxFFFE 2 202 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 7 Conditional Branches E Control Branches Using if endif and if else endif if endif if condition Process 1 endif If the condition is true process 1 is executed If false process 1 is ignored E g if w D200 lt 5 i w D100 1 endif If the data in D200 is smaller than 5 1 is assigned in D100 if else endif if condition Process 1 else Process 2 endif If the condition is true process 1 is executed If false process 2 is executed E g 1f w D200 lt 5 w D100 1 w D100 0 endif If the data in D200 is smaller than 5
126. ment Word Symbols Enter the address es corre sponding to the symbol s or Enter a symbol description s name name of up to twenty characters LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 19 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Symbol Editor Types There are five types of symbols the Word symbol corresponding to a word address the Bit symbol corresponding to a bit address the Logic Integer sym bol the Logic Discrete symbol and the Logic Real symbol which are used in a logic program Word Symbol Logic Bit Symbol Logic Discrete Symbol Logic symbol Logic symbol means variables used in a logic program A new logic sym bol cannot be registered with the Symbol Editor When a logic program is saved global variables registered on the variable list will automatically be registered with the Symbol Editor Only global variables are registered as logic symbols Variables are registered as one of the following three logic symbols de pending on the variable type Logic Integer symbol Logic Discrete symbol Logic Real symbol As for an array variable each element is registered as a symbol An array of size 5 is registered as five logic symbols Element Number representing elements in an array will be lt Element Number gt as a Logic symbol and an array of size 5 ALLM will be represented as below Array variable ALLM 0 ALLM lt Q gt ALLM 1 ALLM lt 1 g
127. necessary Like a pre made Part Shape the objects registered in these libraries can be viewed and selected using the Browser function Multiple objects can be combined and registered and Marks created on Mark screens can also be registered 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen These items are stored in a Library file CPW file separate from Project LTE files When library data is a Mark it will be saved in a Mark Library MRK file Moving from one Library file to the other allows objects to be called up that were previously used in a variety of screens and Project files To call up an item from a Library or save an item to a Library either select one of the tool bar s icons or use the pull down menu s Library commands With both Base and Mark screens open when the Base screen where the Library Browser is remained open is changed to the Mark screen the Mark Library Browser cannot be open on the Mark screen When changing the screen first close the Library Browser and change the screen and then open the Library Browser on the newly opened screen Objects called up via the Load Screen or Load Mark command as well as D script cannot be registered E Library Browser When either or icon is clicked on the Library Browser will appear Displays the currently selected item s registration number and title clicking on the triangle brings up a list of the items in the current library Men u Bar sal 0p5 obja cpw
128. of Switches and Lamps 2 2 E Selecting Colors E Changing to a New Text Line and Line Settings When entering characters simply press the key to move to a new line When there are 2 or more lines of text icons will appear to allow adjust ments in line spacing and justification Controls the aaa ae A Controls the performed in x16 reek e Fo B E a ee ii ealon Bo M a E e Justification Horizontal text s alignment can be changed to either Left Center or Right justified Right justified Left justified Centered 2 112 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Entering Text PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Text command or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes of the characters to be input The attributes can also be entered Select Colors and Character Size if desired and selected after entering text When Raised is selected for Character Type the border color Bd will become shadowed 1 e 3 D Direction Style Horizontal E3 f Normal fe i Bold Mertical Raised Font Size oe eko oes e 3 Click on the text field to input characters via your PC s keyboard Simply clicking on the text field allows you to input char acters there Style e Normal Bold Raised Fo D N n L a e oe a E Hereafter two text alignment cases will be explaine
129. on the OK button 1f desired Only Mark screens in the current project can be loaded Mark screens in other projects are not available When the screen display size 1s 50 the loaded Mark may not be Si displayed correctly on the LT Edi s ME e ra tor software es POSE e i To cancel the loading click on the 3 Click on the point where the Mark s top left corner is icon to be placed If desired use the Mark s handles to alter its size To change the Mark s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up 2 Down K o Double clicking on any Mark Te ea we x loaded on the screen automatically calls up that Mark s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 118 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS ye Object Editing Parts objects and text previously placed or drawn hereafter called Ob jects can be edited using various functions such as Copy and Delete To edit an object first use the cursor to select the object and then select the type of edit operation Usage Pattern Select an Edit Select the type of Perform the Object gt or gt editing to perform editing Tool Bar E Types of Editing Functions Icons contained in the Edit Tool Bar and their corresponding edit operation are as follows Te ne PST mrs a E e S e a Te e R e Bw R e oe comatose ASD seve o o Duite
130. on the button The Numeric Display s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Numeric Display s top To cancel the placement click on left corner is to be placed telal con If necessary use the Numeric Display s handles to alter its size after placement Regardless of whether the numeric data display area is scaled up or down the character size will not change To change the character size and position select the char acters inside the border directly To change a Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Pressing the key while re siz ing an area s border will also re size that area s characters Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 76 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS ARES Message Display This display is used to show single line alarm messages in response to changes in External Device s Word Address data A total of 16 messages can be displayed in order of occurrence in a message display area E Message Display General Settings Attributes Select the Enter Comment Message Display Settings H _001 Word or Bit data here General Settings Messages Address to be Description Address mon ito red selected Part color Shape is dis played here Select the type of
131. program If a newer version s data is used that data will not be converted When each object s coordinates are converted errors may occur thereby slightly changing them Once a DXF file data is converted into Base screen data even if the Base screen is again converted back into the original DXF file or vice versa the resulting data my be unusable When converting data be sure that the screen s width and height ratio will be the same for both the Base screen and the DXF file Screen size settings LIMMAX LIMMIN If this ratio is different after data is converted object locations or shapes will also be different from the original Conversion from DXF File to Base Screen DXF Screen DXF file data is converted into Base screen data orm gt N gt E Editor Convert E Requirements and Restrictions when Converting Data DXF Screen Grouped objects Blocks can be nested up to 10 layers levels deep The DXF file data format is ASCII Both CR LF and LF can be used as line feed characters and will be converted correctly During conversion when the resulting output file s size reaches 16Kbytes the conversion will quit and subsequent data will not be converted Three dimensional data cannot be converted If the X Y coordinate screen boundaries SLIMMIN LIMMAX are not set up correctly in the DXF file after the data created in the DXF file is converted into Base scre
132. right mouse button in the Mark drawing area each dot turns OFF black A Mark is created with dots and displayed in a block 8 x 8 dots If at least one dot is turned ON in a block the whole block is displayed when the Mark screen is loaded onto a Base screen In this status the ON dots are displayed in the current display color Fg and the OFF dots are displayed in the background color Bg al ERE fe Veale Mell Tete This dot is ON A tL 3 4 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Freehand Drawing PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Dot command or click on the icon 2 Draw a Mark by clicking on each dot or by dragging the mouse in the Mark drawing area LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 5 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Drawing a Line PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Line command or click on the icon 2 Click on a start point in the mMark drawing area and drag the mouse 3 Click the end point in the Mark drawing area If you press and hold the key A line is defined in step 2 you can draw a line at an angle of 0 45 and 90 3 6 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen REMARKS PROCEDURE
133. select the Project menu Transfer command or click on tne Qs icon Or via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Setup menu Password command 3 In order to change a password you must first en ter the currently registered password Change Password Please Enter Hew Password Please Re enter New Password 4 Enter a new password To cancel the password after en tering the currently registered pass sede ee word in step 2 DO NOT enter a new password in step 3 and sim ply click on the button Change Password Please Enter New Password Please Re enter New Password Change Password Please Enter Password Please Enter Mew Password Please Re enter New Password then click on the ox __ button CT 5 Enter the same password again for confirmation and Change Password Please Enter Password Please Enter New Password Please Re enter New Password 71 8 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs ex Transfer Preparation The Project File LTE file data created with the LT Editor program is first compiled before it is transferred to the LT unit Select the Project menu Prepare command to compile your data I Transfer Transfer Setup View Options Help Project File
134. start point is set as the default value Sets the Grid Point display state displayed or not displayed Grid pattern display can also be changed in the Grid Tool Bar s grid pattern selection list box Snap When the Snap check box is checked the cursor will snap to the grid objects can only be drawn on points start amp end along the grid LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 213 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Za Turning the Snap function ON or OFF can also be performed via the Grid Snap Tool Bar s icons DFR and DHII S P Ti ai Spacing The Grid Point intervals are entered here The unit is a dot Input the interval value for the X and Y axes respectively The default value is 20 dots When clicking on Touch Area a 20 x 20 dot spacing will be automatically designated which is most suitable for the touch panel Select a desired grid pattern in Spacing and click on the button Then the selected grid pattern will be reflected to the current screen and will also be displayed as the 6th selection of the Grid Tool Bar s grid pattern selection list Grid Spacing List Clicking on the Change button changes Grid Spacing List s highlighted set value to Spacing s set value and registers it The grid patterns registered here will be displayed on the Grid Tool Bar s grid pattern selection list box A grid pattern se
135. temperature UP a Kooos Summary Summary 5 8 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing E Adding Alarm Data Here you can add alarms for the specified number of bits or words from the line whose item is enclosed with dotted lines Addresses are automatically assigned to each alarm from the start address in series according to the designated address adding increment In addition when messages have been entered they are copied for all the alarms to be added When a variable Logic symbol is used as a start address set I the add offset to 0 Otherwise the correct addition will not be w importan performed Add Basic Alarm Start Address O01 COOQ0000 E Alarm Type Number of Bits taAdd JIE Alam Summary 3 Alarm Message Add Offset lo 2 Message Color Fo N N a i a a E E Bo W m e PROCEDURE 1 Select the address line where the specified number of addresses will be added Shown here with a dot ted line around its border i a 7 5 2 Select the Edit menu Add Alarm command or click on the icon 3 After entering the necessary settings click on the button If the same number already exists the system asks 1f each file must be overwritten If you select sired file will be overwritten If you select the desired file will not be overwritten and the syste
136. the LT unit panel during alarm output Select a message color 1f desired eit A Type Message Sunmary Text B Bit A Summary Tank amp temperature increase i FS a E T Up to 160 alphanumeric characters can be entered for one Basic Alarm message After selecting several messages by dragging the mouse you can use the Copy and Paste commands 34 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing PROCEDURE 4 Select the alarm type Alarm Message or Alarm ee Tita tye Messege Sumary Text pon Summary ank A temperature increase fe 5 After entering all the necessary items select the Alarm menu Save command or click on the icon The specified alarm data will be stored in the currently opened project file REMARKS Up to 512 alarm messages can be registered However set the moni tor bits within 128 words If a message has not been entered the Alarm Editor data cannot be saved even if the bit addresses have been specified SP Editing Alarm Data This section describes how to use the Alarm Editor s editing commands E Cut Move Here you can delete the selected line of alarm data and store it on the clipboard PROCEDURE 1 Select the line of alarm data to be moved eee a fx ZOO10 Tank 4 temperature UP Cal zasa Tank BE temperature UP
137. the already assigned address is deleted Merge The device comment is called up in addition to the already assigned address Get Comment File From Project Save Options f Overvrite i Merge Hl Include Alarm Files a To call up an alarm message from the Alarm Editor mark the Include Alarm Files check box 4 26 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing wes Changing a Project s LT Type You can change the LT type of your current project Sse After changing the LT type you can save the current project using the YY Project menu Save As command 1 2 2 E Saving a Project Under a Different Name PROCEDURE 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Change LT Type command j ai Soda_lte Soda Project Manager shEcitor Fer 1 0 E 2 F te 2 CALogiT ouch SAMPLES oda Ite Pro face Change the LT type for thi LogiT ouch Type A A 2 To change the LT type click on the desired LT type Change LT Type LT Type LogiT ouch Type A LogiT ouch Type C LogiT ouch Type 4 Portrait LogiT ouch Type B Portrait LogiT ouch Type C Portrait 3 Click on the OOo button Change LT Type x LT Type LogiT ouch Type 4 i REMARKS E Important The drawing area com mands and memory used by t
138. the startup browser If the browser setings are correct quit all other applications and restartthe browser Cannot read system file The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened or read or the file s data is not correct The file may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file Cannot read the file s system information The project fle is corrupt Use LT Editor s rebuilding tool to repair the file Afer repair is completed read the file again Convert to 256 colors or less by this software Destination screen number is too high Set Copy source end number copy source Reduce the number of destination or source start number gt 8999 copy destination start screens number Exceeds Data Backup Area Limit The backup setings backup area used cannot Please adjust your settings to fit this area s exceed 2031 Set Backup start address the size limitations number of devices to less than or equal to 2031 Extemal Device File Type Error The External Device table file format is not the Same as the LT s or the file is corrupt Selectan External Device from the master disk and reinstall the file Grouping Nesting Limit Reached You are attempting to nest grouped objects more Unable to group more than these objects than 10 tmes Only 10 levels of nestng are allowed Intemet Browser Not Selected Y et An Internet browser has not been selected yet Please select
139. to a read error is identified with in a cell Data that is not logged is not displayed E Data Logging Display General Settings Attributes Enter a comment LEI if necessary General Settings Data type Color Switch setting Switch Shape Cola Description Block Humber Address Specify whether 1 7 the data edit function is Ie Data Edi enabled or I Wieslne Interlock Address disabled mo A Pey une thes the interlock function is enabled or disabled Block Number Address Using a word address specify the block number of data being displayed Using a bit address specify the interlock address On a block basis specify the data being displayed The logged data for the block number stored at the word address specified here will be displayed The block numbers that can be entered are between 0 and 2047 but the maximum of the effective range is Number of Blocks specified in Trigger Settings in the data logging settings If Number of Blocks specified in Trigger Settings is 4 the block numbers are 0 to 3 BIN values only X played ote If any block number that does not exist is specified no data will be dis When the loop function has been designated via Trigger Settings of the data logging settings the Block Number Address will become ineffective LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 67 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS
140. to an address line spacing assigned by the automatic incor units address increment is reflected in the Description field Number of Copies Here how many times an object will be copied in the X and Y directions is entered When 1 is entered for either direction copying will not be performed in that direction The number of copies is also limited by the copied object s location size the Duplicate dialog box s Spacing settings and any other related settings Spacing Enter the spacing interval of dot screen pixel units to be used when the La object is copied for both the Horizontal and Vertical directions Note When Duplicating an object its positioning will be decided based on the top XX left handle of the copied master object However if a Bar Graph s handles are located in a graph display area the object will be placed based on the graph display area not the graph s border Therefore when setting the spacing be sure to not overlap any of the graphs borders Address Increment To copy multiple Parts specify the direction of the automatic address incre ment According to the automatic address increment consecutive Addresses will be assigned in the designated direction When the original object s Address is a Bit Address the automatic address increment is performed in the unit of bit and when it is a Word Address the automatic address incre ment is performed in the unit of word If the auto
141. to transfer screen data created with the LT Editor program to and from the LT unit Usage Pattern Project Manager Specify the Setup gt Project Transfer gt Setup ransfer _ and Communica or or Settings tion parameters Click on E eon Compile the LT Click on the ta or Transfer Prepare Editor data LT unit icon to transfer data screen data To display a screen window to perform data transfer select the Project Manager s Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or select the Screen Editor s Screen menu Transfer command or click on the ia icon An example of this screen window is as follows Cancels Data Displays the Transfer Transfers screen Transfer mode Settings dialog box data and logic Transfer E Quits Transfer programs from mode LT Editor to the LT unit Ey Displays the Project file ae alee current project file Transfers only E e logic programs Pe tption e zA _ Transfer Status Prepare Status Displays the currently specified transfer mode Receives screen data and logic programs from the LT unit to the Displays the LT Editor currently speci fied setup mode Displays the currently specified destination type Displays the current Displays the Displays the Displays the status of the data current project s transfer prepara progress of the data transfer operation comment data tion st
142. upper right corner of the Logic Program Editor When saving a logic program vari ables registered with the Logic Pro gram Editor will be registered with the Symbol Editor as Logic sym bols 4 2 5 Symbol Editor E Important When variables are used in a drawing be sure to make a drawing after saving a logic program Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish iz Opening Closing Saving a Screen To create a screen you must switch from the Project Manager to the Screen Editor and open a screen This section describes the procedures for opening closing and saving a screen E Opening a New Screen PROCEDURE 1 Select the Project Manger s Screen Setup menu Editor command or click on E The Screen Editor s opening screen will appear IS Diawing Board Factory A Screen Edi View Optio Draw Parts Special Library window Help xl OCG Mk a t E A w wa a aa A POR RR RPeOCAIOFEUSE 720e Ready 2 Select the Screen Editor Screen menu s New command or click on 3 Select the screen type Screen Type it ark Creen 4 Click on the button to create the desired type of screen A screen corresponding to the designated LT type will
143. yy mm dd dd mm yy mm dd yy 20yy mm dd dd mm 20yy mm dd 20yy yy year mm month dd day Color The Date Display s border color character display color Text and interior color Plate can be selected here y Reference s 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors Character Size The label s Character Size is selected here y Reference s 2 2 9 Text The characters used for the display of 2000 s first two characters 20 are single byte characters LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 83 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Date Display The Date Display placement procedure is shown below Used to display the date PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Date Display command or click on the 172 icon 2 In the General Settings area select a display format Date Dispaly Settings DD_001 Select the yy mm dd format Border Color i Ii 1 i E E Text Color ek Plate Color i _ ek 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select If desired select Colors and Character Size ing a Part Shape DD_3D004 DD_3D005 I DD_3D006 Current PDE File c propbiwinpdb pdb pdb Tite DD_3D001 al 4 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the Place button The Date Display s outline will appear in the Base screen
144. 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 3 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 4 E Filing Data Registration Capacity When saving filing data up to 2 048 filing data files can be registered with up to 1 650 data blocks in each file and up to 10 000 pieces of data in each block However when the data format is 32 Bits only 5 000 data items can be registered Registration capacity however varies depending on the use of the backup SRAM or other settings Up to 59520 bytes of filing data can be stored in one folder in the LT s internal memory when storing only filing data to the backup SRAM SRAM Storage Capacity Calculation 1 file 96 Fixed value 32 2 or4x number of data pieces x number of data blocks Use 2 for 16 Bit devices and use 4 Total capacity of all files lt 59520 for 32 Bit device file calculation The following shows Storage Capacity when using 16 Bit Device Data Format No of data No ofdata Total capacity pieces blocks of all files 1650 5949 1 640 59136 a Usage priority of backup SRAM 1 Data sampling 2 Trend graph 3 LS Area backup 4 Logging data 5 Filing data SRAM Memory is used starting from item 1 To check the LT s available usage capacity 4 4 1 Project Information e Data in backup SRAM is erased when e The LT s memory is initialized e Data is transmitted e The LT system and protocol are set up
145. 0 to LS2031 excluding the read in area Select the Movement Settings command from the Option menu If the LS Device check box is marked the Parts that use LS devices will be displayed when a simulation is executed Movement Settings T LS besite E Address Registration Simulation can be performed for any registered address not for each screen or function The simulation result is displayed by selecting the registered address from the display function pull down list s Address Registration To register edit an address select the Simulation menu Address Regis tration command or click on the icon Register Address Type Device Delete Edit Copy Pasties OF Help LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 8 Simulation 8 1 Overview Adding a registered address You can add a new address Click on the button and the following dialog box will appear Then enter an address and the number of addresses to be added and specify Bit or Word After entering a number of addresses to be added addresses are added from the designated number in series You can enter a desired name as a function name with up to 20 half sized characters Input Address Address 00000 TE te Bit ta Word Address Count f rm Er Editing a registered address You can change the registered address settings Select an address to be edited and click on the butt
146. 1 LT Editor Fundamentals PROCEDURE REMARKS When 256 colors is selected on the Display Properties screen of the a n Control Panel the display of the LegifouchEcitor v 1 Project Manager may change but its functioning will not be affected ive Creating Selecting Saving a Project A project file LTE file normally contains multiple screens and a logic program intended for the operation of a certain system LT Editor creates one project file for the operation of one system enabling system manage ment by project file units After you have transferred a project file and set up an LT you can transfer updated logic programs individually to the LT E Creating a New Project When you create a new project you must designate the LT and External Device information according to your current application LT Type Select your type of LT LogiTouch Series If your LT will be installed vertically instead of horizontally be sure to select a vertical type LT The Screen Editor will automatically create a vertical drawing area for you LT machine type LT type of project T ype Al T ype A2 LogiT ouch T ype A LogiT ouch T ype B LogiT ouch T ype C External Device Type Select the type of External Device to be connected to your LT unit This setting 1s required only when the LT is a Type C LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 5 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals
147. 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Rea Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Bar Graph Graph Settings Attributes Bar Graph Settings BA_001 General Settings Graph Setting Shape Color alam Setting OOOO O Only when A Display Direction Axis Divisions graph with Select the sip graduations graph s display has been direction Sra selected will this box appear Enter the number of Place Heb divisions desired here Direction The graph s display direction can be specified as either Up Left Down or Right Za If Display Direction is changed for a 3D part its shade is rotated along with Note that part To let the shade displayed properly click on the button and select the part again from Shape Browser Axis Divisions For a graph which has graduations the number of divisions are entered here If the number of the divisions is specified to 10 then 11 division lines are used When graduations are not necessary specify the number of the divi sions as 0 Q te Whether the graduations are necessary or not will differ depending on the X Part s shape E Bar Graph Shape Color Attributes The graph s border color division color Axis Color display data color Graph Color and display data patterns are selected here 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Bar Graph Alarm Settings Attribute If desired an Alarm can be setup here by toggling the Alarm check box 2 1 Parts Set
148. 10 40 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging Write Settings Total Writes each column s total value for each block to the LS area The Total value is written to the LS area via the Control Word Address according to the Logging Settings Display Settings Perform Data Write On Off Designates whether or not the Total value is written to the LS area Control Word Address When writing the Total value to the LS area transfers the Total value data to the LS area by designating a Block No and turning the Trigger Bit OFF and then ON Control Word Address 7 1 0 0 Reservation All OFF Trigger 1 Block No Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted Write to LS Address Designates the LS Area Address used when writing data Write Complete Bit Address Designates a Bit Address to be turned ON when data write into the LS Area is completed After the Bit Address ON condition 1s detected turn it OFF via the External Device When there is no designated Block No the Perform Data Write Bit Address is not turned ON LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 41 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features Data to be Written to LS Area Block and data structures to be transmitted to the LS Area are as follows Block Logging data 1 Logging data Be 15 0 See below oo S Year Stored lasttwo digits using a t
149. 2 only bit 00 is used The remaining bits can be When the value set in the No of used for other purposes Messages is 8 bits 00 to 02 are used 2 718 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Message Display Messages Attributes Operation Mode example When using Word Address Enter the message s Deletes the text here currently selected Enter the number Message Display Settings HW _001 message and of messages f General Settings Messages og specifies the states here ee message and Messages Piece eine its col or as i 4 E 10 E Uperation Enter the maxi a Ea undefined Message Style TAN si Copies al the h characters in The state indica aes Color the Selected tion buttons ean L m k Message field appear according ce Coo Mi aim b to all states to the No of Messages E characters in epee lial Select the message s_ the Description yP display Color field to the Selected Message field No of Messages The number of the messages number of states can be selected from 2 4 8 and 16 Display Characters Here the maximum number of characters displayed in a message is selected Up to 40 characters can be input If the number of a message characters exceeds the specified value characters that do not fit in the area will be truncated Message According to the No of Messages designate a message for each state Ope
150. AF 3 Designate the source DXF file and the destination To designate a folder click on the Project File and enter the Base screen number Select button File Convert DXF gt Screen From DF File C SLogiT ouch databasedraw 1 det To Project File C LogiT ouch database F actor Screen No B jio N 2 234 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Click on the Option button and enter the conver sion conditions File Convert DXF gt Screen From DMF File C LogiT ouch database draw dst To Project File C LogiT ouch database Factory 5 After all the attributes have been entered click on 2 8 1 Option e button to registered the entered data DXF gt Screen Option DSF gt Screen J x Convert OF Size fe Use LIMMIN SLIMMAX 9 Use EXTMIN SET MAS Convert Screen Size 9 6404480 9 640x400 y 3 320240 3 00600 CNEA 6 Click on the Convert button to start conversion If the designated screen number al File Convert DXF gt Screen J x 7 ready exists a prompt will appear DXF Fie ELogiTouehhdatabase ctaw dki Select asking whether the new number To Proiect Fle CALogiTouchideabae Factay Select should overwrite the old number When the button is clicked on the new number will ove
151. Address is turned ON 3 The logging data is read out one time 4 The LT_ACK Bit Address is turned ON 5 External Device detects the LT_ACK Bit Address is turned ON and the External Device Trigger Bit Address is turned OFF 6 LT detects the External Device Trigger Bit Address is turned OFF and the LT_ACK Bit Address is turned OFF 7 The External Device confirms that the LT_ACK Bit Address is turned OFF Prior to performing steps 1 and 2 with the External Device be sure to confirm that the LT ACK Bit Address has been turned OFF Also assum ing that the main power may be turned OFF for some reason be sure to take appropriate countermeasures such as turning the External Device Trigger Bit and LT_ACK Bit OFF when starting operation LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 31 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 32 E When designating time Logging data is read only one time at the designated timing When designating time without using loop operation a Block s Finish Bit Address is turned ON when a block s data logging is completed in order to start data read at the read start time Logging data in the External Device Word Address is cleared by the external device Data Logging Auth Bit Address External Device to LT Designated tme Q Inside of LT Data read Logging data read out External Device to LT luy axy Data Logging Settings Set up items in the Trigg
152. After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the Face _ button The Part s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 2 Click on the point where the Part s top left corner is to be placed The selected Part will then appear on the screen 3 Adjust the Part s size if desired MN 2 3 3 Scaling Up Click on the Part to select it and drag any one of the Down handles to change the size of the Part To change the size of a Part move the cursor to a Part handle and click then drag the handle to re size the Part and click again After placing the Part double clicking on it automatically brings up its Attribute Setting dialog box METH 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Note Depending on the Part when scaling up or down one dot error may occur in NA the frame width E g 9 10 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 13 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 1 Bit Switches 2 14 2 1 Parts Here the creation of a touch panel switch used for turning a specified Bit ON or OFF is explained If the LT unit is Type C Bit Switches with the Monitor function selected will not be displayed on the LT unit after the Project Important File transferred E Bit Switch General Settings Attributes Enter comment Bit Switch Settings BS_001 I Enter the Bit data here General Settings
153. Before executing the simulation you must first transfer the simulation protocol to the LT unit regardless of the External Device specified for the project file Check the Use Extended Program area s Simulation Check Box in the Transfer Settings dialog box so that when screens are transferred the simulation protocol will be transferred to the LT unit 7 2 1 Transfer Settings Z 3 l ote When a simulation is executed you need to transfer the simulation protocol NY only for the first screen transfer 8 8 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 8 Simulation 8 1 Overview 8 1 3 Performing a Simulation To perform a simulation first connect the LT unit to your personal computer using the Data Transfer Cable i e Before performing a simulation you must transfer the simula L tion protocol to the LT unit Important 8 1 2 Transferring Simulation Protocol e Be sure not to press the touch panel switch of the LT main unit before the simulation starts Especially be sure not to change the screen of the LT unit Otherwise a system error will occur PROCEDURE REMARKS Connect the LT unit to your personal computer with the Prior to starting simulation set the Data Transfer Cable LT unit to the RUN mode 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Ifthe simulation protocol has not Simulation command been transferred to the LT unit in step 1 the following dialo
154. Border type Select a Fg and Bg color and blinking if de sired fo ee ek bo Bee eK Select one of the Tiling patterns fo ee ek bo Bee eK E Drawing a Circle Oval PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Circle Oval command or click on the icon 2 Set attributes of an oval to be drawn Select colors and a line type if desired To draw a filled oval check the Fill check box and select a pattern 1n stead of selecting a line type Cicle O val I Fo eee oe bo Bee L E J Select a Pattern 2 100 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS Cicle Oval Fo Pee Ke bo Bees Kd 3 Move the cursor over the drawing area and click on In step 3 if the key is held the center point shown here by a down you can draw an oval which contacts a specified area i e the side s of a square This function is useful when drawing an inscribed circle and can also be used in step 4 together with the key 4 As the cursor is moved the oval will expand or con To draw a regular circle hold the tract key down in step 4 Click on the point shown by b The drawn oval will be registered When using the keyboard to draw an oval use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the center point and then to the point which defines its lt gt circumference radius point press 4 ing t
155. CT MANAGEMENT 4 1 Screen Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Enter the screen type and screen number of the des tination screen The screens will be copied to the Destination project starting from the specified initial screen number onwards Screen Copy Source Soda lte i Factory 4 Ibe l All z Stat Fian 1 fA Screens Fram ENE to Fe Tapen pe All fe a Internal Settings Internal Settings JF System Information Je Filing Data JE Data Sampling is Overmite 3 Merge i Overvwite i Merge J Data Loging Settings w D 5 cript Functions i Dvenrite 3 Merge W Global D 5 cript i Dvenrite 3 Merge 5 Select the internal settings to be copied and specify a copying method overwrite or merge Screen Copy Source Destination Soda lte i Factor 4 Ibe l t All Start Fian ta Scies Fan BEE Ee E to fe Tapen upg All a A Internal Settings Internal Settings System Information F Filing Data J Data Sampling i Dvernarite i Merge i Dvenrite 3 Merge J Data Loging Settings 4 D Script Functions Overatite 24 Merge i Apal D 5 cript i Dvenrite 3 Merge 6 After confirming your selection and designation click on the Cony button If there is any screen of an identical number or function name you will be prompted to conform whether or not to overwrite it Selecting Yes will overwrite such a screen or function name and selecting No will proceed to the next
156. D PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 4 Information Display gt Information Display This section describes the types of screen and project information available 4 4 1 Project Information Project Information displays both the commands used to edit the current project and the date and time of its last revision To use this command select the Project menu Project Information command E Project Information Project Screen SARAM Information Curent Project Factory B lte Description Factory B External Device Type OMRON THERMAC MED SERIES LT Type LogiT ouch Type C Project Size mo mm g mm DI Bytes Date amp Time Thu Apr 13 12 46 06 2001 Size of Screen To Be Sent To LT Wout Upload Io Bytes Extended Screen Count Current Project Displays the file name of the currently selected project file Description Displays a comment about the current project External Device Displays the External Device selected in the currently opened project file LT Type Displays the LT type selected in the current project file Project Size Displays the data volume of the current project file If any Parts are placed in this file the file volume will be increased Date amp Time Displays the date and time when this file was saved last Size of Screen To Be Sent To LT Displays the total data volume that will be occupied in the LT unit panel relative to the current project file This item indica
157. DICES l his section contains a list of error messages and corrective actions as well as address conversion tables APPUI AL sestesinbiscdvacesssiniainesiosaavsteneesacseuseusatanass Error Messages APPEN Z pyrr N a Troubleshooting Appendix S ssssassssrdessireionsonsnisscsrioie Address Conversion Tables Appendix 4 sssssssssssssecceeccssossssssssosoo Software Trouble Report LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Appendix 1 Appendix 1 Error Messages Appendices ay Error Messages E Project Manager Errors This section describes error messages that will be displayed during operation of the LT Editor and how to solve these problems If malfunction still occurs after the measure is taken describe the problem in the attached Software Trouble Report and send it to us by facsimile Cause Solution Can t edit Insufficient memory The memory area for editing is insufficient Quit other applicatons then begin editng your file again Cannot edit the files because the filing mode When the fling mode setings Use Multple Use Multiple Folders setting is not Folders was notselected you attempted to open selected Click on Use Multiple Folders 2 or more kinds of fling data directly from the Project M anager having nesting screen display by double clicking S elect Use M ultple Folders Cannot start up Intemet browser The browser setings are not correct or the memory area for the browser is insufficient Check the setings of
158. DOS Prompt A Documents d E windows Explorer TEF Uninstall Fy Adobe EB Settings H Fa Adobe Acrobat l Adobe Acrobat 40 ca Find i FS Internet Explorer r amp Help i k k FS ProPB Zwin Ta Paint Shop Fro 5 FS ProPBSWwin PFE Edition Log OF Dtpuser ET Shut Down WindowsoS AE Transfer i ic Protace LogiTouch Type C OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES 4 30 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 3 Project Compression Decompression PROCEDURE REMARKS 2 Select the Action menu Compress Project File command or click on the icon 3 Select the folder and project file to be compressed To call up a menu of all the avail or enter the file name able folders click on the Browse Browse The file name of the desired project file will be displayed 6c button in the Pack screen Pack Project File File Hame ESLogiT sae B lte Browse T Separate File 1 44 ME e Cancel 4 To divide the project file during compression click on the Separate File check box and select the de sired file size limit Fack Froject File File Name C LogiT ouch database F actor B lte A TAME F LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 31 4 3 Project Compression Decompression Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEME
159. Data Display 1 row Block Name Data Display 1 row Data Display Row T otal Row Block Name Row Data Display Row T otal Row Data display 1 row Block Name Total Row s 1 to 4 rows Data Display Row 1 row Total Row s 1 to 4 rows E g Display Settings 10 38 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging Row Setting Display When Using Loop Operation When using the loop feature the Data Logging Display is as follows E g When frequency is set to 4 Logging Data Backup SRAM data Pew otoo or roe fer 3 so of o Here the oldest acquired earliest logging data is displayed in the top most cell When a single cycle of data logging is completed from beginning to end data display rows will then shift upwards one row every time data is logged When using the loop feature the Total Total Average Max Min rows will disappear However these Total values will be the totals of backup SRAM data at that one pointing in time Therefore the new data that over writes the old data will not be included in the Total values LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 39 10 2 Logging E Write to LS Data Logging Settings 4 Perform Data write On Off Control Word Address Write to LS Address Write Complete Bit Address Write Settings T otal Control Word Address Write to LS Address Write Comolete Bit Add
160. E Important Click on the Overview of the Home Page Connection screen Used to add a home page address Home page Home page Used to edit a regis tered home page l address and title Displays the registered home page address title Used to delete a registered home page address Used to connect to the specified home page Connect home page E Registering a Home Page Address The address of Digital Electronics Corporation s Home Page has been preregistered in your LT Editor software When you click on the button the address setting dialog box appears E How to Register a Home Page Address E Deleting a Home Page Address Any registered home page address can be deleted When you select the home page address to be deleted and click on the button the confirmation dialog box appears If you click on the button the selected home page address will be deleted If you click on the button the deleting operation will be canceled Are you ure you want to delete Cancel LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 29 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help E Editing a Home Page Address The registered home page address or title can be changed When you select the home page address to be edited and click on the button the address setting dialog box appears same as for the home page addition procedure enabling you to change the title and
161. E SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the point where the Switch s top left corner To cancel the placement click on is to be placed the icon If desired use the Switch s handles to alter its size To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s Attribute Setting dialog box 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 1 2 Word Switches Here a touch panel switch for setting data to a specified Word Address can be created E Word Switch General Settings Attributes Enter Comment Word Switch Settings 5S_001 x data here l General Settings Shape Col L bel Enter the Word Description T Address you The Word T wish to use Switch s image Constant appears here Po g pp Function Enter the data 4 Word Set z Calls up the Part 1 a b for the Switch Shape Browser 3 Digit ADD Aptian to send to the 2 vigitsua Buzz Word Add Parts can be be or ress selected directly a Sels ire buzzer from the Browser F loom Et to ON OFF Selects the Herma O BHO Interlock func S tion Switch s func tion Word Address Here the desired Word Address is entered Constant Here number registered to the Word Address is input The data format is Decimal Base 10 and the input range is from 32768 to 32767 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 17 Chapter 2
162. EDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down Edit menu s Convert Bitmap Once a bit map has been converted command to an image place the image on a screen using the Load Screen func 2 Set all conversion settings and click on the Convert tion button 2 2 10 Load Import Bitmap x Screen oe re For each setting item itmap File 3 5 Creating Im Source Bitmap Colors Size bytes Le Dimensions age Data Image Before conversion the image dis played in the Import Bitmap dialog box is still compressed and may Pace Coree SL He appear different from the actual dis play after conversion 3 Click on the See button To cancel bit map conversion sim The bit map is then saved as an Image screen ply click on the button LEH scream Proevicw LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 151 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Click on the button The Image screen s border will appear on the current screen one Dimensions 171 127 N Cancel i Conver 5 Click on the point where the Image screen is to be To cancel the placement click on placed the icon The Image screen will appear on your screen Gr re Ifa portion of an Image screen extends over a Base screen s Y axis border 2Z that portion will not be displayed on the LT screen When the Image sc
163. Enabled only when the Data Format is designated as Dec or BCD If the values after the decimal point are not displayed enter 0 Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink When the Alarm option is se lected the color attributes designated here are used for normal display LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 53 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features Display Style Shift Left Shift Right Select either shift type Data is dis played from the selected position The default setting is Shift Left Zero Suppress When O suppression check box is checked all unnecessary Os are not dis played When this check is removed Os are added to the front of numbers to match the display length designated in the No of Display Digits area e g When the No of Display Digits is 4 and 0 suppression is OFF value 25 appears as 0025 E Display Settings Maximum File Size The display settings file size capacity is approximately 58KB However depending on the specific setting combination the user s file size may exceed this capacity The following example is the standard display setting SIZe e Enter the Block Name in the Ist column and then up to 8 single byte characters in each column e Enter the Block Name in the Ist row and then up to 8 single byte charac ters in each row e Four rows are available for totals Total Avera
164. Export symbol data 1 Via the Symbol Editor select the File menu Ex port Symbol command or click on the icon 2 Specify the name and type LBE or CSV of the file to save the exported data with and click on the Save button If the same file name already exists the system asks if the existing file must be overwritten If it must be over written select If you do not wish to over write it select Linel word LBE File name Line word Save N ancel Save as type LBE Files LBE i C V Export symbol 2 File already exists A Okay to replace Yes To export a device comment select the Export Device Comment command LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 25 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Calling up Device Comments All the comments that have already been registered with Parts can be called up on the Symbol Editor as device comments For addresses corresponding to each Part s comment refer to the Input Description Address Table 2 3 8 Duplication PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the File menu Get Device Comment From Project TAT 2 Select a device comment calling up method and click Multiple addresses may be onthe oK button given to a Part depending on its type In this case device comments will be called up for all the as signed addresses Overwrite The device comment is called up after
165. F EN DN af BOOO IM OUT Fill Tirner PT Dragging and dropping of a Part to a Logic Program instruction By dragging a Part placed on the screen to a Logic Program you can place an instruction that corresponds with the Part Drag the Part while holding down the key Screen Edt View Option Draw Parts Special Library Window Help euj el ea ne naxs A A OOO a h ii a A ee malele ensing machine lce_Maker B ts F e ae Bl Obiecte 5 amn Otee Lp T Link Select Change Order B Ay Ld 224 15 142 0 Bit Switch BS_OO1 s 88 83 128 123 selected M8 MTOM SIO i g 2 136 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 8 Duplicate This command allows you to easily make multiple copies of any object The address of the copies can be set up so as to increment automatically from copy to copy or simply reuse the address of the original object E Duplicate Setting Dialog Box When this command is used the Duplicate dialog box for entering the copy specifications will appear as shown below Enter the When copying Parts that number of a require addresses clicking copies in the here will automatically assign X and Y new incremented addresses directions for each copy The device comment corre Enter the sponding
166. File Name Display Switch Settings Attributes Set the function switches that are placed automatically 2 1 3 Function Switches File Display FD_001 x Switches to General Settings Display Style Colar Switch Settings SwitchType Color Switches to transfer Filing Automatic Switch Placement Wethod transfer data Data between the ia the LS backup SRAM C Send Tals Feon SRAM via tne C Send To SAH Flom Us area These and the External Semel Ta SRAM hom Ls Devi Nisar switches are ENIGE EE valid when oO Zend To PLE From LE Use LS Area Switches to is selected in scroll and select General items i Settings Send To External Device From SRAM Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the backup SRAM to the External Device Send To SRAM From External Device Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the External Device to the backup SRAM RollUp Places the Roll Up key used to scroll through a list of items Touching the Roll Up key once will roll up by the number specified here Roll Down Places the Roll Down key used to scroll through a list of items Touching the Roll Down key once will roll down by the number specified here Send To LS From SRAM Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the backup SRAM to the LS area Send To SRAM From LS Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the LS area to the backup SRAM Send To LS From External
167. Finish Time P Ho ME fs Duration H M S ReadCount i Block Count Data Logging Auth Bit Address Block s Finish Bit Address File Full Bit Address Data Clear Bit Address LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 2 Logging Block Count Designate the number of data blocks Data is logged for the number of blocks designated here and then handled as a file 1 lt Times x Blocks lt 2048 Trigger Bit Address Designate a Bit Address to be used as External Device s trigger External Device to LT LT_ACK Bit Address Designate the External Device Bit Ad dress When data logging is completed one time LT turns ON the Bit Address designated here LT to External De vice File Full Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When data logging is performed for the designated number of blocks the Bit Address designated here is turned ON LT to External Device After the External Device detects the Bit Address is turned ON turn it OFF Data Clear Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When the Bit Address designated here is turned ON data stored in the backup SRAM is deleted After the backup SRAM data is deleted LT turns OFF this Bit Address External Device to LT LT to External Device Loop Selecting this feature means when data logging is completed it will begin again from the top most data address and overwrite the existing data Ti
168. G BASE SCREENS E Registering D Script Editor Here additional D Scripts can be registered When the A button is clicked on the D Script Editor will appear Enter the D Script s ID No from 00000 to 99999 Enter a wit D Seript Editor Untitled description D A Trigger here Description 5H Timer Duration Displays the jo on 1 Trigger D Script s Show Toolbox vl pet tts area command Formula Functions tool box E Displays Tne pro defined me function commands e of the D DataType Bin F Data Length jem F Codes O Call Script Enter an expression Press HELP for examples Copy Paste Message area ed window OK if Care Onis Hem ID Each D Script program is uniquely identified by an ID number Enter an ID number in the range of 00000 to 99999 Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered here as a description about the D Script you are to create Show Toolbox When checked the tool box appears that contains the Operators Statements and Operands used to create the D Script program Data Type Designates the D Script data format as either Bin or BCD Bit Length Designates the D Script data bit length as either 16 bits or 32 bits Code Please refer to this table when entering negative numeric data LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Zh Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D
169. Guide 3 1 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 2 lt 4 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Create a mark dot pattern on a Mark screen Using the Draw menu Load Mark command you can load the created Mark onto a Base screen Usage Pattern Draw a Mark byturningon off each dot Click on to open a Mark screen Save the Mark Screen New ai screen General description of the Mark screen Editing a Tool Bar DSFICIIDC EE OCS CRCIEOOnEE Mark To iolmiolelnlie ele parma oxa T ml ar Drawing njis z drawing Tool Bar 3 area of 48 x 2 Origin s 48 dots Indicates the P w s This area is size of the D A a composed mark loaded E 2 Of 6 verti onthe base a cal x6 screen 1x1 amp Z x w horizontal 3 blocks z Each block 8 x 8 Displays the dots current cursor a T G8 And LINK ae coordinates based on the origin 0 0 Screen capacity E Drawing Tools The Drawing Tool Bar icons and their corresponding drawing objects are as follo
170. Input File Name Format Error The specified input fle name is different from the fle name created by the editor S pecify the correct fle name name and specify the existing file Appendix 14 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix Error Messages E Simulation Errors ErrorMessage _Cause Solution fle Quitother functions and re execute Cannot write simulation information data The system cannot write the data to the simulation Unable to start simulation information file Check that the simulaton file TAGDATA CSV is not used in other applicatons and that the directory in which EXE exists is notwrite protected Not enough memory Please close other Retry this acton afer closing other actve applications applications Extemal Device Data Filecannotbefound The External Device table file does notexist in the Specified directory The External Device table file is deleted or itis not for the LT S elect the E xternal Device file from the master disk and reinstall the file Simulation start failed The LT does not respond to the simulation start command The LT may be in another mode or data transfer may have failed Check the communication port setings cable connectons LT unitpower supply and then retry the simulation data transfer Simulation data file cannot be found The simulation information fle TAGDATA CSV does not exist in the specified directory Check turn
171. JECT MANAGEMENT E Copying Screens from Other Projects PROCEDURE REMARKS First open the copy designation project 1 Select the Project Manager s Utility menu Screen Copy command To select a screen located in a dif 2 Select the project file to be copied original project ferent folder you must change to file from the screen list or enter the target project that folder name then click on the Den button 1 2 2 Selecting an Existing Project Gp Facto te The currently opened project can LT Soda Ite not be selected clea _ oe pl When you double click on the ae a e Eo project name selected in step 2 Ts you can skip the _ Open __ com External Device Type mand 3 Enter the screen type and screen number of the origi If you select All all screens from nal screen the current project will be copied Those screens corresponding to the specified initial screen number through the final screen number will be copied NF Destination Soda Ibe Factory A Ite l 1 All Start From 3 Screens From M E iT To fe Screen Type Mark Screen image Screen T System Information Jw Filing Data W Data Sampling fe Overmite a Merge i Overmnite a Merge JF Data Loging Settings J O Script Functions a Overmtite a Merge w Global D Script a Dvenaite a Merge 4 8 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJE
172. LS 0200 Writes LS0200 data to D0200 e If loop or break is used as a D script function name an error will occur e break A Important 2 196 Statements i ifi ifi ies Halts loop operation while the loop equation is being executed The break command can be used only in the section of loop LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Operands Address fo fro fen e bit address Enter a bit address e word address Enter a word address e temp temporary work address Here a LT internal Address is specified that can be used with the program There are 90 words from 0000 to 0089 available for Temporary Work Address The Temporary Work Address s initial value is not fixed Constant Operands e Constant Select a constant ote To identify data via the input data s format IN Eg Decimal Hexadecimal A numeric value preceding by 0x gt 0x 100 Octal A numeric value preceding by a zero 0100 A numeric value without leading zeros 100 Calculation examples in hexadecimal and BCD formats Hexadecimal format only Ox270F amp OxFFOO The result is 0x2700 BCD and hexadecimal formats 9999 amp OxFFOO The result is 0x9900 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 197 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Globa
173. LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 15 Appendix 1 Error Messages Appendices sin Data Errors Cause Solution Address Entry limit reached No ene laden Character size is too iarge Please use ajDesignated character is larger than LT fT Cananea tracer Pease seta smalere D Display file data size is over maximum Reduce the size ofthe designated display Paste failed The currentpaste setings range et are notthe same as the paste destnaton Or the paste acton may delete a column or effect another data item s settings Printer file data size is over Reduce the size of the area amount of data to be eee T Time settings cannot exceed 24 hours Please Change the settings so that the tme value is 24 The no of times x no of blocks should be Be sure the number of tmes and number of Appendix 16 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix 2 Troubleshooting wp Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve problems generated when using LT Editor Before you begin troubleshooting please check the following items again If you answer Yes to all the questions start troubleshooting If you answer No to any one of the questions set the required item and then start troubleshooting If the error still occurs after troubleshooting fill the details of the error in the provided trouble report sheet and follow the directio
174. MARKS 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS mec Alarm Import Export The created Alarm data can be exported to and saved as an ALA or CSV file Then by importing the saved alarm data it can be shared among Projects CSV files created via a text editor or Microsoft Excel can be imported and used on the Alarm Editor Alarm data s CSV file formats are as follows Block 0 Reserved 1 Block1 0 Reserved 2 Block 2 0 Reserved 3 Block3 0 Reserved 4 Basic Alarm Message Summary settings Bit Address M0064 Function A in suspension 0 0 T 0 0 0 Message Re served 5 Fg M0065 Function B in suspension a F 1 as lee Har ee M0066 Function C in suspension 2 0 G 0 5 ae sae iad Bik GG Bg Bik Reserved 2to 4 _ 0 fixed Reserved 5 0 fixed Foreground color F9 0 to 7 Message Colors Background color Bg Blink Blk 0 Notblink 1 Blink 2 Notblink 3 Blink 3 12 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing E Alarm Export Alarm data is saved as ALA or CSV files PROCEDURE 1 Select the Alarm Editor s Alarm menu Export command 2 Click on the button Alarm Editor This operation
175. MARKS 1 Here the Keypad Display KD_1 has been set on the For how to create LT screen a Keypad refer to 2 1 11 Placing ID No a Keypad Display 2 When the Keypad Display KD_1 is touched 3 A Pop up Keyboard appears At the same time the When the Keypad display is placed Keypad Display KD_1 s display reverses highlights the Pop up Keyboard will auto and waits for input The square box shown below represents the cursor s po sition matically be set LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide E Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Press the Pop up Keypad s Keys to input the desired value 5 Press the ENT Key to register the value 6 The registered value will then be stored in Word Ad dress D0050 which was designated in KD_1 Then the Pop up Keypad disappears 2 56 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 11 Alarm Display When the External Device s Monitor Bit has been turned ON messages registered in the Alarm Summary by the Alarm Editor can be displayed in a list 5 1 Creating and Editing Alarms Message display order is decided according to which Monitor Bit is in the lowest position in the Alarm Summary display area It is recommended that Monitor Bit assignment begins from the message with the highest priority Be sure to input only one messag
176. Messages E Screen Transfer Errors from previous page a Error Message Cause Solution The Extended Program cannot be found The Extended P rogram required for seting up the LT cannot be found Please check the CFG file s directory Also you may need to change the LT s ype The Extended Program cannot be found in Unable to locate the program s destination LT for the LT The LT s Setup cannot be performed setup Check the LT type setings and the LT type Selected Change the LT type ifneeded The currently selected LT type does not The currently selected LT type does not support support the Simulation feature the Simulation feature This feature cannot be used with the destination LT Deselect this feature and re send the data This LT does not support Extended The destnaton LT does not support Extended Programs The LT s setup cannot be Features Either change the LT Type or send performed data thatis designed for the designated LT type Timeout Error Communication tmeout has occurred Reset the LT and re try data transfer W An error has occurred while reading the data to LT internal memory Re try data transfer If the error occurs again use the LT s selfdiagnosis feature and identify the problem If necessary contactyour local LT distributor E Project Compression and Execution Errors Lo Error Message Cause Solution Disk Error File Error During Read The fle cannot be opened The most probable Cause is corrup
177. NT PROCEDURE 5 Click on the button If the same file name already exists the system asks if the existing file must be overwritten If you select the existing file will be overwritten If you select the existing file will not be overwrit ten and you will return to the previous dialog box Pack Project File File Hame C SLogiT ouch database actory B lke 144MB F ay Pack Tool AN File C SLogiT ouch databaseF actor B OLT already exists Okay to overste this file i Cancel 6 Select the Action menu Exit command or click on the icon REMARKS The compressed project file will be stored in the same folder as the original project file 4 32 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 3 Project Compression Decompression 4 3 2 Decompressing a Project File A compressed project file OLT file cannot be edited To edit the com pressed project file you must first decompress it i UnPack Packed File Enter the file name of the project file to be decompressed or select the desired file name from the list by clicking on the Browse button Used to locate the project file to be decompressed Cancel PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Click on the Windows desktop s Start button Then point to the Programs LogiTouch menu and click on the 4 Pack Tool menu COBESONES Ta Paint Sho
178. Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 141 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 3 11 Rotate Left Rotate Right With this command an object can be rotated in 90 increments However loaded Screens and Marks and grouped objects cannot be rotated E Rotating an Object Counterclockwise Left PROCEDURE 1 Select an object aoe 2 Select the Edit menu Rotate Left command or click on the icon The object will be rotated counterclockwise 90 degrees relative to its center point if necessary repeat the com mand 90 Rotation E Rotating an Object Clockwise Right PROCEDURE 1 Select a desired object ep 2 Select the Edit menu Rotate Right command or click on the icon The object will be rotated clockwise 90 degrees relative to its center point If necessary repeat the command 90 Rotation 2 142 REMARKS 2 3 1 Selecting Objects The center point of the object is where two lines connecting the opposite handles other than the corner handles cross Center To cancel the rotation click on the icon Clicking on the icon one time reverses one 90 degree ro tation If an object is moved outside the drawing area by rotating the object will not be displayed on the LT screen REMARKS 2 3 1 Selecting Objects The center point of the object is where two lines connecting the opposite handles other than the corner hand
179. PREFACE Thank you for purchasing the LogiTouch integrated development software LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 hereafter referred to as the LT Editor Please read this manual carefully in order to use this software properly and be sure to keep this manual handy for future reference 1 The copyrights to all programs and manuals included in the LT Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide hereinafter referred to as this product are reserved by the Digital Electronics Corporation Digital grants the use of this product to its users as described in the Software Operating Conditions documentation included with this product s CD ROM Any actions violating the above mentioned conditions are prohibited by both Japanese and foreign regulations 2 The contents of this manual have been thoroughly inspected How ever if you should find any errors or omissions in this manual please inform your local LT Editor representative of your findings 3 Regardless of article 2 the Digital Electronics Corporation shall not be held responsible for any damages or third party claims resulting from the use of this product 4 Differences may occur between the descriptions found in this manual and the actual functioning of this product Therefore the latest infor mation on this product is provided in data files 1 e Readme txt files etc and in separate documents Please consult these sources as well as this manual prior to
180. RAM the LT internal special relay LS2032 s bit 11 will be turned ON External Device Transfer Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Not Selected Enables disables the Transfer Com pleted Bit setting ID No 0 In this example where only one Filing Name Display is placed the ID No does not need to be entered Keep the default setting When placing two or more Fil ing Name Displays on the currently dis played screen be sure not to use the same ID No for multiple Filing Name Displays File No 1 Enter the previously entered filing data number No of Display Lines 8 No of Display Characters 15 Direct Selection Selected Cursor Position Control Selected LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 23 10 1 Filing Data Recipe 10 24 Cursor Position Control Chapter 10 Advanced Features e Even when the screens are changed on the LT monitor the current File Name Display s cursor position can be retained e Cursor Position Control can be designated when setting up the File Name Display e When turning the LT s main power switch ON or resetting the LT the cursor will appear on the first line e The cursor position will be stored for each ID No The storage area of an ID No and a cursor position are in correspondence with each other To retain the cursor position be sure that the File Name Display ID Nos do not overlap each other on any of the screens For more detai
181. Rebuild ce ececcccccccceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeseeaaaaeeeeeeees 4 12 4 2 3 Converting Addresses and Device Codes nnsssssssseoeoeeeeerssssssssssssssesereerressssssssses 4 15 ak E O Eoas e CC UNS e terse a E E N E 4 17 4 2 5 Symbol Editor cc cccsssssssssssssssseeeccceeceeeeeeeeaeeeaaaaeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeauaasgeeeeses 4 19 420 C hangemng aProject s LI Type sasccrcecsenasstcesdoccisssnasvauncaunnst ae 4 27 4 2 7 Changing Your Project External De Vie Cs icessshsussesdudtrccaclectsecustsusassduldueucddostoecsasendas 4 28 4 3 Project Compression DeCOMPTFesSION ccccccccssssssssssscccccccccsssssssssccosees 4 29 AS ACOMMPPESSING a Project FHG sasore a riacarseetagecsienessaemieeases 4 30 Be Decompressing a Project Filner EE EN 4 33 4 4 Information Display sssssssseeceocccsssssececccosssscecoocosssssccceocsssssscececososssssceeosssssse 4 35 PAN Project TiO tiv OU esserne an iee i a daa a 4 35 4 4 2 Screen Information seeeseeeeesssessssseseesseseeeesrseereeereeererererereeererereererereeererereeseeeeeeseeees 4 37 BAO Veron Or O e E E E E 4 37 14 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Preface CHAPTER 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing so sesccevcesecscccsesccsecessavescuesesevesssercecsescassaessavesorees 5 2 5 1 1 Alarm Editor 21 cct sconccecneterdednecontynceneteacstancadunencdtiossansauedoutesieddaatvaegetanoatandedsneniadsacaeusanc
182. S ieee to 2 048 files can be registered Data Storage Start Address Enter the first Address where the trans ferred filing data is stored Data stor age areas will be saved in series start ing from the Start Address for the num ber of filing data items No of Data Blocks Designate the number of blocks to be registered in one file A maximum of 1 650 blocks can be designated The maximum number will change depend ing on the number of data blocks No of Data Items Designates the number of data items registered in one block A maximum of 9 999 data items can be registered The maximum number will change depend ing on the number of data blocks 4 When a variable Logic Symbol is used as a data storage start TA A address an integer array must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Data Format Select either 16 or 32 bit data Display Format Select a filing data display format Code minus display becomes effective when this check box is checked LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 13 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 14 Import Other file data CSV format can be im ported and used as filing data Export Filing data can be exported and saved in the CSV format lt Output Example using CSV Format gt F iling Data lt lt T F iling CSV data s Heade
183. Screen Creation Guide Preface APPENDIX e Error Messages Lists the error messages causes of the errors and solutions that will be displayed during operation of LT Editor e Troubleshooting Provides information for diagnosis and corrective actions for dealing with errors or abnormal operation e Address Conversion Tables Lists the addresses for each manufacturer s product e Software Trouble Report This 1s a form in which you can write down any trouble you might have with the LT Editor and your LT Editor s operating conditions that can then be sent to us by facsimile If you have any inquires about the LT Editor please use this form LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 Preface PRECAUTIONS E CD ROM Usage Precautions To prevent CD ROM damage or malfunctions please observe the following instructions Do not remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive while the drive s operation lamp is lit Do not touch the CD ROM recording surface Do not place CD ROMs in a place where they may be exposed to extremely high or low temperatures high humidity or dust E Product Usage Precautions To prevent program malfunction or accidents be sure to observe the follow ing instructions AN Touch panel switches should NOT be used for a Warning device s Emergency Stop Switch Generally speak ing all industrial machinery systems must be equipped with a mechanical manually operated
184. Script Data Format Constant Entry Min Value Binl6 Bin32 4294967295 BCD Of 999 BCD32 O 99999999 When a D Script s command follows another D Script s com L mand enter a space between these commands Important For example if the not command follows the and com mand spacing is needed between the commands andnot Incorrect The operation will not be per formed and an error message will display on the software screen and not Correct E Trigger These selections designate the type of trigger used to activate your program The possible options are Timer Bit Rising Bit Falling Expression becomes Non Zero and Expression becomes Zero Timer Settings When the designated time elapses the statements described in the Action area of your program are performed The timer duration can be set from 1 to 32767 seconds The timer restarts its counting when the designated time elapses Trigger FE Timer Duration 7 ON ox ift titer Bit Rising When the LT detects the designated bit change from 0 to 1 the statements described in the Action area are performed Bit Falling When the LT detects the falling edge of the designated bit the statements described in the Action area are performed Bit Dual Operation Trigger When the LT detects the rising or the falling edge of the designated bit the statements described in the Ac
185. Specify the range of the End No Search Screen Search Screens Type on which Load Screens have been called up LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 17 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS Example Load Screens B100 to B105 currently loaded on Base screens B1 to B30 are converted to B200 to B205 1 Via the Project Manager select the Utility menu Convert Load Screens command 2 Specify the type and numbers of the Load Screens to be converted and the Top Screen number of the Load Screens after conversion Base screen Start No 100 End No 105 Top Screen No 200 3 Specify the range of the Search Screens and their type The Load Screen numbers specified in step 2 will be converted and called up on Search Screens specified by the Start and End numbers here Start No 1 End No 30 Base screen 4 After confirming all the settings are correct click on the Conver button 5 Click on the Start button to start conversion The conversion status will continuously be displayed Conversion Status Converted Screens at pe Lt f 6 Click on the Close button to close the dialog Converted Screens j Start BG Completed LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing wee Symbol Edi
186. The entered characters are not case sensitive Line E to 10 word TNODOD2 Line 11 to 5 Word TNOOOOS EEE You can perform the Delete or Copy and Paste commands af ter selecting multiple messages E Important The symbols and the key cannot be used in the Symbol Editor MUM 4 After all the necessary items are registered select the File menu Save command or click on the icon 4 22 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing E Importing Symbols and Device Comments The previously saved Symbol Editor data can be imported to and shared with the currently open Symbol Editor Files with the extension of LBE or CSV can be imported CSV files that have been created via a text editor Microsoft Excel or other applications can be used as symbol or device comment data via the Symbol La Editor after imported Note Logic symbols cannot be imported with the Symbol Editor NG Symbol data and device comment s CSV file formats are as follows lt Symbol Data CSV Format gt GP_SYMBOL Symbol Name Word Address lt Give one line feed between a word address and a bit address gt Symbol Name Bit Address Example GP_SYMBOL Line A 1 to 5 Word D00100 Line A 6 to 10 Word DOO101 gt One line feed Line A 1 to 5 Bit X00100 Line A 6 to 10 Bit X00101 l
187. This is not a symbol file Please choose the The chosen file is nota file that can be used for correct format file symbol import Please choose a file that is this format or modify the chosen fle so that it becomes this format This is not a device comment file Please The chosen file is not a device comment import choose the correct format file fle Please choose a file that is this format or modify the chosen fle so that it becomes this format This symbol name is already registered as a You attempted to change an existing symbol Logic symbol Please choose another name name Be sure that your symbol name used is not one of those designated in the Word Symbol area s Logic Word or Real areas The total number of Logic symbols is over The maximum number of symbols has been 2048 and a Save cannot be performed Please exceeded Afer deletng unneeded symbols delete all unneeded symbols please retry saving the data Some data is incorrect and all data cannotbe The format of CSV data to be imported is incorrect Data in and below the line with the incorrect data will not be imported Check Alarm data CSV format Symbol s number of characters is over Y ou attempted to import a symbol with a name 20 and cannot be imported over 20 characters long Please reduce this name b less than 20 characters s cannot be found or cannot be performed The file s required to perform this action cannot be found P lease re install the applicatio
188. To already exists a prompt will appear asking whether the new name should overwrite the old name When the button is clicked on the new name will overwrite the old one and when the button is clicked on the new name will not overwrite the old one x This DF file already exists Cancel dialog box will reappear File Convert Screen gt DXF J Fr To convert another Base screen DO NOT stop here rather start Omi Project Fie JEALogiTouch database Factow Select again from step 3 To DKF File DXF 1 dlaf Reading Screen H objects Converting 100 3 Writing DSF 894line Cancel N DF gt Screen Screen gt DF LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 241 Memo 2 242 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide lt gt DRAWING APPLICATIONS CREATING and USING SCREENS i T Editor provides various screens for specific purposes for example for creating marks and images in addition to the Base screens which are the fundamental screen used for all drawing modes Other screens can then be loaded onto Base screens as libraries This chapter describes the procedure for creating these screens and their applications o sessesssvaversceeesncoseceune Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Dal E Creating an Image the Image Screen LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation
189. Trend Graph Display data always starts at the O point As each time sampling period elapses the latest data 1s added in the specified display Direction When the graph s poly gonal line reaches the limit of the Trend Graph the graph 1s shifted in the display Direction for the number units specified in Scroll 2 46 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E g Display Direction Right Scroll 4 Enter screen scrolls at this point Jl Jl JB J 5 Do on Begin Display Using Pen Recorder A specified Word Address s data changes are displayed over time in a Trend Graph The data s display always begins with 0 As each sampling period elapses the graph s poly gonal line is shifted one division opposite the specified display Direction The latest data 1s always displayed at the very limit in this example the right side of the Trend Graph s display area E g Display direction Right J J JB J di gt P cT 5 Begin Display Data Samples Data Samples The number of data units to be displayed in a single Trend Graph Up to 638 can be used Scroll The number of data units to be scrolled when the polygonal line reaches the limit of the Trend Graph s display area Sampling Time The data read interval from the host External Device is input in seconds Display
190. Type LogiT ouch Type 4 External Device Type 3 Click on the button to open the selected file E Saving a Project 1 2 From Start to Finish REMARKS To select a project file located in another folder find a desired file from the Look in File location When you double click on the file name selected in step 2 you can skip the command To create a screen refer to 1 2 4 Opening Closing Saving a Screen When the data of an existing project file is changed the changes will be automati cally saved However if you attempt to create a another new project file without first saving your current project file the LT Editor will ask if you wish to save the current file If you click on the button the Save As dialog box will appear 1 2 2 W Saving a Project File under a Different Name 1 8 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide TDF on Sarton Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals E Saving a Project File under a Different Name You can save an existing project file under a different name or with different LT type External Device settings PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Project menu Save As command in the Project Manager 2 The comment LT type and External Device of the The file name can contain up to 255 currently opened project file are displayed characters including the path name Enter the desired file name and enter the items to be and extension
191. Type Rio 3 No Border o H FB Place Cancel Enter a display interval the number of dots 0 to 10 Enter the number of rows for the items dis played 0 to 40 Enter the number of columns for the items displayed 0 to 25 Select a border type of the display area from among three types No Border outer border HH 1 dot lines and outer border plus inner border FAA the outer border and item use 2 dot lines while the inner border uses 1 dot lines Row Specify the number of rows used to display logged data on the LT A maxi mum of 40 rows may be specified LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Column Specify the number of columns used to display logged data on the LT A maximum of 25 columns may be specified Spacing Specify spacing at which to display logged data on the LT A maximum of 10 dots may be specified This entry is only valid when the display area border type is specified as No Border Draw the border line using the drawing tool Sr The gap equivalent to the specified display spacing is provided between the lt Note Cell and the border line The entire cell is filled with the clear color specified NY in the Data Logging Display Color Attributes However the gap is not displayed in the clear color but its background is displayed If No Border is selected to draw an arbitrary border ensure that the bord
192. Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS REMARKS important Any characters entered that are over the limit specified in step 4 will be cut from the LT s display If the text Undefined is not de leted it will be registered and then displayed as a message 2 81 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 7 Click on the point where the Message Display s top left corner is to be placed on the Base Screen If necessary use the Message Display s handles to alter its size after placement The message corresponding to the message number des ignated in the Dialog box is displayed on the Message Display Regardless of whether the Message Display is scaled up or down the character size will not change To change the character size and position directly select a charac ter inside the text box amp Unit Operating 2 1 Parts REMARKS To cancel the placement click on the icon To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down When the Message Display is scaled up larger the message char acters may not be displayed in the correct position In that case use the pull down menu Edit menu s Align command to adjust the position 2 3 10 Align Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s Attribute Settings dialog box Also clicking on the message numbers allows you to view the message s
193. Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the felis icon Oth erwise via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Transfer menu Send command or click on the icon If the currently open Project File has not been prepared for data transfer the Project File has not been compiled then the system automatically compiles the Project File before transferring it to the LT unit To transfer a screen to the LT unit for the first time set up the LT unit first and then transfer the screen data The number of screens transferred is displayed in Trans fer Status If the external device designated in the project file to be transferred is different from the LT s existing internal data the following message will appear When you click on the button the system starts setup opera tion and then transfers the screen data Protocol Download l External Device type is Different OK to Continue Sending All Files After set up is completed the LT panel screen is automati cally switched to the OFF LINE mode Confirm the initial setting on the LT panel and adjust the settings as required REMARKS Make sure that the LT unit is in the Transfer Screen Data mode or RUN mode LogiTouch User s Manual sold separately CHAP TER 6 INITIALIZE When transferring logic programs you must first sel
194. W TO USE THIS MANUAL E Structure of the Manual The LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide is the first in a series of manuals for this product and explains how to use the LT Editor There are three other manuals in the series as well as online help Please refer to Chapter 1 LT EDITOR FUNDAMENTALS for an over view of this product 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help In addition to these manuals data files containing supplemental information on updated functions are also provided To read these additional data files click on the Start button in your Windows OS main screen and select the Programs LogiTouch menu Then click on the Readme selection For detailed information on LT series of operator interfaces please refer to the LogiTouch Series User Manual Separately sold LT Editor Describes the operating procedures for the LT E ditor and Operation Manual all functions exceptfor Logic Program development this manual provided as a PDF file Describes logic program development The manual LT Editor consists of two parts Programming which focuses on the tutorial lesson to help users to learn the operation Included on procedures and Functions which explains the sofware CD Rom Manual setings required for the combination of the LT main unit and the LT Editor provided as a PDF file Programming Describes the LT Editor s pre made P arts and symbols pale tier provided as P DF data
195. Weenie tenures aw streatete gees Wane wneatenate nares tees 2 131 oe Bes Da OTE eee eRe Te RTO TET Mate meme Ren Te eer Tne mT ny meee me Ne CeN TT Ten Tene ye 2 137 DoD DEBE sieer edo sees Sewage vane p ieeenes A EEA snc 2 140 DO PRIMO a E te nveenaaotuanepecenie E eats 2 141 2h Koate Lem Rote RI D rei EE E RE SEa 2 142 2942 Mirror X MIfTOr Y resena onadan aaa ai E TEE Ra 2 143 23 Group Uno TOU D eee EEE 2 144 ZA Bo O r on a end O Ba Koi E E A 2 146 23A Chans ine ADUTE sin fa sles san petrictdadahardegesenaaaetroudedananendeehceveiabessdds vanenimaasneedanetcnays 2 147 2 3 16 Changing COORG INGLES cd aesheteedara st ceuerencomeugssnadcnusnednieniedtadacesssentedaaseedsteadasintesdacnians 2 149 2 3 17 Editing the Node of a Multi segment ANG s iciosssicorsascasineactadoivorasiereettsananensoatunes 2 150 2 ANS Conver Import Bt Map eian e a E AEE ENET 2 151 Deel Transferring a Screen to the Clipboard x rascaccyshoeuecvesearaeeanaces seer senbeonaaaenccate 2 153 2 3 20 Converting a Screen to a Bitmap File ccc cccccccccccceeecceeeeeeaeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 2 154 DoD 2M BRCCIAW SCION E E E E A A E E AE A E EE A E S 2 156 Die ZNO E E A AAEE EEE E A E EEAS 2 157 Pe e E EE EEE E ES E E EE EE E EEEE E E O 2 157 24 Library enis saceecescsces sense secvesc cen ccasensvevescounscensysscvescounccesexsevesecunssexsvseavessounes 2 158 DAN Ae ister rie Library Ci epen e osteo soconeeaaeucsen I E E 2 162 2 4 2 Placing Library WOM S sciscxsdsncccede
196. ZOOS1 SUMIMAL y Tank temperature UP 4 O05e2 2 Select the Edit menu Cut command or click on the EB icon to import alarm data to the Clipboard The selected alarm data will be deleted and stored Bit Address Type tiessece zooo swiletin Tank temperature UP ii ee E Eneee We Po reee eect the insertion line Bit Address Type Tank A amp A temperature UP Tank B temperature UP EE S LIAL y LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS If a message has not been entered Alarm Editor data cannot be saved even if bit addresses have been specified To select several lines drag the mouse between the target lines or click on the target line while holding down thel Shift or key To delete the selected line s per form steps 1 and 2 only 5 5 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the i wii icon to paste alarm data to the destination from the Clipboard If the same number already exists the system asks if each file must be overwritten If you select the desired data will be overwritten If you ele the desired file will not be overwritten and the system will ask the same question for the next alarm If you select Yes to All all existing alarms will be over written If you select Notoal you will return to the
197. a Browser Afer clicking on the error message s OK button selecta browser from the dialog box that appears Invalid Address Before entering the device address check thatthe value is within the allowable range and that the device is supported by the External Device Appendix 2 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix I Error Messages Causation Invalid Extemal Device table The External Device table file format is not the same as the LT s or the file is corrupt for some reason Select an External Device from the master disk and reinstall the file Incorrect Extemal Device Table Format The External Device table file format is not the same as the LT s or the file is corrupt for some reason Select an External Device from the master disk and reinstall the file Non LTE File A file has been selected that is not recognized by LT Editor for Windows 95 Be sure to selectonly P roject lte fles Old Extemal Device table and some functions The External Device table fle from an old version may not work properly is being used Selecta new External Device from Please use latest table the master disk and reinstall it Screen number to copy from must be greater E nter a copy to screen number that is greater than screen number to copy to than the copy from screen number Selected project is the same as current Y ou cannot copy data within the same projectile Be sur
198. a transmitted between the backup SRAM and LS Area will overwrite the existing Block Name and Block data Data transmitted from the External Device to the LS Area overwrites only file data and preserves the Block Name LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 5 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features Backup SRAM LS Area External Device Block Name Block Name _ lt 4 e When a device is used with a 32 Bit system start Address filing data cannot be transmitted to the External Device via the LS Area e Block Name text characters are stored in order of the character input LogiTouch Series User s Manual 6 3 2 Text Data Set tings E Filing Data Transmission Methods Automatic Transmission Filing data is transmitted from the LT to the External Device via a External Device trigger Use the Control Word Address instead of using the Filing Data Display to transfer data between the LT and the External Device LT External Device External Device gt LT LT Internal memory Backup SRAM External _ gt gt le Filing data Device 1 External Device Trigger 10 1 2 Filing Data Setting Control Word Address Filing Data SRAM 2 External Device Trigger 10 1 2 Filing Data Setting Control Word Address SRAM lt gt External Device e When a single folder is used designate the folder number as 1
199. ad Input Display Settings KD _O02 General Settings Display Format Shape Color Description Word Address Enter D00050 Browser 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select If desired select colors from the Shape Color area ing a Part Shape Curren t POE File c propbwinpdb pdb pdb Title KD_3D001 i LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Display Format area specify the Data Dis play Format No of Display Digits and Decimal Places i e number of the digits after the decimal point to be used If desired select the Character Size Keypad Input Display Settings KD_O001 Enter 4 Do not enter anything here i e 0 5 After all of the Keypad Display s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Keypad Display s outline will appear on the Base Screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Keypad Display s top To cancel the placement click on left corner is to be placed the xa 1con If desired use the Keypad Display s handles to alter its SIZe Even though the set value display area is scaled up or To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up l Down down the character size will not change To change the character size or position directly select the charac Double cl
200. adius point b which is of a scale s outer circle 5 Draw another circle inside the circle drawn in step 4 to decide the width of the scale Click on this in ner circle s radius point c 6 Rotate the displayed segment and click on the scale start point d or on its elongation 7 Then rotate the segment again until you reach the When using the keyboard to draw desired end point e and click to designate the end of divisions press the 4 key after the scale s divisions moving the cursor to the division Division lines appear inside the area surrounded with circle s center point to the other the double circles and the two segments They will be point on its circumference radius drawn clockwise from the start point to the end point point and then to the divisions start and end points oy To cancel the drawing click on the E icon Double clicking on any object Q drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set i j j tings r 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 110 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing 2 2 9 Text Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Use your PC s keyboard to enter text and then place in on the screen with your mouse s cursor This software has two methods of placing text on the screen The first method defines the placement point and the second de fines the area where the
201. ais 1 20 1 4 1 Logic Program Editor Item Names and Functions eeseesssseeoonenensnssssssssssssseeeeeee 1 20 LS SNEON e EEEE EE EERE 1 22 1 5 1 Screen Editor Item Names and Functions ssssseeeeesesseseessssssssssssssssssssssssseeeseseees 1 23 oS Torona D e E A Ne ere erry reer nstn 1 25 L32 Display Arao T00 200 ses E 1 25 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help eesscssssssseeeoocsssssseccoccosssssececosossssscecosssssssseee 1 26 LOL Hero Ww sie Help TopOne a 1 27 LOZ Bno te TONS ASG e E E E E 1 29 CHAPTER2 CREATING BASE SCREENS p E a E A E A E T OT 2 2 DM SET SV E ea S E T 2 17 PA WHOM S Ea E EE EEA AAE E E E AEE 2 21 aA Tonci SCC CS ea E S E E E E E 2 24 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 11 Preface 12 2A GUUS peaa E E E E S 2 2 Zell P o OE ee E E E E E 2 14 A o e E E E E E ETET 2 17 Dod F ncton SWitCNeS 2 otacciranidacinnsuatastastadaiseodaaiteieaasshensiaadgestasarheatidaugeiesaidbeaiiaiieeteriones 2 20 AA MAINS reeds sccere cee cactaaseese chy tces oneal aanesetansies axtvtent oabosp oabeanhenssiasaeasuasecgeneteuesseantakers 2 23 DANO ASA RICANS caceasoastesacassaacnstancesaacevene seonsauasecssaniateacsalthauncataes E 2 26 Di Mise EG RIA ea a A E E E 2 31 217 Malf Pie Graphs scesero E a 2 36 AL M e R E E E E A E ecanueeee nebee 2 41 P T TAINS E E T 2 46 DAMA ICY A AUS DIA e A E ATN ET E A AE 2 51 2 1 11 Alarm Display sas cadscsacaceicacwetiacatarcsennvbbeddeauechasadsed
202. ampling data count LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 209 2 6 Data Sampling Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Sampling Channel Setting A General Data Format Sampling 12 Periodic During Trigger 17 Sample Only On Trigger Sampling Time E0 Word Address D00000 Tel E3 Sampling Type The method to import data from the host External Device is specified from the following Periodic Trigger Control and Trigger Sampling Periodic No Trigger The host External Device data is im ported at the setup intervals starting from when the LT is powered up Periodic During Trigger The host External Device data is im ported at the setup intervals The data import start pause and clear commands will be performed according to changes to the corresponding bit in the specified Word Address Sample Only On Trigger The data is sampled at the desired tim ing setup Data import and data clear will be performed according to changes to the corresponding bit in the setup Word Address Sampling Time Specifies the sampling time in sec ond units for the import of host Ex ternal Device data Word Address When Periodic During Trigger option is selected The 00 and O1 bits of the Word Address specified here will control the data im port start pause and clear operations 15 01 00 ok cares Hep 1 Data clear With 0 gt 1 data is clea
203. an be created e D Script operations activated by a trigger after the screen changes are as Trigger Conditions Direct Access Method Memory Link Method CurrentValue or Bit O Bit l FALSE TRUE Bit O Bit L FALSE TRUE i EOM of Px et Timersettings X X X xX X xX xX x Detectingtue TP XP OT Te XT OL Detectingfalse _ O X oO x O Operation is performed right after the screen is changed or the power is turned ON X Operation is not performed right after the screen is changed or the power is turned ON When the timer is operating the timer starts counting right after the screen changes When using Global D Script the operations mentioned above are performed only when the LT s power is turned ON When the LT screen changes however the operation mentioned above will not be performed and the monitor operates using the trigger conditions that have been set When a Global D Script includes a timer the timer starts counting right after the LT s power cord is connected Sr Do not use the touch panel Key to set the trigger bit or to operate the start bit Note ina program because the timing of the touch input may not be correct N resulting in the bit being improperly entered E Limitations Specific to Global D Script When the LT s power is turned ON the actions shown in the table above are performed At the screen change the above table is not applied and the trigger
204. ancsstncnssensstbasauedenieeeadeneossaiaseebesndssasdseedstaianbietedthuses 2 166 DPD Pont Library Meniere a E 2 168 2 44 Saving Libra ies and Quitting lt ssriesiscrieeisiierirriiderncsi iuniou er ninen aai 2 173 23 D Script Global D SCript wrsssissscencinecvsreeseticecssrassesdessesnetbereeeeesesterssireesistniees 2 175 Zev MES CMO Selin S cs chetisadeanusncsidededeswene tauteswaseracataaadaenenaasencsoepunssdesnerssscdboabenadsapension 2 176 25 2 D Script Commands ccs shccsecasateaccnqacnecsessaceesanaseasisasnedteuseiatenssectsuensousuessoasecansensacsacs 2 183 2 5 3 D Script Global D Script Limitations si crccncsecsassssssosnvataateesanestoecevesscunvetaaaiasncantonss 2 198 254 Notes on Operation RESONS wipers srsesanecaricerrecieruseerlenervbienacartwckeeunesuieversbueasarecaeieartent 2 200 239 Loia Oper AiO Examples sneren E E a 2 201 2 5 6 Bit Operation Examples seeesessssssssssssseeerrersssssssssssssssererreeesesessssssssssssssseeeeeeeeo 2 202 2a Condinonal Branches serep en S 2 203 2 5 0 APP OTE ne CL a E E NE 2 204 2w Da Samp E rE EEE E EEE 2 207 LE K S eee RE E E R 2 207 20641 Data Sain UMTS Se sereset a aE 2 207 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques sssececccssssseceeocccssssccceccccsssscccecossssssseeeosso 2 213 De MG SAI e E E E dene arceaea eeasascabousuaaueesseadecieeadeeeoes 2 213 r AGO a E aged aexeamasacanoqasbagennsceceemuentactnesnedais 2 213 Zt sSChcct PRODEILy SeUIMOS E A E E 2 215 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0
205. and to enclose the tioned steps object When the entire object is enclosed within the box release the mouse button handles display on the object to show that it has been selected You must Left dragging over only a part of the position the cursor relative to the object so that when Object will not select it The entire you Left drag over it the entire object will be en Object must be enclosed to select it closed within the box if it is not then the object will not be selected This method is most useful when selecting multiple objects described below When you wish to select another ob ject without de selecting the previ ous one hold down the key a while making the next selection eas eee N This can also be done continually y to select multiple objects Selecting an Object from Overlapped Objects 1 While holding down the key click on an Object to be selected That Object s handles will appear to reveal it has been selected LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 121 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E How to Select Multiple Objects Use this operation to select multiple objects All the objects in a designated area or on the entire screen can be selected Also if necessary some of these objects can be de selected PROCEDURE REMARKS Selecting Multiple Objects by Dragging Left dragging over only a part of an 1 Left drag
206. aph s display direction is fixed to clockwise Axis Divisions The data entered here determines how many pieces a Half Pie Graph is divided into If the number of Axis Divisions is specified as 10 11 division lines are displayed When no divisions are necessary specify the number of divisions as Q E Half Pie Graph Shape Color Attributes Here a Half Pie graph s border color division color Axis Color display data color Graph Color Fg amp Bg and display data pattern are all selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Half Pie Graph Alarm Settings Attributes If desired Alarm settings can be set here 2 1 Parts Setting Alarms 2 38 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Half Pie Graph The procedure for placing a Half Pie Graph is as shown below Data stored in D00102 displays on the Semicircle Graph When data 34 22h is stored in D00102 the Half Pie graph will appear as follows PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Half Pie Graph command or click on the am icon 2 In the General Settings area input the Word Ad dress and Data Format Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings li i Absolute 9 Relative Enter D00102 Select BCD 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser You can also use the Alarm Settings area to en
207. ar Grid Snap Tool Bar Parts Tool Bar Parts State Change Tool Bar i Zoom Box Shows the cursor s current position at three times magnification j Selection Tool Box Used to select objects to be edited Parts and figures Using the commands included in this tool box you can select objects using a variety of methods k Screen Data List Lists the settings and layout conditions of the objects Parts and figures that have been arranged on the screen You can select a desired object from the list COAN 2 7 4 Screen Data List 1 24 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 5 Screen Editor Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals ies Display Area 50 100 200 You can enlarge or reduce the drawing area by selecting a magnification reduction ratio To change the display area select the or icon on the tool bar or select the 50 100 or 200 command from the View menu views Option Draw Parts Bata Sappplingy lisk Parts List laad Sereen List Laad Sereen Hestija Cross Reference List Preview w Screen Data Bor Tool Bar k w Statue Bar w oom Box Zoom out Zoom in Zoom out Used to reduce the current display area to 50 Zoom in Used to enlarge the current display area to 200 Sr In the 50 display mode the created screen data is reduced In this case Note the displayed screen data may be different from the actual data We recom me
208. ary file registered e When registering a new Library item to the currently open Library file e When no Library file is dis played e When registering a Library item to anew Library file e When registering a Library item to a Library file other than the currently open one Up to 200 Library items can be registered in one file 2 162 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items PROCEDURE lt B When no Library file is displayed gt 3 The New dialog box will appear Description When registering a Library item to a new Library file lt C When registering a Library to a new Library file gt s step 5 When registering a Library item to an existing Library file Click on the button lt D When registering a Library item to a Library file other than the currently open one gt s step 4 lt C When registering a Library item to a new Library file gt 3 Click on the button Save Library x Number Cancel x Description mooo 4 Via the Library Browser select the File menu New command or click on the icon 5 Enter a comment and click on the button Description Help 6 Via the Screen Editor select the Library menu Register Library command or click on the Cl icon 7 Enter a Cell Number and Description Save Library Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS REMARKS Enter the file name when th
209. ased With a monochrome Image screen the LT series display speed is slightly lowered but the data volume can be re duced Select a color or monochrome Image screen according to your pur pose If the data volume is too large to be displayed on one screen the converted data will be divided into several screens up to nine screens of 50 Kbytes each Compressed BMP files cannot be converted Make sure that the original image data s longitudinal dimension X for the horizontal type and Y for the vertical type in the figure below is a multiple of for color data or a multiple of 8 for monochrome data Otherwise the fractional data will be deleted from the right edge of the screen after conversion LT e 0 X Horizontal X Horizontal Y Vertica a Y Vertical If the longitudinal dimension of the original image data is less than 4 for color data or less than 8 for monochrome data the image data cannot be converted LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide r 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 24 E Converting Placing a Bitmap Source Specify the bitmap file to be converted The information on the specified bitmap file will be displayed Enter the name of Convert Bitmap to Image Screen s x Used to select the bitmap file to the bitmap file to
210. ation Guide Chapter Breakdown 6 Character Size 2 11 2 52 2 111 Closing a Logic Program 1 11 Closing a Screen 1 16 Colors 2 7 Communication Port 7 5 Communication Settings Menu 6 6 Confirming Addresses 2 148 Connecting to the Home Page 1 30 Conversion between Instructions and Parts 2 131 Convert DXF Size 2 231 2 237 Converting a Bitmap 3 26 Converting a Screen into a Bitmap File 2 155 Converting and Placing a Bitmap 2 151 Converting Data DXF to PRW 2 230 Converting DXF File Data 2 234 Converting Placing a Bit Map 3 24 Converting Placing a Bitmap Source 3 24 Copy from Description 2 10 Copy to Off On state 2 10 Copying a Library Item 2 171 Copying a Part on the Parts List 2 222 Copying a Specified Range Duplication 3 15 Copying an Object 2 129 Copying Screens 4 3 copyrights 1 Cover Page Dialog Box 9 3 Creating a Dot 2 96 Creating a New Library File 2 160 Creating a New Project 1 2 1 5 1 10 Creating Labels 2 10 Creating Editing a Logic Program 1 10 Cross Reference 2 225 Cutting Moving an Object 2 128 Cutting a Library Item from a Library File 2 170 Cutting a Library Item from a Library File and P 2 170 Cutting a Mark 3 12 Qu D Script Settings Copy and Paste 2 182 D Script Tool Box 2 183 Data Display Format 2 51 Data Logging Display Color Attributes 2 69 Data Logging Display Data Type Attributes 2 68 Index 1 index Data Logging Display General Settings Attributes 2 67Ext
211. ation Guide J l 9 1 Print Settings Chapter 9 Printing a Print Settings This section describes the procedure for printing created screens or a list of designated Parts and options available when printing Usage Pattern Project Select the select the data to Manager 2 Print 2 appropriate items be printed from in the dialog box the dialog box Specify the printing Click on the range dependingon gt ak button to the selected function start printing When you select the Project menu Print command the Print screen will be displayed E Printing Print Tab Specify the printer type and other print settings on your personal computer Only Windows compatible printers that can be connected to your personal computer can be used to print with LT Editor for Windows Displays the Displays the printing related printer name Property dialog box If this box is epee ON your checked instead personal com of printinga purer hard copy the Click on this a an as button to display 7 ote a j text file the Cover Page RTF and dialog box can be edited with other text Comments on the editing software data printed can Cover Page Detail Number OF Copies Cover Page Copies be entered to be H Comment Into beat Enter the printed out along number of with the data To copies to be print comments printed the check this box default setting is 1 Click on this but
212. ation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 15 4 2 Project Editing PROCEDURE 4 Select the type of screen to be replaced Address Conversion eave oe ee iA Bit Address Alter Start Address ccc Start Address End Address o000 T Screen Type Screen Range m Base Screen i All m Alarm Message 4 Selection m Sampling Data Eerkens Ry Filing Data Bat Logging Settings J Global D Script m D Script Function Line No 5 Enter the screen number to be changed Enter the line numbers used in the Alarm Editor All the addresses between the initial screen number and the final screen number or the addresses between the initial line number and the final line number will now be changed Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT REMARKS E Important Do not convert addresses on 2 000 screens or more at a Address Conversion Start Address End Address JF Base Screen F Alarm Message m Sampling Data Ja Filing Data M Data Logging Settings J Global O Script m D Script Function time Otherwise the memory capacity might run short af ter this conversion If this memory shortage occurs re start the LT Editor Start Address is Al r Riection Screens From 1 To Line No From To 6 After confirming that all the settings are correct click on the Coret button Address Conversion iA Bit Address Start Address w e End Address joo Screen Type
213. atus transfer operation The tool bar icons provide the following functions Send screen data Cancel l and logic pro Transfer Quit Transfer Tool T h e Send logic Receive screen Transfer Setting program only data from LT unit Do not turn OFF the PC or the LT unit nor disconnect the trans _ fer cable during the transfer of screen data This can cause an important error when the LT is started LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 3 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS IFAD Transfer Settings This section describes the parameter settings necessary for screen data transfer between your personal computer and the LT unit These parameters must be reset if your personal computer has been disconnected from the LT unit if the LT unit has been shut down or if a nonstandard system or proto col program has been used with the LT unit E Transfer Settings Select the Setup menu Transfer Settings command or click on the icon Then a dialog box to perform data transfer settings will appear Specify the kind of information to Select the PC serial transfer with the Transfer Settings x port that will be used screen data Send Information Communications Port with the data transfer T Upload Infomation LOMI m I LT System Screen nae Ibps cable je Cantel Ds __ elect a transfer Transfer Method speed p Send All Screens i Auto
214. ay SC S eencnsina e E 10 44 APPENDICES wl FERVOR VEC SC ACS airiran N E EE EEE ES A 2 A2 Tr oubleshooting 4s cccccassevescecsecascesssesseecsscncesssseaaeecsscneseasuecsecesscoceeassuesctcsvoseessssess A 17 A 3 Address Conversion Tables ssssssssseccecccccccccooosssssssseseceecccososssssssssssssseseeeee A 19 A4 Softw re Trouble ROD OU secesssccsccsceciccescencscssctaxedossecacensceiesvectennssesetaxevesaeeassess A 25 16 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide LED LT EDITOR FUNDAMENTALS f his chapter describes LT Editor basic operations such as how to start and quit the software It also explains the Project Manager and Screen Editor areas which are used for the majority of screen creation work Also a number of tools are introduced here such as online help which provide explanations of LT Editor functions and operations LE aE EEEE E A EEEE Overview DZ ae E From Start to Finish LS r A Project Manager E E E S E Logic Program Editor l Pe E OI OOE E REE A E T Screen Editor LO Saeeeacessavaseceesevecssisccsssecssies LT Editor Manuals and Help LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 1 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 1 Overview 1 2 The LT provides I O control functions and can also be used as an operating panel and a display LT Editor is the LogiTouch integrated development software providing both an LT Logic Programming environment and screen creat
215. ays with the same ID No with be placed on a screen if Cursor Position Cursor Positon Control selected cannot be Control is selected placed on one screen Either deselect Cursor Positon Control or change each filing display ID No so thatthe ID Nos do notoverlap Appendix 4 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix Error Messages E Screen Editor Errors from previous page ErorMessage Cause Solution Grouping Nesting Limit Reached You are attempting to nest grouped objects more Unable to group more than these objects than 10 tmes Only 10 levels of nesting are allowed pt Pee rambo Reeneresceennmnbe from 1 to 8999 Re enter the screen number R fesweere N a Picture Display aa te No used afer conversion is out of the File write error This fle cannot be written to the destnaton media Please check the designated drive name and directory The sum total of all the data saved by the LT The backup size exceeds the SRAM capacity s data backup features now exceeds the Reduce the number of sampling data or set this backup memory unit s limit Please reduce item s backup setting to None this amount The area available for data sampling has been The storage address used exceeds 2031 Set exceeded Storage start address the number ofsampling Please re enter this item s settings data to less than or equal to 2031 The amount entered for the data sampl
216. bar its pull down menu ap pears These menus includes a variety of commands d Status Bar Displays LT and External Devices as well as LT Editor operation related messages 1 18 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 3 Project Manager Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals e Function Buttons These buttons indicate the LT Editor program s main functions e g creating screens alarms printing etc You can start each function by simply click ing on that function s button You can also start these functions by selecting the corresponding command from the Project Manager s pull down menu Creates a new project Selects an existing project Makes initial setting of the LT main unit Monitors the logic program Displays a list Creates a logic of variables program with the Logic Program Editor Creates a screen with the Creates alarms with Screen Editor the Alarm Editor Transmits screen and Quits the LT Editor logic program to the LT LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 19 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 4 Logic Program Editor Logic Program Editor Logic programs are created with the Logic Program Editor The online help provides you with detailed information on the Logic Pro gram Editor Also the Logic Programming Operation Manual explains procedures using tutorials It also explains instructions and settings required f
217. be converted or SOUICE Effects Destination be converted select the bit map Bitmap File file from the file list by clicking on Brow the Browse Source Bitmap button Displays the i f th Displays informa ate ef i tion on data ltmap tile to be colors e g 16 converted colors 256 However this colors image is different from the image that will be displayed on the Displays the size of the bitmap file Displays the dimensions Used to register the above settings to execute the horizontal x bitmap conversion If you save the converted bitmap vertical of the data the Image screen of the screen number specified bitmap data in Screen Setting will be created E Converting Placing a Bitmap Effects Specify the brightness resolution blinking compression and mirror func tions for the converted image data Used to set the brig ht Convert Bitmap to Image Screen s ness and display quality automatically Used to manually Special Effects set the individual options of the brightness and Dithering Dither Method Mirror display quality ta Crude fe Mone i Simple i Vertical Complex Horizontal L Elink Li Compress L Brightness Use Default Effects When you specify Use Default Effects the original data will be automati cally converted into the image data with the optimum brightness and display quality Brightness Used to convert bitmap data according to the brightness level The refer
218. below LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 73 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Decimal Places Here enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point The types of numeric data that can be used with each data format are listed below No of Data Format Code Data Length Display pa Alarm Range ES Places 0 tob 65535 32768 to 32767 0 to 4294967295 yp 2147483648 to 2147483647 14 03 0to999 m 0 to 99999999 bit 14 OtoFFFF 32bit 18 OtoFFFFFFFF Octal l6bitony 16 The relationship between upper and lower position Word Addresses when 32 bit data is used will differ depending on each External Device External Device Connection Manual Character Size The label s Character Size is selected here 2 2 9 Text E Numeric Display Shape Color Attributes Here the Numeric Display area s border color value display color Number color and interior color Plate color are selected 2 1 Selecting Colors E Numeric Display Alarm Settings Attributes If desired specify a variety of Alarm settings 2 1 Setting Alarms 2 74 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Numeric Display The procedure for placing a Numeric Display is shown below Data stored in the specified Word Address is displayed in the designated Numeric Display
219. brary images displayed on the Picture Display one is Bit access and the other is Word access Select either of these Mode When selecting Bit Messages will change according to the specified Bit Address changes 2 88 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Mode When selecting Word Messages will change according to the state changes of the desig nated bits consecutively from the specified Address s 00 bit According to the number of the messages either 2 4 8 or 16 a bit is automatically assigned from the specified Address s 00 bit Numbers of Messages Bits Used When the value set in the No of Messages is 16 bits 00 to 03 are used 03 02 01 The remaining bits can be used for other purposes E Picture Display Library Image Attributes Displays the currently selected Library image Reflects the currently selected item s designated state Browser Picture Display Settings LB_ O01 eneral Settings Library Image Library Erase Color SS 00 When the value set in the No of Messages area is 4 bits 00 and 01 are used When the value set in the No of Messages area is 2 only bit 00 is used When the value set in the No of Messages is 8 bits 00 to 02 are used Calls up the Library Browser Library items can be selected directly from here Deletes the currently selected L
220. cation Settings LT Settings 170 Settings Mode Settings System Setting M Touch Buzzer ltems Screen No Data Type Bini T Screen Level Change Flow Password Settings Standby Mode Time Minutes Change To Screen Mo Com Port Start Up Delay T O Settings LT Settings Factory Bite x Initial Screen Settings l Extended Sethings Communication Settings l LT Settings I O Settings Mode Settings Offline Mode JA Forced Reset Mode Touch Panel Settings F Contrast Adjustment Brightness Adjustment LCD Settings D Reverse Display Touch Input Mode 31 Point Touch fs 2 Point Touch 3 Disable Slide a ee Panel After Backlight 75 Yes 3 No Refresh Aate 6 4 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup Mode Settings LT Settings Factory B Ite x ae ae Operating Environment Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings a l LT Settings ij 1 0 Settings Mode Settings Settings External Device Type OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES System Start Address cooo EA Machine Humber Read Area Size Link Protocol Type Node Setup Mode Number Tystare Dpto Transmission Status Initial Screen Settings LT Settings Factory 6 Ite l LT Settings IO Settings Mode Settings Initial Screen Settings Initial Screen Settings Extended Setti
221. cessing depends on whether the left and right sides are signed or unsigned When a remainder is produced by a division Operation an error may be created due to round up operation E g 9 5 4 e 9 5 4 E Rounded Decimal Places Decimal places resulting from a division are rounded E g e 10 3 3 9 e 10 3 3 10 E Notes on Operating BCD data A BCD data operation which produces overflowing digits does not give the correct result 2 200 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS r gt Logical Operation Examples E Bit Operation Examples 100 gt 99 and 200 lt gt 100 Result ON 100 gt 99 and 200 lt gt 200 Result OFF 100 gt 99 or 200 lt gt 200 Result ON 100 lt 99 or 200 lt gt 200 Result OFF not 100 gt 99 Result OFF not 100 lt 99 Result ON w D200 lt 10 Result True if D200 is smaller than 10 ON not w D200 Result True 1f D200 is 0 ON w D200 2 or w D200 5 Result True if D200 is 2 or 5 ON w D200 lt 5 and w D300 lt 8 Result True 1f D200 is smaller than 5 and D300 is smaller than 8 ON False OFF LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 201 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script yao Bit Operation Examples E This section gives examples of bit operations w D200
222. cient to display the help screen If you jump from one topic to another on the help screen an error message may be displayed When this happens simply quit and then re start help E Searching for a Topic and then Display Help Select the Help Topics command from the Help menu or press the F1 key A list of help topics will be displayed You can search for a topic by either trying to find it from the table of con tents or entering a keyword for that topic Searching for a Topic from the Contents Menu To select a topic from the contents menu double click on the Contents tab Follow the screen instructions to search for a desired topic Help Topics GP PRO PS lor Windows 95 Contents Index Find _ Click opic and shen cics Disp ay Orehek anathe tak suchas Index Proj ck Hanager LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 27 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help 1 28 Searching for a Topic by a Keyword To enter a keyword click on the Index tab Search for a desired topic according to the instruction indicated on the screen When you enter initial characters of the keyword the topics specified with these initial characters are also automatically listed Help Topics GP PRO PBS for Windows 95 Contents 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for Click the indes entry you want and then click Display A
223. ctive on that screen Global D Scripts serve as programs that are effective on all the screens Using D Script you can program separately the trigger used and the action it performs Then when the trigger conditions are satisfied the script is performed The procedures for writing a program with Global D Scripts are the same as those for writing a program with D Scripts Trigger Bit Rising M0050 Bit address M0050 Action W D00100 100 Parts of external device s logic program can be replaced by D Script commands E Overview e To use D Script for all of a project s screens regardless of the current screen select Global D Script To use the D Script only for the currently displayed screen select D Script while creating that screen e D Script allows you to perform Bin BCD display format changes text data changes or other functions all previously performed by the External Device via the LT e Since D Script is a language program debugging can be performed easily e D Script can be programmed as a trigger to sense the leading or falling edge of a bit to activate a timer or to detect true or false of a given condition e There are three elements in a D Script Operators Statements and Oper ands which can be used to program conditions in the External Device e There are four types of commands Drawing Mathematical calculations Boolean operations and Bit operations e Syn
224. cture Display Description Attributes 2 88 Picture Display Library Image Attributes 2 89 Place File Name Display 2 64 Placing a Bit Switch 2 16 Placing a Date Display 2 84 Placing a Keypad Display 2 53 Placing a Message Display 2 80 Placing a Numeric Display 2 75 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 10 15 10 Placing a Part in Position 2 13 16 10 22 Manual Symbols and Terminology 3 Mark Drawing Area Structure 3 4 Placing a Picture Display 2 91 Placing a Time Display 2 87 Placing an Alarm Summary Display Area 2 59 Maximum Number of Automatically Created Part LibraPlacing the Data Logging Display 2 71 2 12 Memory Information 7 17 Menu Bar 1 18 Message Display General Settings Attributes 2 77 Message Display Messages Attributes 2 79 Mirror X Mirror Y 3 18 PLC Type 1 5 Precautions 8 2 PREFACE 1 Preparation 1 3 Print Preview Screen 9 6 Printing Print Tab 9 2 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Index 3 index Printing Project Information Tab 9 4 Selecting an Existing Project 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 11 Printing Screen Tab 9 5 Selecting Colors 2 7 Product Usage Precautions 8 Selecting Line Types 2 94 Programming Functions 1 2 Sending Logic Programs 7 14 Project Manager Areas and Functions 1 18 Setting Bitmap File Name 2 154 Project Manager Errors 2 Setting Screen Property 2 215 Pull Down Menu 1 18 Setting Screen Property Color 2 218 Setting Up Data Sampli
225. d Cancel Password Entry Enter Password To cancel data transfer mode click Ce on the icon 4 After screen data transfer is completed select the Transferring Data and Logic Programs menu Exit command or click on the icon LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 11 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS IRA When Sending Logic Programs You can also send logic programs alone to the LT that has been already set up Logic programs can be transferred from the Logic Program Editor as well 7 2 7 Sending Logic Programs with the Logic Program Editor 7 Before sending logic programs alone be sure to select the All Send command Important 7 2 4 When Sending Screens and Logic Programs Together To the LT PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu The LT unit must be set to Screen Ta Transfer mode or Running mode Transfer command or click on the icon Oth LogiTouch Series erwise via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu User s Manual optionally avail Transfer command or click on the icon able Chapter 6 Initial Settings 2 Select the Only Control Send command or click 7 2 2 Passwords on the icon If you enter an incorrect password If a password has been registered enter the password three times or more data transfer can not be performed In this case r
226. d one not using and one using the Centering function lt When Centering function is NOT used gt 4 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on any desired point After clicking on a point in the drawing area a text box When using your PC s keyboard the size of the selected character will appear on the screen to enter text press the hel key to The top left corner of the text box is the base point used for positioning LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 115 designate a position Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Move the cursor to the desired position and left click To cancel the placement click on the mouse to place it on the screen the TEN Double clicking on any object Operation Screen drawn on the screen automatically a calls up that object s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing lt When the Centering function IS used gt Attributes 4 Move the cursor over the desired placement area and while holding down the key click on any desired point After clicking on a point in the drawing area the text box will appear on the screen in dotted line 5 Select a centering area that is the same size or larger To cancel the designated area click than the previously selected text area the right mouse button The designated size s text box will appear in the center of the selected area V7 Operation Screen 2 114 Logilouch Edit
227. ddresses needs to be allocated LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 257 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts No of Monitor Words Here the number of words a Monitor Bit is assigned and entered Up to 100 words can be monitored E Alarm Summary Display Format Attributes Alarm Summary Settings AL_001 Desig nates the No Designates from General Settings Display Format Style Color of Lines of a which existing message that can error message Display Start Line JM be displayed on will the display No of Display Lines 2 one screen begin No of Display Char 40 Designates the maximum No of Characters per me Display Start Line Among the messages whose Monitor Bit is turned ON the Start Line desig Br nates from which message the display starts Note When the Alarm Summary display cannot fit in a single screen only one 2 Alarm Summary display can be placed on a screen When the number of messages to be displayed does not fit on one screen create Alarm Summary displays on multiple screens so that the screens will switch to display all the messages To display all error messages continuously specify each screen s Start Line as follows The first screen The starting line The second screen The number of display lines on the first screen 1 The nth screen The number of display lines on any screen x n 1 1 No of Display Line
228. display status 2 3 15 Changing Attributes ote Changing the state via the Parts State Change Tool Bar after placing a Part X allows you to check each state s Library display condition Every time a part s screen is opened the Part s state will be reset to 0 If a state which has not been defined is designated the Message Display may show nothing For example when the number of messages is 16 and only states 0 to 3 actually have a message registered designating states 4 to 15 displays only message frames 2 82 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Yami Date Displays Date display data is created using the LT s internal calendar and formatted as February 11th 2001 or 01 02 11 however the date format can be changed E Date Display General Settings Attributes Enter Comment data here The currently se lected Part s image is displayed here Calls up the Part Shape Browser Parts can be se Date Dispaly Settings DD_OO1 Select the Data Format General Settings Description Character Size Co Je F Border Color A o m A Elk L Text Color i a L a a e ol Plate Color IE _ i E ol Select the Border frame Text and Plate Browser lected directly from Pe J cres background the Browser Data Format colors The following display formats are available
229. displayed on the Trend Graph When the data range is from 100 to 100 check the Display Mode check box 2 1 Parts Se lecting a Part Shape LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 49 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Graph Settings area select the Graph Type and Direction and enter the number of Data Samples and Axis Divisions Select Normal Trend Graph Settings TR_OG1 eet E az Enter 20 Genera ettings Graph Settings i Normal 3 Pen Recorder E nter 1 9 Display Direction E ata 5 arp les a Up Data samples 20 7 oe sea Enter 10 MH ae Sampling Time e ee tre MEE Scale Y Ass Divisions fo Se E nter 1 0 ns Divisions rs Enter 10 Select Right 5 In the Channel Setting area enter the Number of If the more than one channel is Channels then enter each channel s Word Address used be sure to enter the Word and select the desired colors Address and select the Color for In this example since the Number of the Channels is each channel before placement 1 you only need to enter one Word Address Trend Graph Settings TR_001 l General Settings Graph Settings Important Channel Settings ShaperColor Alarm Settings Enter D00102 A Trend Graph s channel E Bee TE Word Addresses should not eS e a be the same as other Part ad dresses otherwise it will Fo MN T E cause a LT error
230. dited screen With this list you can check the setting attributes of a screen to be loaded and also can change its loading location Usage Pattern When editing or deleting Load Screen Select a screen Edit or List tobeloaded gt Delete View gt General Load Screen Summary List Lists all the screens loaded on the currently open screen Select the desired screen to show its setting attributes Load Screen List B D Changes Load Click on to close Screen List the Load Screen Settings List screen Po Scr Positions Position Title HF Edit Pressing the Esc Pes ea key will also close the screen Deletes a Load Screen List E Editing via the Load Screen List Screen settings can be changed using the Load Screen List Clicking on the left most number of a screen to be changed will select highlight it Then clicking on the Edit button will bring up the Load Screen dialog box or the currently called up screen allowing you to edit the screen The procedure for calling up and then editing a screen varies de pending on the settings in the Load Screen Double Click 2 7 2 Screen Property Settings Display Settings Any coordinate setting can be changed directly via the Load Screen List 2 228 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques E Deleting from the Load Screen List Screens can be deleted fro
231. dles other than the corner handles cross 7 Center Point Line 2 Select the Edit menu Mirror Y axis command or click on the M icon The object will moves symmetrically around the Y axis If an object is moved outside of the drawin b l l g area by using the Mirror Y function the overflowing part of the object will not be displayed on the LT screen To cancel the change click on the lal icon LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 143 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing yee Group Ungroup This function can be used to group multiple objects enabling you to manipulate the group as a single object even after changing screens or using a different editing function E Grouping Objects PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the objects to be Grouped 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Group command or click To cancel the Grouping click on the on the 3 icon icon Ge te When a Load Screen is included in a group its handles appear as _ so that NY the objects cannot be scaled up down Thus you must first ungroup the objects in order to scale any individual object When a Part is included in a group double click on the group to bring up the Confirm Device Address dialog box where address changes can be made 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 144 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creati
232. e When the icon is clicked on or the pull down File menu s Select File command is selected the Library file list will appear By selecting dragging the desired Library file from this list other Library files can be called up Library files for GP PRO PBIII for Windows Digital Electronics Corpora tion CPW file cannot be used Library files for GP PRO PBIII for Windows Digital Electronics Corpora tion CPW file cannot be used Shows the currently displayed file s folder Op5 objc cp OpS objd cpw Lists all the il files in the currently flenme J Files of type Windows Library Files cpw bg Cancel di Displays the currently selected Currently selected file s Description data if any file s name if Currently selected files desired can be format type entered LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Modifying Library File Names Titles Library filenames can also be changed Simply select a library from the file list then select Property from the Edit menu and the Property screen will appear Type in the filename title that you wish to use and click on OK Description Sstabe SW word Cancel E Displaying the Browser at the Top of the Normal Screen If the Always on Top option is selected from the Window menu when ever the Library Browser is called up it will be placed at the
233. e or select the screen type and enter the screen number Stred screen number in step 3 you can skip the operation of the When checking the Preview check box the selected button screen image can be viewed in the dialog box wees If you enter a screen number that Project File Factory 4 Ike has not been registered 1n the list a Screen B new screen will be opened and that number will be assigned to it Ch i When selecting multiple screens a en screen with the smallest screen elete number of them will be displayed Screen Type Base Screen F di Open Screen Project File Factory A Ite Screen B Jz dt Preview Check Box LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 13 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Click on the button to open the screen The selected screen will open IE Drawing Board Factory A Screen Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Library Window Help JO em pojalaa gt wlio smele aaaso IA OObCam a eB 8 low B13 Switch 17 JZ Pats i 7 i We z E Changs city l 7 Link Select O 4 110 Hoa ROCHE OLADI ue 14 legit s b pa 249 63 17004 Ready a FREQROL roo Up to twenty screens can be open at the same time Note To select several screens simultaneously while pressing the key click on a A screen and drag the
234. e Library file is saved 2 4 4 Saving Li braries and Quitting Saving a Library File Under Another Name A comment of up to 60 characters can be entered Enter a description up to 60 char acters Enter the file name when the Li brary file is saved 2 4 4 Saving Li braries and Quitting Saving a Library File Under Another Name LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 163 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items PROCEDURE REMARKS 8 Click on the button A maximum of 200 Library items The newly registered Library item will appear in the Can be registered in each Library Browser file Cut 7 cpw production Ele Edt view Window Hep After creating a new Library item a if you attempt to create or select another Library file without first saving the item via the Save As function a prompt will appear asking whether the newly created Library item should be saved or not TP na lt D When registering a Library item to a Li For the proce brary file other than the currently open one gt dures for saving a Library item re fer to 2 4 4 Saving Libraries and 3 Click on the button Quitting Save Library x Cell Number Cancel a Description nied 4 Via the Library Browser select the File menu Se lect File command or click on the icon 5 Select the desired Library file from the list or input 2 4 Libraries W the Library fi
235. e View menu s Preview selection Preview B1 Saitch 1 Select the type of display used 2 7 4 Screen Data List The currently displayed screen s object locations and setting attributes are listed in the Screen Data List E Screen Data List An example of the Screen Data List is shown below ES Screen Data Displays the object placed on the currently displayed screen Designates the type of the object to be displayed in the Screen Data as w ECI List Deletes the object selected from the Edits the object selected from the Screen Data List Change Att Link Select EH Change Order pe Screen Data List Highlights an Changes the order object selected on of drawing objects the screen LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 219 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Screen Data Display The designated type of object s data is displayed If a grouped object contains at least one object whose type has been designated it is displayed as an grouped object The Screen Data List displays the following information Drawing 008 Type and coordinates of a drawing object PRU EET ID Number and Address Grouped object Grouped object s coordinates and each grouped object s information as Note D Scripts are displayed all the time Each D Script shows ID and description 2 information E S
236. e 5 2 IL Wea AM A e E 5 4 sA TS Pa D eai EAEE 5 5 314 Alam Import Epor secossa aa a aa a aeaea 5 12 CHAPTER 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup scceeseccecdsyessessecuscevesecoseusssesserseuesevecesessersewsesesuess 6 2 CHAPTER 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS Tel Prior to Transferring DAU sj cencesssecescvssceccevesesesiessseedevssecesterseeccevesssestxisesessvssess 7 2 Thl LI Scrcen Transter Ale sensisse io anpe Eae E nEn 7 2 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs ssscsssssseeecccccssssceccoocossssccecoosossoo 7 3 Te T E Sa E E cvessaanintecnanansnencuteses 7 4 Di NAS SOS cece eed ee een T a eared ean ess eta se Seen eas etapa 7 7 Teo Tn TPC al Al OM a A yaadsacw ste tinea E E E 7 9 7 2 4 When Sending Screens and Logic Programs Together To the LT 0 7 10 Teles Whersending Losie Programs sc crire ches cee reeds deve siesavaresdecctestestacencs dane sacsamsenarcernstosetnes 7 12 doi When Receiving Data From the tl sc ctcsstcncsiussensteuidsasiantascedasetsecssestensteuddentiaaiaeasses 7 13 7 2 7 Sending Programs with the Logic Program Editor ccccccccccsssseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 7 14 od ODON S eeaeee EEEN NE EE EEEE EEE 7 16 Tock EA Internal Screen Data Information 3g rcdecscs dncecccocuseavsecus essneenssaooseesmeocenegenesaners 7 16 Dal OVEN OW aa 8 2 8 1 1 General Description of the Simulation Screen nsssssosoooeeeeesssssssssssseeterrresssssssssee 8 3 s12 Ha
237. e desired Library Item s Library file and se In order to call up a Library item lect the Library item from the Browser from a Library file different than the currently displayed Library file A 100 switch click on the icon 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files 2 Via the Library Browser select the Edit menu Copy command or click on the icon The Library item will be copied to the Clipboard 3 Open the destination Library file and select the Edit To register the Library item to anew menu Paste command or click on the Library Library file click on the icon Browser s icon To register the Library item to a Li brary file different than the current one click on the icon to call up a list of Library files 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 171 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items PROCEDURE REMARKS Hereafter steps are the same as Library Item Registra tion 4 Input the Item s Cell Number and Description In the Register Number area the smallest of the currently open Library file s unused numbers will be automatically displayed To change it enter the desired number Save Library Cell Number cy 2 Description shy 5 Click on the button to register the Item The registered Item will appear in the Browser Gall cpw production Fille Edit View Window Help ae
238. e end one time and that data logging will continue Logging Data 1 Using loop operation each logging Block Logging Data 2 data item also uses from 1 to 32 Single Logging Data 3 words Logging Data n e After the External Device detects the File Full Bit s turning ON turn the Bit OFF important When the Data Clear Bit Address turns ON from the External Device the LT clears logging data and repeats data logging from the beginning When logging data is cleared the LT turns the Data Clear Bit Address OFF 10 30 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging ye Logging Data Read Timing R re e All the charts shown above are the basic image of LT s logging data read XA timing They do not show the exact time intervals of logging data read e If a communication error occurs during logging data read is displayed on the Logging Display representing that there is no data E When designating a Bit Address Logging data is read only one time for each trigger When designating a Bit logging data is read out if the External Device Trigger Bit has been turned ON when the main power is turned ON Trigger BitAddress External Device to LT Pa s LT ACK BitAddress LT to External Device Data Read Logging data read External Device to LT 1 Data is set to the External Device Word Address 2 The External Device Trigger Bit
239. e is added to the subse quent screen number 2 and 5 which is then changed to 14 and 17 4 6 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 1 Screen Editing mera Copying Screens from Other Projects Screens created in any project file other than the currently open one and La other settings can be copied to the currently open screen Note To copy a logic program from other project files import a logic program file as wll with the Logic Program Editor Logic Programming Operation Manual E Specifying Items to Be Copied After selecting a project file as the copying source specify the items you want to copy such as the screen area to be copied and other settings and a copying method Screen Copy x Destination Source Specify the screen Dauh fs All AEA IODE copied 9 Screens Ponh E Specify the start from the project file E w J screen number in at the copying ae i Source Seren Type the project file at the i zl i copying destination A Internal Settings The specified data will be copied to this Internal Settings A stem Information Filing Data Specify the settings on ea eae les and subsequent other than the fa Overwite a Merge J Data Loging Settings screens screen to be copied J D Script Functions fs Ovenwite a Merge w Global D Script ie Overnwite 3 Merge from the pr
240. e is re ferred that grouped object will not be converted ATTRIB attribute ATTRIB attribute data is part of INSERT data Attribute data will be converted in the same manner as TEXT conversion LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2723 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS POLYLINE polyline donut shaped oval polygon rectangle ePOLYLINE data will be converted connecting the following VERTEX s coordinates with a continuous straight line Only data whose polyline flag is either 0 default 1 closed polyline 2 adding the fit curve ver tex or 4 adding the spline curve vertex will be converted When the number of vertices exceeds 100 data will be divided every 100 vertices and converted When the converted data s coordinates are repeated at the same point the following coordinates will be omitted When a polyline has curved sections they will not be converted There fore donut shaped lines and curved polylines will be converted into con tinuous straight lines connecting each coordinate point VERTEX Top coordinates of a polyline e A polyline s width will not be converted E Converting DXF File Data to Base Screen Data PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down menu Utility s Convert DXF command 2 Click on the 0 gt PRw button Mk DXF lt gt Screen Converter x DF Screen Screen gt D
241. e per line The characters of a message that exceed one line will be truncated The number of the characters that can be displayed in one line will vary depending on the character size and LT type When the size is 1 x 1 the maximum number of characters that can be displayed per line for each LT model is 40 single byte characters E Alarm Summary General Settings Attributes Enter the start Alarm Summary Settings AL_001 address for Enter Comment General Settings Display Format Style Color each data here Description Word Address message s Monitor Bit Select the display 2 No Border No of Monitor words Enter the area border 5 C ALRBErOI frame ta H Words allo cated for a Monitor Bit Border Type The display area frame types are No Border Outside and Outside Inside Word Address E Important The Monitor Bit s first address for the messages specified by the Alarm Editor is input Input this address in word units E g How to designate a Word Address using an external device THERMAC NEO Series Omron When designating the Word Address for the input output or internal relay the Word Address is designated from the Least Significant Bit TT 4 TT 01 C0000031 to 01 CO000000 lt High Low gt LSB In this case 01 C00000000 is designated When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address an integer array must be designated For an integer array a size required for consecutive a
242. e to specify a project file other than the Current projectile System error The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened and read or the file s data is not correct The file may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file System file is corrupt The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened and read or the file s data is not correct The file may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file System open error The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened and read or the file s data is not correct The file may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file System write error The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened and read or the file s data is not correct The file may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file Unable to convert file Please check disk The destination disk does nothave sufficientiree Space Prepare a disk thathas sufficientspace and re try Unable to read current project information The projectile is corrupt Use the LT Editor rebuilding tool to repair the file and then read the file again Unrecognizable Bitmap The selected bitmap file is either corrupted or File may be corrupted unusable by this software LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide App
243. e values in a Half Pie graph The graph s display will also change to reflect Word Address data changes E Half Pie Graph General Settings Attributes lt When displaying the data in absolute values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter comment Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 data here 3 Enter the General Settings Graph Settings Alarm Settings Description ae Word Ad The currently dress to selected Half Pie Graph s image appears here store graph data T Select the Calls up the Part ae desired Data Shape Browser Format Parts can be selected directly from the Browser Absolute Data stored in the designated Word Address is displayed as absolute values from 0 to 100 with Display Mode selected 100 to 100 Word Address Enter the Word Address where the data will be stored Data Format Select the display data format from Bin and BCD Display Mode When this check box is checked and Bin data format is selected nega tive numeric data can be displayed 2 36 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS lt When displaying the data in relative values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter comment Enter the data here Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 Word Ad Graph Settings Shape Color Alani Settings dress used to Bscription solute The currently store g
244. each problem Error message details This area is for Pro face use only Processed by Received by Appendix 26 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide index INDEX Adding Alarm Data 5 9 Address Conversion Table List 19 Address Increment 2 137 Address Map Display 2 226 Address Range Conversion 2 148 Address Registration 8 6 Alarm Style Color Attributes 2 58 Alarm Color 2 9 Alarm Export 5 13 Alarm Import 5 14 Alarm Message Summary Screen 5 3 Alarm Range 2 9 Alarm Settings 2 9 Alarm Summary Description Attributes 2 57 Alarm Summary Display Format Attributes 2 58 Alarm Type 2 9 Aligning Object Positions 2 141 Alignment Justification 2 11 Automatic Filing Data Transmission 10 12 Automatically create file name 2 154 aving a Library File 2 173 Bit Switch General Settings Attributes 2 14 Bit Switch Shape Color Attributes 2 15 Blink 2 8 Browsing Help Topics 1 27 Calling up Device Comments 4 26 Calling up Help from a Dialog Box 1 28 Canceling a Command Undo 3 21 Canceling an Action 2 157 CD ROM 1 CD ROM Usage Precautions 8 Change Order 2 220 Changing Alarm Attributes 5 10 Changing Attributes 2 147 Changing Display Addresses 2 227 Changing Screen Numbers and Titles 4 5 Changing the Data Sampling Setting Order 2 224 Changing the Library s Display 2 159 Changing the Order of Overlapping Objects 2 146 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Cre
245. each state Function fel Bit Set i Bit Reset pa Momentary 7 Bit Invert im Interlock LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS After entering the Bit Address if you attempt to perform another area s operation before entering the Monitor Bit s address data the dialog box shown below will appear Clicking on the button automatically inputs the Bit Address s data into the Monitor Bit Address To enter a different address click on the button and input the desired ad dress Function Do vou want to use the same Bit Address for the Monitor Bit Address The Bit Switch functions are as follows Bit Set Bit Reset Momentary Bit Invert Interlock When the Bit Switch is pressed the External Device s designated Bit Address is turned ON This state continues i e remains ON even after the switch is released When the Bit Switch is pressed the External Device s designated Bit Address is turned OFF This state contin ues i e remains OFF even after the switch is released Only while the Bit Switch is pressed and held is the specified External Device Bit Address turned ON Thus when the switch is released the specified Bit Address is turned OFF Every time the Bit Switch is pressed the External Device s designated Bit Address state is changed from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON Only when a bit designa
246. ebuild The Rebuild tool is used to both check the contents of the LTE files CPW files and MRK files created with LT Editor as well as to rebuild these files if they are damaged In the following cases use the Rebuild command to restore file data l Nn B W N Your personal computer is either reset or shut down while you are saving data The system crashed while you were saving data Your floppy disk or hard disk is damaged Your personal computer s disk drive is defective A system error an error not specified in the error message list such as a partition or checksum error occurs while a screen is being opened or transferred The desired project file does not display as a LTE file during project selection or an existing screen s number is not displayed when you try to open that screen You cannot select a project file when you try to perform the Select Project command i e the LT Editor program cannot recognize the project file as a LTE file Parts placed on the LT Editor program screen cannot be displayed on the LT unit or a different screen than desired is displayed on the LT unit i e the relationship between the screen data and Parts data is not correct When you try to open a file an error message appears indicating that the file is damaged If this error message is displayed LT Editor program cannot read the target file until this file is rebuilt If a f
247. ect Control Data in the Transfer Settings dialog box 7 2 1 Transfer Settings To cancel the data transfer mode click on the icon Data transfer mode will automati cally quit when the LT unit s inter nal memory capacity becomes in sufficient LT setup means to download the system program and protocol program from LT Edi tor to the LT unit so that the LT unit can operate in the specified environment LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 After screen data transfer is completed select the Transfer menu Exit command or click on the icon E Transferring a Screen Using a Password If a password has been registered you must enter it to transfer data to the LT unit PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon icon 2 Select the Transfer menu Send command or click If you enter an incorrect password on the 43 icon three times or more data transfer can not be performed In this case repeat the transfer procedure from step 2 3 Enter the registered password and click on the l button to confirm it Invalid Password The data transfer operation will start Please Retype passwor
248. ect The data created in the temporary file cannot be read correctly Check that the disk has sufficient free Space and itis notcorrupt and retry file transfer Simulation data file cannot be found The CSV file is not stored in the directory as the execution file The simulation information file may be deleted or the fle may have not been created Set the simulation feature when transferring the screen and retry data transfer Simulation data file read in error The CSV file cannot be read into the system The Simulation information fle may have been deleted or the file may have not been created Set the Simulation feature when transferring the screen and retry data transfer The IP Address of the system screen being The IP address currently being sent is diferent sent and that in the LT are not the same To from the address designated in the LT s system send all screens press Yes No to send setings only screen data To change the IP address click on Yes to However if 2 Way Driver has been preserve the IP address click on No You can designated as the destination sending thejeither send the screen data or select Cancel LT s System Setting data will not changejand then change the current project data s IP overwrite the IP address address so thatitmatches thatofthe LT s Appendix 10 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix Error
249. ed Mode equation break lt Stated when escaping from the loop halfway can be omitted endloop lt Stated at the end of the loop e Only a temporary Word Address can be entered in the paren theses e g loop t 000 e loop cannot be used for a trigger equation 2 194 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e The temporary Word Address value used to designate the number of loops will decrease every time loop operation is performed When the value changes to 0 the loop s operation is finished If the temporary Word Address value designated for the number of loops is modified the loop will become endless Also the temporary Word Address used is desig nated as Global Therefore simultaneously using this tempo rary Word Address for another item means the loop s opera tion may be performed forever e Until loop operation finishes screen displays of Parts etc will not be updated refreshed e Only a temporary Word Address can be designated as the storage area for the number of loops value e The range available for the temporary Word Address value will differ depending on the data format Bin BCD bit length and code used e loop can also be nested When it is nested the inner most loop will be skipped via the break command loop t 0000 loop 1 loop t 0001
250. ed position DAZ Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen PROCEDURE 3 Select the mark screen destination to which the se lected Mark screen will be pasted 4 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Data of the Mark screen will be pasted M Untitled2 ili M1 valve o x LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Copying a Screen The selected screen data are copied in the clipboard Unlike the Cut com mand the original screen data will not be deleted To copy a Mark into the original screen use the Duplicate command Important PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the original Mark screen to be copied This description assumes that several screens have al ready been opened X 2 Select the Edit menu Copy command or click on the icon to store the mark in the Clipboard 3 Select the Mark screen destination to which the se lected Mark screen will be copied 4 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Data will be copied from the original Mark screen and pasted onto the
251. ee ENS Format Shape Browser 7 Parts can be Specifies the selected directly a Input from the nii Di ode Browser Specifies the data s Specifies the data effective Bit Length Input Range Relative According to the Input Range designated for the Word Address Data the data is converted and displayed as relative values Word Address Here enter the Word Address used to store Pie Graph data Display Mode When this check box w checked negative numeric data can also be dis played Bit Length Specifies the Bit Length of all data stored in the Word Address Input Range Specifies the data s Input Range Input Code With No Code selected only positive numeric data can be entered To enter negative numeric data select either 2 s Complement or MSB LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Pie Graph Graph Settings Attributes Pie Graph Settings FI_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Enter the Select the Pie o graph s Graph s data Display Direction Anis nies number of display Ckws From Bottom divisions Direction Display Here the graph s data display start point either Clkws From Top or Clkws From Bottom can be selected Zr If Display Direction is changed for a 3D part its shade is rotated along with Note that part To let the shade displayed pro
252. een will appear E General The General page provides information about the current channel settings for the Trend Graph Display Channel Setting Channel Name General Data Format Sampling Must be no more than five Single byte Tag Name o or two Double byte characters long and Description DoS E composed of letters and or symbols Sampling Address 0000 Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a descrip Trigger Bit Address OOOOO0 Top Write Address o020 tion E Data Format Sampling Address Data Format Sampling Designates the Word Address to be Sampling Address es Dogo ia aaan sampled Trigger Bit Address eM fxoooo FE Trigger Bit Address When the bit address stored here turns ON the sampled data will be stored into the LS Area Top Write Address Specifies the LS Area s data storage start address LSOOOO to LSOOI9 can not be used since they are the system area The Start address Sampling data count 1 must not exceed LS2031 No of Sampl Addr Designates the number of sampled data items to be stored Top Write Address eeoa Ir No of Sampl Addr 1 ir El Sethian lade ok Cancel Hep When a variable Logic Symbol is used as a Top Write Address igportant an integer array must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated
253. electing an Object The object selected from the list will be displayed with handles i e se lected in the Screen Editor To select multiple objects from the list Left drag them or hold the or key down and click on desired ones Link Select Normally when any object is selected with the Screen Editor it will not be displayed on the list If the check box for Link Select is marked an object selected with the Screen Editor will also be selected highlighted on the list E Editing an Object To edit an object select it from the list and click on the button or simply double click on the object If the object 1s D Script D Script Editor will be actuated Clicking on the button deletes the selected object Change Order Objects are displayed on the list in the order where they have been drawn If the order of objects on the list is changed the overlapping order of drawn objects and the executing order of Parts can also be changed Copying Any object on the list can be copied by pressing the C key or pasted by pressing the V keys Multiple objects can be copied at a time by selecting them 2 220 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques 2 7 5 Part Reference List The settings for each Part placed on the currently edited screen are listed here for each Part type Part settings can also be changed on the Part Refer
254. ely you can also transfer the data stored in the LT unit back to the LT Editor This chapter describes how to transfer data to and from the LT unit UM E A E Prior to Transferring Data e E N Transferring Data and Logic Programs pA E E N A A E A A Options LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 1 7 1 Prior to Transferring Data Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS fam Prior to Transferring Data LT Screen Transfer Cable 7 1 1 You must first connect the Data Transfer Cable to the LT unit and your personal computer before you can transfer screen data Personal Computer PC or Lap top Screen transfer cable Dsub 9 pin socket To LT s Tool Connector To transfer LT Editor data to the LT unit the optional screen transfer cable GPW CBO2 is required This cable does not Important Come with any interface conversion adapter for the personal computer Supply a connector conversion adapter compatible with the interface of your personal computer Gx te Use a pin adapter that fits your personal computer s serial port e If a serial mouse is used be sure to connect the cable from the LT unit to a different serial port on your PC T2 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs 1 Transferring Data and Logic Programs This section describes how
255. en data it may go beyond the Base screen s display area LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion e After DXF file data is converted into Base screen data the DXF file name is used as the Base screen s description e When a layer s attribute has been turned OFF that layer s data will not be converted and only ON layer data will be converted into Base screen data e Fill and Oval Arc data cannot be converted E Option DXF Screen Here select and enter the color and size used when converting data Ac cording to the specified DXF and Base screen size data will be relatively magnified or minimized when converted DXF size Selects a DXF file size Convert Color i peee Data 1S converted ie eres Convert OF Size colored i Use LIMMIN LIMMA i Use EXTMIN ETMA Convert Screen Size Screen Size i 640x480 5 640x400 y 9 320240 i 800x600 Designates the screen size used after conversion Convert Color When this box is checked DXF file data is converted as colored When this box is not checked DXF file data is converted as monochrome E Color Conversion DXF Screen Convert DXF Size The DXF file data conversion range is selected When Use LIMMIN LIMMAX is selected data in the DXF file s maximum screen area X Y coordinate screen boundaries will be conv
256. ence value can be changed between levels 0 and 15 A larger value indicates a brighter image and a smaller value indicates a darker image Dithering Used to set the converted data s display quality LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 32 Creating an Image the Image Screen Blink Used to make the converted data blink Compress Used to compress the original bit map data during conversion Mirror Used to replace the original bit map data symmetrically relative to the X axis or Y axis during conversion E Converting Placing a Bit Map Destination Convert Bitmap to Image Screen s x Select the number N c Source Effects Destination of colors of the converted bit map Enter the title of Screen Title the Image screen file So 2 GA Talr Size f 0 19 256 Clay Screen Layout Enter the screen Eege Displays the size number of the M of the converted Image screen screen Select a destion to save the image screen Screen Color Select the type of the converted bit map file Monochrome 8 colors 64 colors or 256 colors The screen size and the number of screen divisions vary depending on the selected type First Screen Enter the screen number of the Image screen If no screen number is speci fied an Image screen of the currently displayed screen number will be created Screen Title Enter the title of t
257. ence List Usage Pattern When either modifying or deleting Select After selection cose or the View Parts List desired either modify or gt Part delete the Part key SP Xe An example of the Part Reference List on a screen is shown below Shows a list of the Parts on the currently selected screen Simply click on the desired Part Reflection of device comment The device comment corresponding to an entered device address overwrites the Descrip tion field Changes Part s settings Deletes the selected Part Copies a Part Pastes a Part Stores the Parts list information as a CSV file Use this scroll bar Closes the current screen to view all the data The Esc key can also be on a long screen used The tab width for each item can be adjusted by placing the mouse pointer on the border between items and then dragging it E Editing Items on the Part Reference List Part setting data can be changed directly on the Part Reference List Click on the left most number of a Part to be changed and it will be high lighted then click on the button and the Part s Dialog box will appear and its settings can be changed Setting items such as the Description and Address areas can be changed via the Part Reference List Also items displayed in gray can be changed in the dialog box by
258. ended Screen Count 4 36 Data Logging Display Switch Settings Attributes 2 70Extended Settings 6 6 Data Logging Display Switch Shape Color 2 70 Data Logging Flow 10 27 Data Storage Example 2 209 Data Transmission via External Device 10 15 Date Display General Settings Attributes 2 83 Decimal Places 2 52 Definition of Functions 2 181 Deleting a Home Page Address 1 29 Deleting a Library Item 2 169 Deleting a Mark 3 16 Deleting D Script Settings 2 181 Deleting Data Sampling Settings 2 211 Device Address 2 217 Device Comment Types 4 20 Display Area 50 100 200 1 25 Display in Load Screen Object 2 216 Display Settings 10 44 Dot Attributes 2 95 Dragging and Dropping 2 136 Drawing 9 Drawing a Circle 3 8 Drawing Functions 1 2 Drawing Tools 2 94 3 2 Drawing with Dots 3 4 Duplicate Setting Dialog Box 2 137 Duplicating 2 139 Editing a Home Page Address 1 30 Editing a Library Item 2 168 Editing an Object 2 220 External Device Type 1 5 File Name Display Display Attributes 2 62 File Name Display General Settings Attributes 2 61 File Name Display Style Color Attributes 2 62 File Name Display Switch Settings Attributes 2 63 File Name Display Switch Type Color Attributes 2 64 File Types 1 7 Filing Data List 10 12 Filing Data Setup Procedure 10 8 Filing Data Transfer Flow 10 3 Filing Data Transmission Methods 10 6 Filing Name Display Settings 10 23 Filing Setting Example 10 17 Fill 2 216 Fill P
259. endix 3 Appendix 1 Error Messages Appendices E Screen Editor Errors other applicatons and resume editing open atone time Cannot place screen on itself You cannotcall the screen being edited Change request will exceed maximum This change will exceed the P arts upper limit number of Parts Changes canceled Current C olor Depth Not Supported Only bitmaps created with 256 colors or less can Convert to 256 colors or less be used in this system Device address out of range When the specified command is performed the device address exceeds the upper limit Specify an address within the allowable range Exceeded maximum screen size Changes This change will exceed the screen size upper limit m 1 5 Screen Editor Exceeds alarm limit Only one alarm can be used on a single screen Exceeds time display limit Only one time display can be used on a single screen Exceeds screen size limit The screen size exceeds the upper limit and you Cannot create any more graphic data The last data created will become invalid Store the screen data and then open a new screen and call the Stored screen using Load Screen in the Draw menu Exceeds Part Library limit If the number of Part Libraries used exceeds the limit PartLibrary data cannot be transferred to the LT Reduce the number of P artLibraries m 2 1 Pars gy Maximum Number of Automatically Created P artLibraries Filing displays with the same ID No cannot M ultple filing displ
260. ent 2 the result of statement 1 has not been assigned in D200 because of time consuming communication with the host External Device In such case program so that the result of statement 1 is stored in the LS area before it is executed as shown below w LS100 w D300 1 w D200 w LS100 w D201 w LS100 1 e As a guide for D Script programming three addresses occupy the same amount of memory as one Parts The maximum number of addresses available for a script is 255 However try to use the fewest possible addresses since the more devices that are used the slower the response e The Convert Address command in the Utility menu of the Project Man ager cannot convert addresses used in D Script Open the D Script Editor to change these addresses 4 2 3 Converting Addresses and Device Codes e If you have changed the external device the addresses used by D Script will not be converted Be sure to use the D Script Editor to change these addresses 2 198 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 4 2 7 Changing Your Project s External Device e The size of a D Script affects the Parts scanning time Note that using a large number of addresses may significantly degrade the performance of the program e Up to 9 levels of Functions can be called by a program Do NOT create more than that e Up to 254 Functions c
261. epeat the transfer procedure from step 2 Password Entry Enter Password Invalid Password Please Retype password 3 After the transfer is completed select the Transfer To cancel data transfer mode click menu Exit command or click on the icon on the icon LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs e a When Receiving Data From the LT Data stored in the LT unit can be received on a project file basis by the LT Editor To receive transferred data with the password registered password entry is required when receiving the data Unless Upload Information is selected in the Transfer Set L tings dialog box when any data is transferred to the LT unit the Important data cannot be received from the LT unit PROCEDURE 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Transfer menu Receive command or click on the icon If a password has been registered enter the password Password Entry Enter Password 3 Specify a location directory and Project file to store the received data Then click on the sae _ but ton If the same Project File name already exists the system asks if you wish to replace
262. er Setting Display and Write Settings tabs Select the Project Manager s Screen Edit menu Logging Setting com mand E Trigger Settings Trigger Settings Bit Method aes oe xi Logging ON OFF ager Setnes D wite Sates Check this check box when perform e a ia A a a ing data logging Data Logging Statt Address A Bit Method No of Words EE Select this option when using a Trigger Fead Count M Veik Bit to start data logging Block Coun Data Logging Start Address a Designate the Start Address of the Ex ES E ternal Device device where data to be Data Clear Bt Adress T logged is stored No of Words Designate the desired number of words from the Start Address Up to 32 words can be designated Trigger Bit Address O0 000000 gt e a When a variable Logic Symbol is used as a logging start ad A dress an integer array must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Read Count Designate the frequency of data log ging Data is logged at the frequency designated here and then handled as a block LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features Trigger Settings Time Method Data Logging Settings x Trigger Settings Display write Settings JF Logging ON OFF 4 Bit Method Data Logging Start Address o0 0000 ia fe No of Words Statt Time H M
263. er entering and registering a message in a line and moving to the next line an address that is one bit larger will be automatically entered for the new line L When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address the ponani automatic address increment function must be turned off Other wise the correct addition will not be performed LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 a 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS mea Creating an Alarm This section describes how to create and register alarm messages using Alarm Editor PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Screen Setup menu Alarm Editor command or click on the icon to open the Alarm Editor F Basic Alarm Settings Factory Bite Alarm Edit View Help Entering data in the Alarm Editor only does not activate the Alarm Fo ID ek Automatic Address Increment to PSOne 1 Summary Enu Summary Summary mode To activate the Alarm Summary mode you must place the Message Display on the Base screen where the message is displayed 2 Specify the bit address monitor bit important When designating an Alarm summary s bit address be sure to select a device that can use word designated units LT Editor Exter nal Device Connection Manual 3_ 3 4_ 3 Supported Devices 22 ne 2 Summary 3 Enter a message Enter the message to be displayed on
264. er exceeds 6000 all Parts in excess of 6000 cannot be transferred to the LT To avoid this please remember the following 1 Automatic Library creation will be performed follows per screen Switches 2 only switches with the Monitor function selected Lamps 2 Messages 2 to 16 depending on the number of states used Picture Displays 2 to 16 depending on the number of states used Trends 1 to 20 depending on the number of channels However Part Libraries using the same Parts 1 e Part s that are the same size same attributes and without labels or other items will be used commonly For example When 30 Switches Monitor function is selected and 20 Lamps are placed on a single Base screen 30 x 2 20 x 2 100 Part Library items will be automatically created Therefore 60 of these size screens can be used in one project s data 2 12 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 When using the same Parts for multiple Base screens register the Part on one Base screen and then place it other Base screens using the Load Screen function Thus when multiple Base screens use those Parts only one Part Library will be used thereby reducing the Project File s size Placing a Part in Position After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the desired position on the screen to place the Part PROCEDURE REMARKS 1
265. er is drawn using the same width as the specified display interval without overlapping the cell lt Display Spacing gt Border the gap between the Draw the border so border and the cell is not filled that it does not with the clear color overlap any cell te Lf E Scroll data area If the scroll data area is enabled the totaling section 1s scrolled together with the data section If the totaling section scroll is disabled the totaling section always appears on the screen E Data Logging Display Color Attributes Select a color clear color displayed when the border of each item is cleared 2 1 Selecting Colors LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 69 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Data Logging Display Switch Settings Attributes The number of rows and that of columns specified in Data type are dis played on the Data Logging Display If any data exceeding these numbers exists in the LT use the function switches to scroll the data 2 1 3 Function Switches Logging display LG_001 Select the func General Settings Dae type Color Switch setting Switch Shape Color E l i tion switch type Select Place Switch nter e io be paced wllup at number of AE paee Flown rows columns wright scrolled Zi E Data Logging Display Switch Shape Color Attributes Specify a color border color of each function switch 2 18 Selecting Colors 2 10 Logilouch Editor Ver
266. ere data is stored External Device Transfer Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Not selected The example does not turn the Exter nal Device Transfer Completed Bit Address ON when the data transfer is completed between the LS area and External Device and SRAM and Ex ternal Device No information is sent when data transfer is completed When using the Transfer Completed Bit Address after the Bit ON condition is detected turn the corresponding Bit OFF on the External Device Also when the Transfer Completed Bit Ad dress is used the special relay LS2032 s bit 10 will turn ON when data transfer is not completed normally between the External Device and LS area or between the External Device and SRAM External Device Connection Manual Chapter 1 External Device Transfer Completed Bit Address Not designated Since this example does not use the Trans fer Completed Bit Address this Address does not need to be designated When us ing the Transfer Completed Bit Address designate an Address that will be turned ON when data transfer is completed 10 18 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe ID No 0 In this example where only one Filing Data Display is placed the ID No does not need to be entered Keep the de fault setting When placing two or more Filing Data Displays on the currently displayed screen be sure not to use the
267. eriod you need to either use back up data in your host computer or configure the Editor system so that the Editor can back up data LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Preface TABLE OF CONTENTS PREFACE cave seacoucawasysadeveeredesaves vaceseernsessaus sacevecegeussues vocesecceses sul I EE 1 Tad ma e R n recep se cnte E E N E E T A A 2 Manual Symbols and Terminology cccccccccecccceececceeeeeeeeeaaaasseeseseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeaeessees 3 Loc oach enos eas E E E HOV 46 We Tits N oie ctahctcncrteiieectehenepenepatenctatssnsasosasacadvidsasasdsasasaauedausanisasaeddibdsasenedzagavhens 5 PRECAUTION S etcetera restau E A A A E T A A E E 8 TARTS TEE CONTENTS crecer 11 BM MV CE VOW aaa satecetsna eset aaee E A E 1 2 Le FOr tO erat e CI ee E E aeansosaranee 1 3 L2 Fiom Start to We UMN NG oe sate c seats cet seas aseadeaaessanseacsnatedseessentsassadessessesanacsnateuscezece 1 4 ke CIM SS CAI A T A ER AAE 1 4 L22 Creat Se eC 5 ay a POC anaes ete ce pence EE 1 5 1 2 3 Creating Editing Saving a Logic Program cccccccccceeccccceeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 1 10 1 24 Opens Closmie Saya SOCEM esiin a E 1 12 Leoa Ow ET EOT eE E OE A EA E 1 17 ES Peo C WEA CL aa E 1 18 1 3 1 Project Manager Areas and Functions cecsieciscesstsceccavedssteustoncncrnsbicrecsvadestuusteielemmacns 1 18 L4 Logic Programi Edil OP secede ceacecsavieescecssasesvaxaee vecdeaseusesavivesceesseryotasaurvocerseawerssa
268. errors may occur LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide ye Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script E Functions A D Script program can be created using Functions A program created as a Function can be used on the same screen or on other screens The Functions can be used commonly for D Script and Global D Script Functions 7 al G1 cr CD Call Select a Function name to be loaded and then click on this button After clicking on the Load button the called up Function name will be displayed in the formula area Edit Select a Function name to be edited and then click on this button Use the D Script Function dialog box to perform editing Delete Click on this button to delete a created Function First select a Function name to be deleted and then click on the Delete button Copy Any selected function can be copied Paste Use this command to paste a copied function Click on this button and the following dialog box will appear Then enter the name for the function to be pasted Duplicate D Seript Function Mame Please enter a new function name KL career 2 180 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Definition of Functions When the icon is clicked on in the D Scrip Editor the D Script function setting screen will appear Displays the D Scr
269. ersion Appendix 22 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables E Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC F gt After Conversion Xx Y NS Trens Ciccics D LS meray s e fale opreg eee u oe fale cutie Relay Keep ee T TC TS Bee come ujefa o o uje Counter D omaris njee ofo LS smara jeje ojo E Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC FX Before T After Conversion Y M s TSAN_ CSCN D LS_ malele elo omweg 2 2 2f2 e e olo M memar 2 2 2f2 ojo serey 2 2 2fo ojo TS TN me efefe o o eje come fefe o o ele C ounter D poorer 2 2 2 e e Lolo LS sytem 2 2f2 fo e Jolo c 2 V es gt c O O a O Gam ma LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 23 Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables Appendices E Toho Electronics TTM Series After Conversion eee pee S A SORE jojojojojo joj ojojojojojojojo lo lolojo X o ojojojojoj o jo jo ojolo lo ojojojo jo w ojojojojo jojojojojojojojojoj o lolojo ojojojojojoj ojojojojojojojojlo lolojo w ojojo jojo jo jojojojojojojojo o lolojo ojojo jojo jo jojojojojojojojo lo lolo jo w o ojojojojojojojojojolo lo jojojojojo c ke gt c O O O wp aa Appendix 24 LogiTouch Editor Ve
270. erted When Use EXTMIN EXTMAX is selected only data in the DXF file s object area will be converted Convert LT Size The Project File screen size LT screen size used after conversion 1s speci fied LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 231 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Color Conversion DXF Screen When the Option dialog box s Convert Color Data check box is checked the DXF file s color data will be converted as follows ire xiresbased Re 4 light blue 13X light blue based 6 purple 21X purple based The background color will be converted into Black E Line Type Conversion DXF Screen Each DXF file s line type will be converted as follows Le Ce re EE e eee 9 The user defined line types will be converted into solid lines E Object Conversion DXF Screen 2 232 The DXF file s objects will be converted as follows Colors and line types will be converted as shown above Tiling patterns will be converted into solid Fill Staghtin Tex DIMENSION dimension indicator Straightline Conversion breaks down complex objects into Component parts objects Conversion breaks down complex objects into Component parts objects INSERT inserting object ATTRIB attribute POLYLINE polyline donut shaped Oval polygon rectangle Vertex coordinates of a continuous straight line Contnuous stra
271. es Omron or Memory Link SIO Type the simulation cannot be performed e Simulations of logic program s variables Logic symbol cannot be per formed e To carry out a simulation you need to transfer a simulation protocol at the LT set up 8 1 2 Transferring Simulation Protocol e With a device specified in LT System Setting the simulation cannot be performed If the backup function for the LS area is selected or if a D Script uses an LS area special relay for its start bit no LS device can be simulated 8 2 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 8 Simulation 8 1 Overview e If the LS device is frequently written using the D script during the LS device simulation actions such as a slide transition will be slow DO NOT specify LT System Settings Extended Settings tab Reset LT On Data Write Error e The screen on the LT panel cannot be changed 8 1 1 General Description of the Simulation Screen To perform a simulation first transfer the screen data created with the LT Editor program and the simulation protocol to the LT unit MGI 7 2 Transferring Screens Usage Pattern Click on the Click on the Click on the Project Simulation E button gt i button E button to to start the to stop the quit the simulation simulation simulation General description of the Simulation screen Enter the Base Screen number Select a functi
272. ess numeric data as absolute values on a Trend line graph The graph s display will then change to reflect Word Address data changes E Trend Graph General Settings Attributes Trend Graph Settings TR_OO1 l Channel Settings so Shape Color Alam Settings Alarm Settings General Settings Graph Settings Enter comment data here Description The currently selected ET Select the Trend Graph Shape aul desired Data appears here Format Calls up the Part Shape Browser displaying a list of pre made Trend Graph Shapes Part Shapes can be selected directly from the Browser Data Format Here the display data format is specified as either Bin or BCD With the Display Mode check box checked and Bin data format selected negative numeric data can also be displayed E Trend Graph Graph Settings Attributes Trend Graph Settings TR_OO1 Selecta graph type Channel Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings l General Settings Graph Settings 2 Pen Recorder Enter the No of Display Direction Data Samples Up Data Samples 10 f Samples Scroll Select the data T9 Left sa JE value and Sam display direction 3 Down Samping Tine Jeo pling Time i Right Asie Scale W w M pm jg Enter the number eh aa of X and Y divi ae Graph Settings Using Normal The specified Word Address s data changes are dis played over time in a
273. etween the desired lines or click on Een the desired line while pressing the 3 X Summary Tank C temperature UF i 4 oons Shiftlor Ctrl key 2 Select the Edit menu Change Attributes com mand or click on the Ea icon 3 After entering the necessary items click on the O button Change Alarm Alarm Type 3 Alarm Summary Cancel i Alam Message Messaae Color Fo Bee C E C TE Bee 5 10 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing E Reflecting Device Comments This feature is used to reflect all the comment information corresponding to a se lected device in the Message field PROCEDURE 1 Select an alarm for which comment information is to be reflected on a row basis Here reflect the comment in the device for the alarm ae summary cia ahh YoOOLGL nan 2 Select the Edit menu Apply Device Comment command or click on the icon 3 A confirmation dialog box appears Click on the Yes button to execute the command Alarm Editor The selected Address es will be used to search for a related Device Comment s 7 IF found the comment will be inserted into message feld Are you OK 4 The device comment corresponding to the address will be included in the messages a roors message LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide RE
274. ey w Display m Load Screen Object Load Screen Double Click i Change Attribute 3 Edit Screen Information Data T Parts ID Information Data Size im Device Address i Nomal a Small T Used Hairline Cursor LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 215 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 216 Se te The display state of ID numbers and Addresses can also be changed via the A Option tool bar icons gt Fill E Important When creating a screen the drawing can be controlled so that any Fills used will either be displayed or not If the Fill check box is not checked all Fills are not shown Using this feature will help you to speed up screen redrawing time and thus speed up screen creation When the Fill check box ts not checked the actual screen shown on the LT unit may differ from the screen shown on your PC To be sure the display is correct check the Fill check box ON at least once to verify the screen before sending screen data to the LT Fill Point ot e When this feature is selected specified Fill points will appear with an X mark which is especially useful when selecting Fill points If the Fill Points are not displayed Fill cannot be performed while editing The X cursor position mark s color can be designated in the system s Color area Multiple Open with Next Prev When selecting Previo
275. f Addresses screen displays such as Parts will not be updated or refreshed Also screen changes will not be performed If data to be written exceeds the designated device range a communication error occurs In this case you must turn the LT s power OFF and then ON again to reset the LT from the error When the 32 bit device data is copied to a 16 bit device using D script and the bit length is designated as 16 bits only the data for lower 16 bits will be copied E g memcpy w w30 0100 w BD00100 3 15 0 31 0 o a vada me gt 1o w o 102 Also when 16 bit device data is copied to a 32 bit device the data for the lower 16 bits will be copied and 0 will be desig nated for the upper 16 bits E g memcpy w BD00100 w w30 0100 31 101 2 102 3 BD0100 101 102 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e When 32 bit device data Is copied to a 16 bit device or when 16 bit device data is copied to a 32 bit device if the D script bit length designated in D Script is 32 the copying will be as follows E g memcpy W30 0100 BD0100 2 31 0 Booo M an e E g memcpy BD0100 W30 0100 4 Jl 0 BD0100 101 e If the original and destination data ranges overlap all overlap ping data will be rewritten as follows E g When copying D101 to D104 to D100 to D103 Data is cop
276. f Status Bar Displays information on the edited logic program and messages concerning the operation LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 21 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 5 Screen Editor 7 Screen Editor To create a screen start the Screen Editor via the Project Manager There are three types of screens used for different purposes Base Screen Mark Screen and Image Screen Screen Screen Maximum Size Contents Type Number per Screen This screen is displayed when the LT is in RUN mode Base B ile Shared drawings and Active images loaded on another Approx 16 KB base screen can be used One partofa Base Screen can be registered as a window M ark Mlb Used to create marks and foreign characters on a 48 x 48 M dotscreen These marks and foreign characters are 576 bytes max M 8999 Mag Screen displayed as still or Active images on a Base Screen Bitmap image data can be registered here as LT screen data Image screens are displayed as sill or Active Approx 58 KB images on a Base Screen Screen Image l Screen e Although screen files can be numbered from I to 8999 the maximum Note number of screens that can be created for and used by a LT depends on V your PC s hard disk capacity and the amount of RAM memory available e The number of screens that can be transferred to the LT will depend on how much internal memory the LT has The actual screen size and tota
277. f IM QUT Fill_Titner PT SOR EER w b EA 56 132 r204 Ready Sole 4 Mediurn_pushbuttan IPH 7 IN QUT Fill_Timer PT 2000 1171000 l LogiT ouch Type A 2 132 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 Select the Screen Editor Edit menu Paste Com To cancel the Pasting click on the mand Data 2 command or click on the icon icon JS Drawing Board Soda Reda Del Cup EH p pE Paste Paste Command Data Ctrl B Duplizae x Delete gt EO By fal ga in QL Rotel Rae lt _ ne OEO Bar Graph Number_at_Smalls C Fie Graph Number_at_S malls C Halt Fie Graph Number_at_Smalls C h Number of Smalls Cw A list of the Parts to which the cop ied instruction can be converted will appear If there is only one Part that corresponds to the instruction the step 4 is omitted 5 Change the size and attributes of the Part as neces 2 1 Parts sary and place it on the screen Numeric Display Settings ND_O01 General Settings Display Format Shape Color Alarm Settings Description Ward Address Cd E Humber_of_Small Pr E LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 13 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Objec
278. for both a word sym bol and a bit symbol important If alphanumeric numerals are used at the end of a symbol name executing the Copy and Paste command will auto matically change the symbol s name When Chinese characters and numbers are used in a symbol name All the Arabic numbers to the right of the Chinese character s will be deleted Sequence numbers starting from 2 will be assigned after the Chinese characters When Roman characters and Arabic numbers are used in a symbol name Example ABC123 All the Arabic numerals to the right of Roman character s will be deleted and replaced by a sequence number When only Arabic numbers are used in a symbol name Only the first number is retained and all other digits are truncated and replaced with a sequence number LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 21 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Registering Symbols and Device Comments PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Screen Setup menu Symbol Editor command 2 Select symbol or device comment type In this example please select Word Symbols File Edit lew Help __ JNUMI NN 3 Enter symbol names and addresses To enter a symbol name you can use up to twenty alphanumeric B Symbol Editor l x File Edt View Help characters or up to ten Chinese EE characters Word Symbols ia TE TET are Tere
279. for draw ing functions such as Part Library and D Script CHAPTER 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS CREATING AND USING SCREENS This chapter describes the procedures for creating and using various screens such as the M Mark Screen and I Image Library screens which enable you to create high quality images and provide advanced level functionality CHAPTER 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT This chapter describes the procedures for editing and saving created screens and project files and information management procedure CHAPTER 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS This chapter describes the alarm creating and editing procedures CHAPTER 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS This chapter describes the initial setup procedure required to use the LT display unit For details please refer to the online help or the users manual for the LT main unit CHAPTER 7 TRANSFERRING DATA This chapter describes the procedures for sending screens and logic pro grams created with the LT Editor to an LT display unit CHAPTER 8 SIMULATION This chapter describes the procedures for simulating the operation between an LT and LT Editor CHAPTER 9 PRINTING This chapter describes the procedure for printing created screens CHAPTER 10 ADVANCED FEATURES This chapter describes the procedures for using the LT Editor s advanced functions such as filing data recipe and logging functions LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual
280. from a Multiple Selection 2 First make a multiple selection then click on the Selection Tool box s Typ2 icon Selection handles will appear for only one type of object here only square objects are selected while an outline remains around them all This will effectively de select any objects that are not the currently selected type R E A a 3 Use the lt and gt icons to select a different object type As you press either arrow key the selected object type will change REMARKS Objects are classified as follows Parts by each type Objects by each type Loaded Screens and Marks All as one type respectively To re select all the objects originally in the multiple selection click on the Selection Tool box s al button LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 125 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 3 2 Moving Objects In this section the procedures for moving objects are described E How to Move an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Click on the desired object The object s handles will appear showing that it has been selected 2 3 1 Selecting Objects The keyboard s gt and keys can also be used when the object s handles are displayed 2 Place the cursor over the object away from the fap object is too small to select handles and after the cursor changes to drag it and move i e
281. functions click on their respctive the G icons respectively Example Turn Counterclockwise LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Reverse This function reverses the white and black areas In the reverse display mode all ON dots are turned OFF and all OFF dots are turned ON To execute this function click on the icon Example LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 19 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Transparent Background Color If no dots are turned ON in a block this block becomes transparent When this function is set to Background color a block without any ON dots is displayed in the background color Bg PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Edit menu Background Color com mand or click on the icon 2 Click in the block to be displayed in the background color The border line of the specified block is changed Every time you click in the block the color setting is switched
282. g ON OFF Write Settings Fram Filing Data To SAAM Control Word Address 00 0000 alll sere Write Completed Bit Address o0 000000 F Era Estemal Device amp SAAM Direct Data Transmission Settings in Extemal Device Controlled Transfer Control Word Address 00 0000 e E a Transmit Completed Bit Address aq ygonoon fe ie Write Setting From Filing Data To SRAM Control Word Address DOO200 Write Completed Bit Address M00001 External Device amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Setting External Device Controlled Transfer Not selected LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 17 10 1 Filing Data Recipe E Filing Data Display Settings Chapter 10 Advanced Features When manual data transmission 1s performed you must place the Filing Name Display 2 1 12 Filing Name Display General Settings File Display FD_001 External ranster I Use Transfer Completed Bit Address ID Mo Transfer Completed Bit Address oo 000000 ele File No Device T f Description Heat Control Use LS Area Use LS Area Not selected Since in this example data is transmit ted from SRAM to the External Device it is not transmitted via the LS Area Keep the default setting Top Write Word Address Not se lected Not designated Since this example does not use the LS area this Address does not need to be designated When using the LS area designate the Top Address of the LS area wh
283. g box will appear and the simulation can not be started 2 Click on the button to begin communication with the LT unit The device information on the current LT panel screen is displayed AN The simulation protocol has not yet been transherred Please designate the protocol in the screen transher menu ol eo ie J Chg amp cr Screen Neme Desciption Function Address Staus Ate JE No Syste During communication the ez 8 i icon blinks like this You can check the LT panel operation by switching 8 1 1 General De screens or changing the device settings using the scription of the Simulation Screen or icon displayed in the Alter cell Also you can check the device status changes via the LT s touch keys LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 9 6 l Overview Chapter 8 Simulation PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 Click on the button to quit the simulation During simulation screen data can 4 Click on the button to quit the simulation mode not be transferred Click on the icon and stop simulation before transferring screen data LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 9 PRINTING A printed copy of created screens and Part setting conditions is often useful when debugging This chapter describes the printing proce dure and print settings Dll E E E E Print Settings LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Cre
284. g setting attributes will be changed and if you click on the button editing will be canceled LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 211 2 6 Data Sampling Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Setting Up Data Sampling The Data Sampling setup procedure is shown below Data Sampling samples data stored in D0102 and stores it in the LSOO20 LS area PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select Data Sampling from the Special pull down menu 2 Click on the 4cd__ button Up to 20 Data Sampling sets in Data Sampling Settings cluding Trend graph channels can be entered 3 Perform the data sampling settings After the settings Enter a Channel name of up to 5 are all completed click on the button characters Channel Setting x General Data Format Sampling Tag Name a ggj Sampling Address Trigger Bit Address OOoo00 Top Write Address o020 Ho of Sampl Addr 1 Graph Backup No Synchronous Mode Sampling Type Period Mo 60 seconds Ok N Cancel 4 Click on the ese button to quit the registration Data Sampling Settings Displays the registered items 2 212 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Ya Efficient Drawing Techniques 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques This section explains how the use of grids changing display states and the help function can all
285. ge Max Min No of value columns Block Name Date Time Value Value Value ABCDEFGH JABCDEFGH ABCDEFGH ABCDEFGH Block Name Data display C n Data display scor depay rows Data display ascorn Data display acos Total Total acors Total Average cor Total Max acor Total Min r When using the pattern shown above the maximum number of value col umns and data display rows are as follows 10 54 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging No ofValue No ofData Columns Display Rows 3 1007 When the No of value columns number of logging words is the maximum 32 columns When the No of value columns number of logging 16 1116 words is the maximum 16 columns When the No of value columns number of logging 1170 l words is the maximum 8 columns When the No of value columns number of logging 4 1197 words is the maximum 4 columns 7 When designating the columns as the block name display and entering characters in each column the file size will become Important extremely large Depending on the number of characters en tered and other items designated approximately 1000 rows can be used for the pattern shown above LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 55 Memo 10 56 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPEN
286. ged from X00000 to X00010 the following bit addresses will be changed as below Confirm Device Address Bit Address Address Function Parts Name Part ID Description Clicking on any cell other than the changed one will show the changed address LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yey Changing Coordinates Object positions and sizes can be changed by specifying their coordinates Check this check box to change the size Enter the object s left top coordi nates Enter the object s right bottom coordi nates E Using Coordinates to Change an Object s Position PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select a desired object 2 3 1 Selecting Objects w 2 Select the Edit menu Change Coordinates com mand 3 Enter the object s left top and right bottom coordi To change the size check the Change Position Ej Change size check box in step 3 mikara seg PA To cancel the coordinates change X Anis Y Axis click on the button To undo the coordinates change 4 Click on the button to execute the command Click on the x icon S LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 149 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing m Editing the Node of a Multi segment Line Creating Editing or deleting a node can be performed on a multi segment line and a filled polygon
287. gging is completed one time the Bit Address designated here is turned ON LT to External Device After the External Device de tects that the Bit Address is turned ON turn it OFF File Full Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When data logging is completed for block the Bit Address designated here is turned ON LT to External Device After the External Device de tects the Bit Address is turned ON turn it OFF Data Clear Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When the Bit Address designated here is turned ON data stored in the backup SRAM is deleted After the data is deleted LT turns OFF the Bit Ad dress External Device to LT LT to External Device 0 54 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging Loop Selecting this feature means when data logging is completed it will begin again from the top most data address and overwrite the existing data E Trigger settings with Loop operation Trigger settings will differ depending on the type of Loop operation desig nated Bit Method 1 The maximum number of logging Words in all blocks is 2048 Number of blocks x frequency lt 2048 Time Method aration Foose Fouine 1 The end time is automatically calculated using the time period and frequency 2 The maximum number of logging Words in all blocks is 2048 Number of blocksx frequency
288. gnates an Address Bit Switch Settings BS_O001 General Settings Shape Color Label Description Operation Bit Address 0002 Test Line E s0003 Start Purnp kian 0004 Lamp CH MAERT LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Paris Kote w Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Entering from the Address Keypad Click on the Address Keypad icon and the Address Keypad will appear allowing you to enter numeric data and addresses on the screen via the mouse When designating a variable for a logic program Logic symbol by bit use the Logic Symbol Keypad that will be displayed by clicking the Logic button in the Address Keypad window Bit Switch Settings BS_ 001 General Settings Shape Color Label Description Operation Bit Address Activates the Address Key se I Monitor To move the Address Address Keypad keypad to the desired position drag its title bar To close the pop up l l Bit Address x keypad click here To display the device names in a list click here Display Backspace key Clear key Hexadecimal la efe 8 3 number entry key ope F aafe al d J Enter key Displays the Logic o ENT Symbol Keypad Logic Symbol Keypad Bit Address A pull down list shows Logic symbols HAvgLogicT ime Designates a Logic symbol by bit Returns to the Address RET sE ENT The Logic sy
289. group of objects selects one of that group Selection PAN Qos BLAD After selecting a group of objects selects one type of object i e squares circles etc After selecting either or clicking on either or e selects the next object or type GX re Objects may be selected using the Screen Data List instead of selecting them V on the screen 2 7 4 Screen Data List 2 120 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E How to Select a Single Object Here the procedure for selecting an object is explained PROCEDURE REMARKS Selecting an Object Directly When selecting grouped objects click on any one of the objects in a 1 Move the cursor over the object and left click group to select the group Handles display on the object to show that it is selected _ A Part s Label can be selected in ig dependently from the Part Click on a Part to display its handles 2E and then on its Label to display the Label s handles After selecting the Selecting an Object by Dragging Label it can be moved or scaled in 1 Position the cursor near the object and hold the but dependently from the Part ton down then drag this is called Left dragging Numeric Display and text can also the mouse over the object As you do so a box be selected using the above men formed by a dotted line will exp
290. gt External Device Designates the Bit Address that will be turned ON when filing data trans mission is completed Rote XL Use binary numbers to designate file and block numbers e If data transmission cannot be performed LS2032 s Bit 10 is turned ON To transmit data to the External Device use either your standard communi cation cycle time or 150ms whichever is longer as the trigger OFF time For Communication cycle time details External Device Connection Manual 1 1 4 2 1 3 Special Relay Transmit Completed Bit Address LS2032 Bit 10 Normal data transmission Data transmission error o ON LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 11 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features UAE Filing Data List Filing Settings can be added edited and deleted on the Filing Data List screen Usage Pattern Screen ADD or Close Filing Data Filing List gt Egitor gt or Esc Setu Pl Delete E Filing Data List Below is the overview of the screen on which you can make filing settings When using a single folder Filing Data List Adds folder and file settings Add Edits folder and file contents Copies folder and files Pastes copied folders and files Deletes folders and files Lists registered filing settings When using multiple folders Internal Memory indicates the screen data stored in the
291. h state DO NOT check F this box 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Copy from Description The characters entered in the Description filed are copied to the label in the selected state Copy to Off On state When the state is On the characters entered in the label are copied to the label in the Off state When Off the characters are copied to the label in the On state LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS State States are displayed only for Lamps and for those switches with two states ON and OFF The text displayed for each state can be specified indepen dently Simply click on either state button to specify its text and colors Character Size Specifies the size of character 2 2 9 Text Style Font Specifies the type of character Normal Bold Raised used in each Label 2 2 9 Text Text Color ON OFF Specifies Label colors The default settings are Fg White and Bg Transparent mode Black Blk Line space When the text extends to more than one line set the line space Alignment Justification When the text input for a Label exceeds one line the Alignment icons will appear Select Left or Right justification or Centering State OFF Text Tracking On or Spacing Alignment Teas Fl Left justified Centered Right justified Character Size E ID Numbers When creating a Part an ID number is automatically as
292. haracter size and position may differ from the original due to font type difference and errors created during conver sion e Since Load Mark will be converted into a simple straight line 1 e no width if it has been magnified it will be displayed differently from the original after it is converted I If you try to convert a filled polygon that has four peaks one of Important which introverts into a DXF file this polygon will not be con verted properly 2 236 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion E Option Screen gt DXF Here select and enter color and size data used when performing data con version Screen Size Option Screen gt DXF EJ Designates the LT a screen size after conver XN sion Parts State DXF size Selects and enters the Part Designates the DXF State when converted screen size when Base screen data is converted into DXF file data Convert Screen Size The screen size of a LT unit specified in the Project File Convert DXF Size The DXF file size used after data 1s converted using data conversion 1s selected The default values are the same as the Screen Size values men tioned above Parts State Bit When Part display states ON OFF are specified that Part will be converted for each display state Word Picture Display and Message Display will be converted with the display state specif
293. have the following meanings Q When the address conversion device type is set to Word the system converts both Word and bit devices When the Bit setting is used only bit device addresses are changed When the selected conversion mode is Word only Word ad dresses are converted Selecting Bit will convert only bit addresses K When Word mode is selected the system converts only word addresses WE When Bit mode is selected the system converts only bit addresses Blanks cannot be converted For the timers and counters the bit indicates the contact or coil used and the word indicates the current value elapsed value or setting value E Address Conversion Table List Memory link SIO Type After conversion Before E Mitsubishi Electric FREQROL Series After C onversion for parameter Parameter except a for FR S 500 nm Pr 37 mete te 500 E500 s Pr 37 omer Oloj o O for parameter LS System Area LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 19 Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables Appendices E Yokogawa Electric FACTORY ACE After Conversion X Y IJE M L T C TP cP ts cs Db BIR Z an olofelolelel messy 20100 fof e tooo ojojo niena Relay a o a comer Relay jo i Relay lo oe o ie ona counter contact k wk wk amp metams HA eeo pi k x amp Counter current I Kl ww ww amp w w wk x Timer Setup Kl we we we
294. he d key each time To cancel a drawing action click on the ja icon Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 101 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing 2 2 5 ACCT Sa To draw an arc or pie a portion of a circle must be selected You will need to first draw a circle and then click on the arc s beginning and end points E Arc Pie Attributes Check this check box when drawing a Pie Displays the currently selected Select one of Arc Pie image the line border He types F M E Select the Color Ps M BK and Blink set tings if desired E Drawing an Arc PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Arc Pie command or click on the icon 2 Set the Arc s attributes Select Colors and line type if desired SS SS Fo Pelee cm MEMME O E 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on the In step 3 if the key is held oval s center point a down you can draw an oval which contacts a specified area 1 e the side s of a square This function is useful when drawing an inscribed circle and can also be used in step 4 together with the key 2 102 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4
295. he BCD format 0 Logging data 2 1 2 3 Minute bn 4 Second EE x 5 See below o H See below NH N 48 Hn 6 Word Daan 15 gt 87 0 sol cote Fag L Read flag 0 Data read incomplete 1 Data read completed Read Error Code 0 Normal finish 1 Read error Word Data Enabled Disabled Bit 15 0 5 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 Each Bitin a Word represents a data number When a Bitis 0 the Bitis Disabled When a Bitis 1 the Bitis Enabled When using loop operation logging data is transferred starting with the oldest piece of data Logging Data Process in Backup SRAM Here 1 to 6 represent logging data In this case logging data is written to the LS area in the order of 1 2 and 3 When using the Loop feature logging data is written in the order of 3 4 5 and 6 10 42 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging If a data block s size exceeds the LS Area size that data block cannot be transmitted Logging Data for each block LS Area LS 20 Not transmitted LS 2031 Insufficient Space Display Setting Example for Writing to LS Area The following is an example of the display settings used when writing each logging data column s total value data to the LS area block units lt Total Value Data and Average Value Data Display gt e ae eer Pese Ce
296. he Image screen Even if the converted data are divided into several screens only one title can be specified for one original file Size Displays the size of the converted screen LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 720 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Converting a Bitmap Convert a bitmap file into Image screen data PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Utility menu Convert Bitmap com mand of the Project Manager 2 Click on the Browse button and select a bitmap file to be converted The color type data volume screen size and image data of the bitmap file will be displayed Convert Bitmap to Image Screen s Source Effects Destination Bitmap File LTEditor bmp Source Bitmap Colors Size bytes Dimensions 3 Specify the conversion parameters If the data volume is too large to be displayed in one screen the image data will be divided into several Im age screens Convert Bitmap to Image Screen s If the original data are mono chrome these conversion param eters cannot be specified Special Effects L Brightness Dithering Dither Method i Crude i Simple 7 Complex LI Blink L Compress 3 26 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS PROCEDURE 4 Enter the screen number and title of a new Image and designate Screen Type
297. he function used to display the simulation can be changed In addition to the settings of each screen the devices show in the following figure that have been set with the screen independent global functions can slso be displayed J Global O Script Filing Data Logging Registered Addres Format The data format of the device status displayed in the Status cell and the device data displayed in the Change cell can be selected for Dec decimal Hex hexadecimal or Oct octadecimal format o Marking the check box adds a minus sign to the displayed values if the word address settings displayed in the Status cell are nega tive values Name Comment ID number of a Part or any comment is displayed To switch the ID number or comment display mode select Name of Comment from the View menu Function A general description of the device function for each specified Part is dis played Address The device specified for each Part is displayed and you can change their word address settings Status The current status of each device bit ON OFF status or word address setting is displayed and you can change their word address settings Alter You can change each device status bit ON OFF or the word address settings Every time you click on the E icon the bit ON OFF status is switched When you click on the icon the following Keypad will appear e
298. he status of the project file compression decom pression Displays the overall progress of the project file compres sion decompression LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 29 4 3 Project Compression Decompression Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 3 1 Compressing a Project File A Project file can be compressed to a smaller size At this time a large sized file can be divided into smaller files automatically according to the specified capacity After a project file is divided into several files during compression serial numbers are assigned to the first character of each file extension or assigned to the first and second characters 1f the file number has two digits Example Olt 11t 9PW 10W 11W Enter the file name of Used to locate the project file to be the project file compressed or selecta fie Nm OOOO Browse to be com desired file name from pressed the list by clicking on LH Separate File the Browse button p Pack Project File Used to select the file size The compressed project Cancel limit file is automatically divided into several files according to the specified file size PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 First click the Windows Start button Then click on the Programs LogiTouch menu and click the 3 Pack Tool menu item You can also select 3 Pack Tool from the Utility pull down menu Favorites ME MS
299. his change will vary de pending on the selected LT type Be sure to check these items before changing the LT type to be sure that your change s will be compatible with your existing project s data When a vertical type LT unit is replaced with a horizontal type or l vice versa the displayed screen is rotated 90 Therefore you Important must also edit the screen using the Rotate command After editing be sure to check that the displayed data is as desired Example ABc D O gt Horizontal type LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Vertical type 4 27 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT awa Changing Your Project s External Device You can change the External Device selected in the current project The External Device can be changed only when the LT is Type C Za R te After changing the External Device you can save the current project using S Project menu Save As command 1 2 2 HM Saving a Project Under a Different Name PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Change External Device command TT Factory B lte Factory B Project Manager Project Control ScreenSetup Utility Help New Chrl h Select Chrl 5 1 Factory B lte 2 Soda lte 3 Factory 4 Ite 4 C LogiT ouch SAMPLES odale E sit Pro face Change the External Devic LogiT ouch Type
300. iTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 27299 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Converting Base Screen Data to DXF File Data PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down menu Utility s DXF Conver sion command 2 Click on the PRw gt 0xF button M DXF lt gt Screen Converter x DF Screen 3 Designate the source Project File and Base screen To designate a folder click on the number and designate the destination DXF file Select button File Convert Screen gt DXF x From Project File C sLogiT ouch databasesF actor 4 Click on the Option button and enter the conver sion conditions File Convert Screen gt DAF J From Project File C SLogiT ouch database Factory 2 240 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 After all the attributes have been entered click on 2 8 2 Option the button to registered the entered data Screen gt DXF Convert DSF Size a 6404480 3 640x400 y 3 320x240 za S00 600 mpe 6 Click on the Convet button to start conversion If the designated DXF file name File Convert Screen gt DAF J Fr 7 After the conversion is completed click on the E E button The File Convert DXF Screen orn Project File O LogiT ouchdatabase Factory
301. ibrary item Selects the item s background and foreground colors used for clearing When clicking on the button the Library Browser Library list will appear Select a desired Library from this list and drag it to the inside of the Library image display border on the Dialog box y Reference as 2 4 Libraries LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 89 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Delete The selected Library item is deleted and the display will disappear No of Lib Displays only when Type s Word is selected The number of Library images number of states to be displayed on the Picture Display can then be input Select any of 2 4 8 or 16 Library Here the Library item used for each state is specified Settings will differ depending on the Type selection Mode When selecting Bit Specify a Library item s ON and OFF states respectively Mode When selecting Word The n umber of buttons will match the designated number of Library items Specify a Library item for each state ote Changing the state via the Parts State Change Tool Bar after placing a Part X allows you to check each state s Library display condition Color The background square colors Clear Fg Clear Bg and pattern Pattern are selected The default settings are black The square colors can be selected so as to match the Picture Display placement area background s color l
302. ices E DXF File Conversion Errors from previous page E f Code W Library Screen Type Error 0x The type of the screen used in the screen call menu is nota base mark tend graph keypad Or an image screen LT data which is not Supported may be involved or the screen data may be corrupt Use the Editor to save the screen again and retry conversion W Screens Over Nesting Limit The screen calling layers are greater than 10 Screens with more than 10 layers cannot be converted Correct the data so that the number of layers will be 10 screens or less When writing the temporary file or output file the ka disk has become full Increase the amount of free disk space for the temporary file and outputfie Insufficient Memory The process is interrupted because of insufficient kg memory area during operation Close all other applications and retry the operation User Abort The user has interrupted the operation during conversion E File Management Errors Error Message Cause Solution Cannot Write File The data cannot be written to the specified output fle name Check the amount of free disk or ifthe disk is write protected Output File Name Format Error The specified output fle name cannot be recognized by the editor Specify the correct file name Work Directory Not Found The folder in which the temporary file is created is not found Specify the existing folder using the environmentvariable TEMP TT C
303. ich turns ON or OFF according to the External Device s Monitor Bit Address state When the LT is Type C lamps will not display on the LT un L less the LT has been connected to the External Device Important When placing a Lamp DO NOT overlap it with other objects If you do so it may not be displayed correctly E Lamp General Setting Attributes Enter comment Lamp Settings L4_001 data here General Settings Shape Color Label Enter the Description Bit Address desired Bit Address here Displays the cur stat pa rently selected Part Changes the Calls up the Part state of the Shape Browser dialog box s Part Shapes can switch display be selected to either ON or directly from here OFF Bit Address The Bit Address to be monitored is entered here LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 223 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Lamp Shape Color Attributes Here border colors for both ON and OFF states and Lamp s colors and tiling pattern in each state can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors The color and pattern settings available will differ depending on each lamp shape E Lamp Label Attributes Here the text characters shown on a Lamp button s face are entered 2 1 Parts Creating Labels E Placing a Lamp The procedures for creating and placing a Lamp are shown below TTA TT When X00017 the Lamp When X00017 the Lamp
304. ick on the button AN C LogiT ouchcpw sProduchon 1 cpw already exists Do you want to replace it LogilTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 175 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items E Quitting the Library Browser PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down menu File s Exit command Clicking on the Library Browser s If a newly created Library file has not been saved yet a top right mark can also be prompt asking whether the new Library file should be used to quit saved will appear When the button is clicked the Save As dialog box will appear and when the Saving a Library button is clicked the Library file will not be File Under Another Name saved and the Library Browser will quit Then a Li brary file creation or selection screen will appear Library Browser 2 Do vou want to save changes 7 2 174 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Yay D Script Global D Script The LT Editor provides a special feature that enables you to create a pro gram to execute functions in addition to Parts This feature is given by D Scripts Global D Scripts The display load on the External Device can be reduced significantly by creating and registering a program with D Scripts Global D Scripts D Scripts are used on each screen and serve as programs that are only effe
305. icking on any Part placed ters inside the border on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes If the key is pressed when the display area s border is scaled up or down its interior characters are also scaled 7 Repeat from step 1 to create Keypad Displays with Word Addresses D0051 and D0052 Except for the addresses all settings should be the same E Tips for using the Pop up Keypad e The Pop up Keyboard will appear on the right side of the Keypad Dis play If there is not sufficient space there the Pop up Keyboard will automatically be placed on the upper lower or left side of the Keypad Display e If there are no spaces in all directions the Pop up Keypad will be shown in the lower right area of the screen In this case the Pop up Keypad may hide the Keypad Display which will prevent you from confirming the value you are entering e Be sure not to place the Keypad Display rotated The Pop up Keypad will 2 54 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Using a Pop up Keypad to Input Values The procedures for entering setting values via a Pop up Keypad on the LT screen are shown below KD_1 Word Address tm D00050 When the Keypad A Pop up Keypad will Input data Display is appear and can re from the touched ceive Keypad PROCEDURE RE
306. ied here E Color Conversion Screen gt DXF Base screen s drawing data colors will be converted as follows Black 250 gray Ble 5 blue Green 3 green Reds red C Pupe 6 purple LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 25 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Line Type Conversion Screen gt DXF Base screen s line types will be converted as follows Fdotbrokenline DASHED CZ 2dotbrokenline DASHED The line thickness will be converted in the same thickness for all the lines regardless of the line types E Object Conversion Screen gt DXF Base screen s drawing data will be converted as follows Colors and line types will be converted as shown in the previous page s table The background colors will not be converted Tiling patterns will be converted into solid Fill OXF File nai line Continuous straight LINE POLYLINE S quare Filled S quare POLYLINE S OLID o ue erie CIRCLE CIRCLE SOLID Regular Circle Oval Filled Oval POLYLINE POLYLINE SOLID Arpe JARCIARC POLYLINE C F S ollection of lines illed Polygon OLID or POLYLINE Broken down into each Part object Load Screen and converted m ooo i e Load Mark POLYLINE Broken down into each part and converted Data other than the above will not be converted Straight line Continuous straight line e When the number of coordinates is 2 a straight line or
307. ied to a smaller number Address Copy From Copy To 0 w30 0100 101 102 103 15 t E g When copying D100 to D103 to D101 to D104 Data is copied to a larger number Address Copy From Copy To e Although this example s function designates 2 Addresses these Addresses will not be counted as D Script Addresses LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 189 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script 2 190 When using device addresses for the Assign operation the write values will not be assigned immediately due to the LT to External Device transmission time E g memcpy w D200 w D100 10 Copies D100 to D109 to D200 to D209 w D300 D200 Assigns D200 data to D300 In this case D100 s value to be written to D200 as the opera tion result has not yet been assigned to D300 When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address an integer array must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Memory Set memset E This feature initializes all devices at once Setting data for the number of Addresses is taken from the Set Word Address The allowable range of Addresses is from 1 to 640 Format memset Set Word Address set data number of Addresses Example When 0 is set to addresses D0100 to D0109 memset w D0100 0 10
308. ight line Objects other than the above will not be converted LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion Each object s elements other than colors and line types will be converted as follows POINT dot A dot s pattern will be converted into 0 point and its display size will be converted into 0 0 A dot will be converted to a straight line with the start and end coordi nates at the same point TEXT characters and signs A rotation angle will be converted into an angle closer to 90 180 270 or 360 in 90 units The character size will be converted into a size closer to either 1 2 4 or 8 x magnification Special characters that will be converted are d c 0 and p When text contains more than 100 characters it will be divided every 100 characters into records of data and then converted When more than 100 character text is divided into records of data groups of overflowing characters after the first 100 characters will be dislocated toward the right bottom for a few dots Tilting angles character fonts and character spacing will not be con verted Text will be converted based on the ASCII code therefore the character style Standard Bigfont etc or font file settings will be ignored When text with half sized and full sized characters mixed in vertical lines 1s converted the ha
309. ile s data cannot be completely restored with the Rebuild tool the system treats this data as abnormal data and deletes it In this case you must edit this LTE file using LT Editor program after the Rebuild command is performed 4 12 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing E Rebuilding General description of the Rebuild screen is as follows a2 Rebuild File Actions Help SAna Rebuild File D ProPB Windatabase Process pry Dis plays the selected file s name Menu Bar Tool Bar Status Displays the status of the rebuild Totaldob PSR operation Displays the progress Idle NUMI of the rebuild opera tion PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 To rebuild a file click on the Windows main menu s Start button Point to the Program LogiTouch menu and select the Rebuild command F LogiT ouch 4 CH Project Manager Accessones a fe 2 Rebuild Favorites StartUp t 3 Pack Tool ME MS DOS Prompt ReadMe i Uninstall E Programs Documents k E Windows Explorer 2 Select the File menu Open command or click on the icon 3 Select the file to be rebuilt or enter the file name Then click on the Open button AiE Factory Ike Ti Soda Ite File name Open N Files of type LogiT ouch Project Files Ite i Cancel dt LogiTouch Editor Ver
310. ill differ depending on the Part 1 e the border type ON OFF states graphs and label colors Tiling patterns can be selected for some of the Parts Lamps and Graphs Word Switch Settings WS _001 General Settings Shape Color Label Border Color Sees e F Color Fo BN E OC EN e Fy Bo WE OEN e F Coe ee e Colors There are 8 colors available in the color bar Use this bar to select the foreground Fg background Bg and other colors On a monochrome LT screen black blue green and cyan will be displayed as black same as background red magenta yellow and white will be displayed as white Fo ee ek Bo ee ek Color LT unit BK BL OR CY RO MG YL WH Black not White dis displayed played Monochrome LT unit LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide l Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 8 Blink When the Blink Blk Check Box checked the color bar is displayed in a darker color and the specified Part will blink on the LT s screen Fo Jm j io Blink Check Box ti _ Kote When either text characters or Mark backgrounds Bg are specified as N Black and the Bik Blink feature is turned on they will become transpar ent so that even when overlaid on other objects the rear object s color is also visible This function is useful when overlaying text on Switches Lamps and other objects For example Suvitch eee
311. important If the designated number s folder does not exist data will not be transferred to backup SRAM Also the Write Com pleted Bit Address will not be turned ON e When data is not transferred to backup SRAM the LT internal special relay LS2032 s bit 9 will turn ON 10 6 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Manual Transmission type 1 Filing data is transmitted to the External Device by touching a LT screen touch key Use the Filing Data Display to transfer data to from the External Device using the SRAM gt External Device touch key and the External Device gt SRAM touch key e Internal memory Backup SRAM E xte rnal Filing data Device 1 External Device Trigger 10 1 2 Filing Data Setting Control Word Address Filing Data SRAM 2 Screen Touch Keys 10 1 5 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 1 E Filing Data Transmission Flow Sr _ When filing data is sent back to the External Device from backup SRAM the Note newly sent data will overwrite the old In order to prevent this beforehand create another data block for the return value data See the figure below to send the filing data to and designate that block via the Control Word Ad dress File 0 E A Return Value B Return Value Manual Transmission type 2 Select the desired filing data via the screen s t
312. information manual name page number Refers to keys on the computer keyboard m Keyboard Compatibility List y Reference s Indicates an external device temperature controller inverter etc Does notinclude devices connected via the F lex Network External Device or DIO i Generic name for the LogiT ouch Series Graphic Logic Controller made by Digital Electronics Corporation Indicates LogiT ouch Editor Version 1 0 hereinafter referred as LT Editor this product LogiT ouch integrated development software made by Digital Electronics Corporation LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 E Keyboard Compatibility List This manual uses the following symbols to indicate computer keyboard keys The key names used by your computer keyboard may differ Please use the chart below for reference symtat key _ 101 Keyboard a Shift T Shift w a Back LOGITOUCH SERIES The LT Editor supports the following LT models Series Jiype yoe Al LC150B XY32SK ype Al GLC150B XY32SC ype B LC150B RSFL ype C LC150B XY32SK LogiTouch Series LC150 BG41 XY32SK 24V LC150 BG 41 XY32SC 24V LC150 BG41 F LEX 24V LC150 BG41 RSFL 24V Z x a te For the types of external devices supported by the LT Editor please refer to the External Device Connection Manual HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Preface HO
313. ing When 20 channels are preset the Add button is feature is combined with the number ofijclicked in the data sampling setting list display Trend graph channels created and theirjdialog box Delete unnecessary setings so that combined total cannot exceed 20 the total of Trend Graph channel settings and the data sampling setings will be within 20 There are no screens created for this screen The screen that you attempt to open cannot be created with the specified screen type Open a new screen The designated screen does not exist The screen that you attempted to open cannotbe found in this project Selecta screen from different existing project This object has anon black background and If this screen is used as the screen for the may not display properly on the LT Also be background color be sure to align its center point sure that your loaded screen s center point is correctly with the destination screen aligned with the object loaded to screen s center point Unrecognizable Bitmap The selected bit map file is either corrupted or File may be corrupted unusable by this software LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 5 Appendix 1 Error Messages Appendices E Library Item Placement Save Errors Error Message Cause Solution Grouping Nesting Limit Reached You are attempting to nest grouped objects more Unable to group more than these objects than 10 tmes Only 10 levels of nest
314. ing the Dec data format LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 47 Data Format Relative Column Settings General Info Data Format Size Style Alarm Settings Ch Absolute GIR Address Offset eS Data Logging Address D00000 Bit Length 1 16 16 Input Code fo No Code Ct 2 s Complement JA Code i Round Up Display Range Min alue Max Value 65535 Chapter 10 Advanced Features Relative Data stored in the Address entered in the Logging Address area is converted according to the Input Range area s val ues and the converted data values are displayed Address Offset The Logging Address is changed by the offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words 1s 4 the offset value becomes 0 to 3 Bit Length 1 16 Enter the Enabled Bit length of data to be stored in the Logging Address Input Code No Code Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express nega tive values Code Check this check box when displaying negative values Only available when selecting the Dec data format Round Up The decimal point numbers created dur ing relative value range conversion will be rounded up or off When this option is not selected those numbers will be rounded off Input Range Min Value Max Value Designates the range of values stored in the Logging Address
315. ings are included in the LT System Settings area Checksum Verification settings Screen Change Order in hierarchical display mode Screen Change according to standby mode time Shift to OFFLINE mode settings Setting the frequency of Keypad Display processing performed per scanning time LT unit s internal memory LS area backup function settings Error Display Reset settings Watch Dog settings Communication Monitoring Period settings Designate transmis sion wait time LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 9 Preface 10 Logic Program Restrictions LT variables are handled using 32 bit device Low High order Display function by parts cannot handle real numbers Values different from the input values may display during monitoring due to the difference in the real number accuracy between a personal com puter and the LT If the LT s logic time scan time becomes too long the sampling time designated for the trend graph may not be accurately maintained When using the Memory Link Method the change in the value of vari ables cannot be entirely displayed by a trend graph All LT Retentive Variable data is retained by SRAM backup memory that uses a lithium battery The battery s back up period lasts approximately 60 days in its initial condition fully charged and approximately 6 days when the battery life is almost finished If you need to back up data for a longer p
316. ion Saten S a All t3 Screens Fiap E w Tie Tapen Tupe All gt iA Internal Settings Internal Settings System Information w Filing Data 4 Data Sampling y Overvrite 3 Merge fe Ovenwite 3 Merge w Data Loging Settings w D Scnpt Functions te Overnwite 3 Merge m Global D 5 cript i Overmite 3 Merge 4 10 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing wae Project Editing This feature allows you to delete a project file PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Delete command 2 Select the project to be deleted from the screen list To select a project located in a dif or enter the desired project s file name Then click ferent folder change the directory on the Delete button to that folder 1 2 2 Selecting an Existing Project Cub Factory A te When you double click on the Mie Factory lt UF Soda Ite project name selected in step 3 you can skip the Deleted com mand File name _Delete D EZEN External Device Type 3 Click on the ves button to delete the project E Important Once the Delete command is performed it cannot be un done LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 11 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT wee Rebuilding A Project R
317. ion Add the data ofthe preset composite picture name to the BLOCK section An unexpected data case is found in the intermediate file This does not occur normally The temporary file created during conversion may not have been written Check the free disk Space and disk condition and retry conversion The specified composite picture is not found when converting the INSERT and DIMENSION entities Add the preset composite picture data to the BLOCK section The reference layers of the composite picture are more than 10 layers A compound graphic with more than 10 layers cannotbe converted Correct the graphic data so that the number of layers will be 10 or less The output LT screen size afer conversion exceeds 16 K bytes The subsequent data cannot be converted The format of the LT data is notcorrect LT data which is not supported may be involved or the screen data is corrupt Use the Editor to save the screen again and retry conversion The checksum of the LT screen read is not correct The data may be corrupt Use the Editor to Save the screen again and retry conversion The screen being called is notfound in the project Create a destinaton screen or delete the data which calls the screen The mark screen being called is not found in the project Create the destnaton mark screen or delete the data which calls the mark LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 13 Appendix 1 Error Messages Append
318. ion and editing capabilities for creating LT display screens E Programming Functions Utilizing Window s easy to use interface you can quickly and easily de velop logic programs that conform to the IEC 1131 3 standard LT Editor provides I O drivers that can be selected according to the LT type Logic programs are developed with the LT Editor s Logic Program Editor For more information on the Logic Program Editor please refer to the online help Also the Logic Programming Operation Manual provides tutorials for learning logic programming procedures as well as providing lists of instructions and variables used in Logic Programs It also explains the operation of the LT main unit E Drawing Functions You can create a screen by drawing objects and placing Parts A large variety of pre made Parts and D Scripts allow you to quickly display various operations and objects A set of logic programs created with the Logic Program Editor and a Part s display function enable you to make a drawing that corresponds to logic program operations For example you can show the variables on the LT screen and set a value to the variable using a touch panel switch LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 1 Overview Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 1 1 Prior to Operating the LT Follow the procedure below to create projects for the LT unit 1 Preparation Before using the LT make sure that you have al
319. ipt command tool box l when this check box is checked Enter a function name D Script Function Untitled Function Hame Show Toolbox Y a Enter the D Script s action program to perform Data Type En F Displays defined func tion names Data Length 16 Bit IFI Code Enter an expression Press HELP for examples Message area window Function Name Enter the name of your Function here Once a Function 1s created that Function name is displayed in the Function area Up to 20 characters can be used for a Function name Alphabet characters numbers and _ The following function names are reserved DO NOT use these names Important IJ Gk II kk rise fall rise_expr timer set clear toggle if else endif b_call Bcall dsp_rectangle dsp_line dsp_dot dsp_circle dsp_arc Call and or not memcpy memset loop break 10 READ IO WRITE E Deleting D Script Settings Here existing D Script settings can be deleted After selecting the D Script settings to be deleted from the listing and clicking on the Delete button the Confirm Script Delete dialog box will appear When the button is clicked on the D Script settings will be deleted When the button is clicked on the deletion command will be canceled
320. is input Each data format available is listed in the table below Data Format Code Data Length 2SPlav Decimal Digits Places ig T a 03 eee 09 When using 32 bit data the relationship between the top and bottom of the Word Address will differ depending on the External Device used S43 External Device Connection Manual Gin When the No of Display Digits is set to 5 and the Decimal Places is set to 2 XX a value appears on the Keypad Input Display as shown below Character Size The label s character size is selected here 2 2 9 Text E Keypad Display Color Shape Attributes The Keypad Display s border color data display color Text and interior color Plate are selected here 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors 2 52 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Keypad Display The Keypad Display s placement procedures are shown below K D 1 K D 1 Cance KD 1 to 3 KD 2 KD 2 Word Addresses KD 3 KD 3 D00050 to D00052 When the Keypad A Pop up Keypad will Display is appear and can re Input data touched ceive from the Keypad PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Keypad Input Display command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings area enter the Word Ad dress Keyp
321. isplay 1 Logging by the External Device Trigger Bit Address or at designated timing 10 2 3 Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings 2 Data display and edit via the Logging Display 10 2 4 Display Settings 3 Data transmission to LS Area via the Control Word Address 10 2 3 Data Logging Settings LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 27 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features E Managing Groups of Logging Data Logging data is grouped into files and blocks Up to 32 words can be logged in one time These logged words are called data A group of data is called a block and a group of blocks are called a file Be aware that the number of pieces of data in each block is considered to be the same E Backup SRAM s capacity Backup SRAM s capacity is limited Approximately 95KB and all blocks and records set up must be within these limits The capacity of Backup SRAM to be used for logging setting is calculated by the following formulas The formula varies depending on whether loop Operation is performed or not 10 2 1 Logging Function Loop Operation Without Loop Operation Used backup SRAM capacity byte 128 20 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces X Frequency of data logging X Number of blocks With Loop Operation Used backup SRAM capacity byte 128 20 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces X Frequency of data logging
322. it if so select otherwise select 4 After the data transfer is completed select the Trans fer menu Exit command or click on the icon REMARKS 7 2 2 Passwords If you enter an incorrect password three times or more data transfer can not be performed In this case repeat the transfer procedure from step 2 Invalid Password Please Retype password Cancel To cancel data transfer mode click on the icon LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 13 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS aa Sending Programs with the Logic Program Editor The Logic Program Editor allows you to send write logic programs alone to the LT that has been already set up You can also receive read logic programs from the LT Before sending logic programs alone be sure to select Send E Important Together command 7 2 4 When Sending Screens and Logic Programs Together To the LT E Sending Logic Programs PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select Control menu Edi 1 2 3 Creating Ta Editing Saving Logic Programs tor command or click on the icon to start the Logic Program Editor ee Lo rogi File Edt View Search lne Data Controller Help Bellei xta lala 5 akea SPL e ele eT T a This program runs a typical fast food restaurant soft drink dispensing machine e
323. ith the LT unit panel and deletes the error message when the communica tion error is reset System errors however cannot be reset regardless of this setting Extended Settings Watch Dog Monitors the communication status between the LT panel and External Device The LT unit sends OOFF to the External Device s word address at a specified time interval The External Device checks whether the communication is performed normally by confirming the OOFF command at the specified time interval Communication Settings Send Wait If the LT unit sends a command to the External Device immediately after receiving a response from the External Device the External Device cannot receive the command which will cause a communica tion error depending on the External Device In this case enter a value for the transmission wait time If a transmission wait time has been entered the LT unit waits for the preset time duration after receiving the External Device s response and then sends the next command to the External Device LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 3 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS E Tab Setting Items Each tab s setting items are described here Ste The setting items may differ depending on the LT type or External Device being used LT Settings LT Settings Factory 6 Ite Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communi
324. ith the Logic Program Editor you can place a Part corresponding with the instruction In the same way copying and pasting to a logic program a Part placed on the screen inserts an instruction corresponding with the Part E Conversion between Instructions and Parts Each instruction and part has counterparts that have been already determined Conversion from Instructions to Parts Below 1s the list of Parts to which each instruction is to be converted instruction Conversion from Parts to Instructions Below is the list of Instructions to which each Part is to be converted NO a Contact NC b Contact PT StartUp Contact NT StartDown Contact NO a Contact NC b Contact PT StartUp Contact NT Lamp StartDown Contact OUT M OutCoil NEG NM Reverse Coil SET SM SetCoil RST RM ResetCoil Numeric Display Graph Keypad Input ICTU Up Counter CTD Down Counter CTUD Updown Display Counter TON On Delay Timer TOF OffDelay Timer TP Pulse Timer BitToggle Switch Keypad Input Display LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 151 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E Pasting a Logic Program Instruction to the Screen Here the procedure for copying and pasting a logic program instruction to the screen 1s explained When pasting the instruction the type of Part to be converted to needs to be selected from the list e Before copying an instr
325. ixninsdideaenetseneysauivnieadhdenasentieadsindeaiabes 2 57 ZI Wile ING DE 0a e nannetesoseccueebousovssaneeiasageattonacnstannsoses 2 61 DA SADA MOOS FDIS NAY aE E 2 67 AtA Namene Displays gestae stn cusceticcutentacuteiepastaptieadaaawaninasesnenteete E aeaa Eaa 2 73 Dl Lo Message Display sarsencecsor Ta Neaseanteheneaseasiees 2 71 ZLO D D P E E 2 83 ALE WIG DS a S EE 2 86 P R E T VAY A E S onseusesnssoaueacaneoeesseenvote 2 88 2e Drone eirinen EEN E EEEE EE N EE N 2 94 Dorel WOE e E E ER A E E E A E 2 95 Dee EDE POI ee E E E 2 96 D2 T T E e E E E E EE 2 98 L C EO e E E E E T E A 2 100 De AO ancien poneeaeatanecuacaseacaananeeniceensedescaueccancaataes 2 102 Zi WAU E A E siseaenosneastagethsastotnsavoenen 2 104 Didnt WAM OM O e E EER 2 106 TLD O O a A E E A A eeeanpeacsusonseea 2 108 PAA E e E EEE S E E ESE A N A 2 111 DPA TG E E CCS E E A E A T E E T cogs 2 115 2 E AOAC M E o A A E 2 118 Dee ODJECE EA EEEE EOE EE ENEE 2 119 Ak DEelee ne ODJECE oaea E EE E E E 2 120 Dorel Mo e OB CCUG eaae E N R 2 126 Pa Se A OTO cest2aneastecnccantenteogssoaumsesaniasaaausease thaucat hosing iossesaeteniansaauscacnecacess chet 2 127 2A QO E cet secasra ros ananenuesnielo seuss E E homies 2 128 De CODY e a tapas stercuattevanesnscseperscens E T E E R 2 129 DD PaslO prereset alee sae vi vw sans tesa see E cesses 2 130 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Preface 2k Paso TASTE AC UIOW TO AU ois ecas cate ten eds
326. ize refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts yap Bar Graphs Bar Graphs are used to display External Device s Word Address numeric data in absolute or relative values This graph s display will change accord ing to Word Address data changes E Bar Graph General Settings Attributes lt When displaying Word Address numeric data in absolute values gt Select absolute or relative value display Enter comment data here Bar Graph Settings BA_O01 General Settings Graph Settings ShapeyColor Alarm Settings Enter the desired Word Displays the p Word Address Address to currently se EE LI Display Modest store graph lected Part data here a Peco Calls up the Part l IN Select th Shape Browser ra ane ais Part Shapes can be 3 Place Cancel Hel sheared data format from here Absolute Data stored in the Word Address is displayed in absolute values from 0 to 100 with Display Mode selected 100 to 100 Word Address Here enter the Word Address used for storing the Bar Graph s data Data Format The display data s format can be either Bin or BCD When Bin is selected negative numeric data can also be displayed
327. l D Script yee D Script Global D Script Limitations Limitations on BCD format operations If a value which cannot be converted into BCD format is found during operation the program stops running These values include A to F in hexa decimal format Do not use such values If the program stops due to non BCD values bit 7 in common relay information LS2032 in the LT turns ON This bit does not turn OFF until the LT is turned OFF or goes offline E g w D200 w D300 lt lt 2 80 If D300 is 3 shifting two bits to the left results in OxOOOC which cannot be converted into BCD format interrupts program execution w D200 w D300 lt lt 2 If D300 is 3 shifting two bits to the left results in OxOOOC Unlike the above example OxQOOC is the result of the operation to be stored in the memory and does not cause the program to Stop Limitations of zero operations Do not divide by zero in division and remainder operations If you do the program stops and bit 8 in common relay information LS2032 turns ON This bit does not turn OFF until the LT is turned OFF or goes offline Notes on delay during assign operation Using a device address in an assign operation may cause write delay because the LT has to read the address data from the External Device Consider the following E g w D200 w D300 1 1 w D201 w D200 1 2 Statement 1 assigns D300 1 into D200 However in statem
328. l number of transferable screens can be viewed in the Project Manager window by selecting the Project menu and then Project Information 4 4 1 Project Information 1 29 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 5 Screen Editor Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals Screen Editor Item Names and Functions LESA The names and functions of the LT Editor editor s screen items are as follows a Title Bar k Screen Data List b Menu Bar E MEE g Tool Bar l j Selection c Pull down Tool Box Menu EE Text fe tS Oe 2 l ae eine lt w i Zoom Box d Drawing s aE ss db Area cee h Tool Bar e Screen KEO 00 G00 Center Mark f Grid Points JF Parts M Obects g Status Bar h Tool Bar a Title Bar Displays the project file name screen number and title b Menu Bar Displays the menus used to operate LT Editor When you select a desired menu using the mouse or keypad the pull down menu c appears c Pull down Menu When you select a desired menu from the menu bar the pull down menu appears This menu includes various commands d Drawing Area Here you can create a screen for your LT unit The size of the screen you see here is designated via the LT Type setting you entered when you first created the project file Depending on the size of your PC s display the screen s entire display area may not be displayed In this case simply scroll
329. l the required hardware and have read all the specifications wiring and installation information Chapter 2 Specifications and Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 2 Design Screen Design a screen layout and create a logic program 3 Install the LT Editor Install the LT Editor on a PC GET LogiTouch Editor CD Jacket included with the LT Editor 4 Develop Logic Program Use the LT Editor to develop a logic program and set the operation mode LogiTouch Editor Operation Manual Logic Programming Guide 5 Create Screen Run Screen Setup Use the LT Editor to set up the screen and parts based on your screen design LogiTouch Editor Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 Transfer the Screen Data and a Logic Program Use the LT Editor on your PC to transfer the data and a logic program to the LT unit LogiTouch Editor Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 Monitor Logic Program Check the transferred logic program through the monitor feature of the LT Editor LogiTouch Editor Operation Manual Logic Programming Guide 8 Initialize the LT Initialize the LT based on how you will use it Chapter 6 Initializing the LogiTouch and LT Editor External Device Connection Manual 9 Operation Run the LT by connecting it to an External Device LT Editor External Device Connection Manual LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 3 Chapter 1
330. lace If you forget the password the Transfer function cannot be executed Important e The password is limited to 24 characters and only alphanu meric data no symbols can be used PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Setup menu Password command 3 Enter a password Register Password Please Enter Password Please Confirm Password po Warming Please remember to write down your password IF You forget your password screen transfer cannot be performed 4 Enter the same password again for confirmation and Ifa password has already been reg then click on the button istered the Change Password dia log box will appear Register Password Please Enter Password Please Confirm Password Warming Please remember to write down your password IF You forget pour password screen transfer cannot be performed Change Password Please Enter Password Please Enter New Password jo Please Re enter New Password LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide dsi 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS E Changing a Password The registered password can be changed or canceled PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager
331. lay Settings ND_001 data here General Settings Display Format Shape Color Alarm Settings Description Ward Address Enter the Word Fo Mpo e Address where Displays the currently se lected Part s image the display data is stored Calls up the Part Shape Browser Word Address Here input the Word Address where the display data is to be stored E Numeric Display Display Format Attributes Numeric Display ND_001 Enter the total number General Settings Display Format Shape Colar Alarm Settings of digits used not Data Display Format E including the decimal Select the Mo of Display Digits point in the display Data Format 32 Bit Decimal Places o E and Data i Decimal Decimal Character Size Enter the number of Length T o digits to be displayed T Octal after the decimal point Select the size used for Hep the label s characters Data Display Format Here the Data Display Format Code and data length are selected Choose a data format of either Decimal base 10 BCD Hexadecimal base 16 or Octal base 8 With the Code check box checked when you select Decimal negative numeric data can also be displayed No of Display Digits Here enter the total number of digits used not including the decimal point in the display Ge re When the No of Display Digits is set to 5 and the Decimal Places is set to 2 a e value appears on the Numeric Display as shown
332. layed You can change the setting of a desired item however the screen s type cannot be changed Project File Manufacturing Systern Screen Type Base Screen Screen Descriptions Operation Monitor Operation Monitor Aggregate Summary Trouble Keyboard Input Cancel 3 Click on the button to register the above settings If a screen with the same number exists the system asks if you want to replace the existing screen with the screen you are attempting to save If so click on the button If you do not wish to overwrite the existing screen click on the but ton Screen Already Exists Do you wish to Overwrite i Cancel LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS A comma cannot be used in a description After the screen is saved it will remain open If the screen is saved as a different screen number the screen of the up dated number will be displayed Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish E Closing a Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Screen menu Close command in the You can also close the screen by Screen Editor clicking on the x button at the up per right corner of the window 2 The screen will close drawing area If you attempt to close an updated screen without saving it the system asks if you wish to save the current screen When you attempt to save a new If you click on the bu
333. le memory capacity LOE wesvessccccctcsssescsacesens Displays the data volume cur rently used in the LT unit LETEC ccecsenivsesewesesscveceeses Displays the amount of Free or remaining memory LT Memory Information Max Block Size Used Free REMARKS Number of banks provided in the LT is 32 The capacity for each bank 1s 59526 bytes A single screen file cannot be stored in several banks Therefore the sum of the remain ing memory capacity for each bank is not always equal to the transfer rable screen data volume LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide elf 7 3 Options Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS E LT Version Information This feature displays the LT unit version information PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Options menu LT Version command The receiving of version information begins 2 After confirming the displayed information click on the button to close the version information window Check LT Yersion LT Type aLC150 Version We BB Date Thu Mar 22 13 55 55 2001 LT s Project File Factory 6 lte Date 01704719 16 37 7 18 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide sam SIMULATION B efore transferring screen data to the LT unit and connecting the LT unit to the External Device you can check the LT panel operation by running a simulation of your LT Editor program This chapter describes the
334. le name in the file name area Switching Library Files When selecting a Library file in an fs Op4 obid cpw other directory use the Look in Op4 obje cpw Op4 obif cpw 7 Spee window Op4 objh cpw In step 5 simply move the cursor to the desired Library file name and double click on it to openit By doing so the Step 6 but ton does not need to be used 2 164 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 7 Via the Screen Editor select the Library menu Register Library command or click on the Cl icon on the Draw Tool Bar 8 Input a Cell Number and Description In the Cell Number area the smallest of the currently open Library file s unused numbers will be automatically displayed To change it enter the desired number Save Library Cell Number OF Description aah 9 Click on the button to register the item Up to 200 libraries can be regis The registered Library item will appear in the Browser tered in one file R 100 switch E Using the Cut Copy and Paste Functions Library items can be Cut Copied and Pasted from the screen drawing area to Browser First select the desired Library item in the drawing area and then either Cut or Copy it then Paste it to the current Library Browser LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 165 Chapte
335. lect the Draw menu Fill command or click on the icon 2 Click inside the area to be filled The specified area will be filled If you click on a line the filling mode cannot be executed Be sure to click inside a completely en closed area if you do not the en tire Mark screen may be filled LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 39 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Entering Text The Text mode allows you to enter text on a Mark screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Text command or click on the icon 2 Enter character s and select either 8 x 16 dot font or Windows font 9 Windows Font Select io 3 To use the Windows font click on the Select Font and click on the Oo button Font style Bookman Old Style F Bookshelf Symbol 1 F Bookshelf Symbol 2 F Bookshelf Symbol 3 F Comic Sane MS Sample AaBbYyzZz Script Westem ia 4 Click on the Oo button An outline corresponding to the entered character s will appear Anal Black l 3 10 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Move the box to the desired position where the char If you move the character pattern acter pattern will be displayed to a position where another char The character pattern is displayed
336. lected from the grid pattern selection list box will be reflected to the current screen Grid Shift Start Point The Grid Shift Start Point is entered here The default setting has the start point in the center of the screen Pressing the button returns the start point to the center of the screen Grid Shift Start Point x po 2 214 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Style Select grid pattern display style from Dot and Line lt When selecting Dot gt lt When selecting Line gt me Screen Property Settings Here the screen display s environment is set up which effects both the method used to draw screens and displaying the Part addresses The user s work environment can be modified whenever necessary helping to reduce the time required for drawing Select the pull down menu Option s Screen Property command E Setting Screen Property Display The display state displayed or not of the items such as object Fill and setting information on Parts can be selected on the screen Editor Check the box of the items to be displayed When a box is not checked that item will not be displayed The settings on this screen will be applied to all the screens Properties cannot be set up for individual screens Screen Property Display Color T Fill Point im Multiple open with next pr
337. led informa tion about the File Name Display Operation Manual 2 1 12 File Name Display Switch Settings File Display FD_O01 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Automatic Switch Placement Method C Siri L5 JF Extemal Device gt SRAM BLEEE Roll Up C Evtemal Device US T Roll Down C LS gt Extemal Bewice Send To External Device From SRAM Not Selected Send To SRAM From External Device Not Selected Roll Up Selected Roll Down Selected Send To LS From SRAM Selected Send To SRAM From LS Selected Send To LS From External Device Se lected Sending To External Device From LS Selected LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe E Place Click on the Place button to display the Filing Name Data Display Change the size of placed Part if desired Settings Display must be placed to corre spond with the storing address of the filing data gt DEY External De Devices Disl Se To change the Filing Name Display s layout or attributes first ungroup it DN 1 Writing filing data to SRAM All filing data is written to SRAM when the Trigger Bit is turned ON Trigger Bit Address ON D00200001 a OFF Write Completed Bit Address e M0001 OFF Data processin p g LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 25
338. les cross Center To cancel the rotation click on the icon Clicking on the icon once reverses one 90 degree rota tion If an object is moved outside the drawing area by rotating the ob ject will not be displayed on the LT screen LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 12 Mirror X Mirror Y An object can be moved symmetrically around its center line with respect to the X or Y axis The display position of Parts Text Load Screens and Load Marks can only be moved symmetrically E Moving Symmetrically along the X axis PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select an object 2 3 1 Selecting Center Objects Pail The center point of the object is where two lines connecting the opposite handles other than the 2 Select the Edit menu Mirror X axis command corner handles cross Center or click on the g icon Point Line The object will move symmetrically with respect to the X axis If an object is moved outside of the drawing area by using the Mirror X function the part of the object outside the drawing area will not be displayed on the LT screen To cancel the change click on the icon E Moving Symmetrically along the Y axis PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select an object MOANA 2 3 1 Selecting Objects m Center The center point of the object is lt I where two lines connecting the opposite han
339. les horizontally Place the cursor on one of the handles of the object When the cursor becomes lt gt use the keyboard s either or key to scale the object up or down in the unit of dot Jet To cancel the re sizing click on the ES icon ote When re sizing an object while holding down the Ctrl key lines will snap to X 45 degree intervals Rectangular and Scale Linear objects will become square shaped objects and ovals will become circles Also if the Shift key is held down all selected Lines Rectangles Ovals Scales Text and loaded Marks will scale up or down proportionately When scaling a Part with a Label holding down the Ctrl key causes the Label to scale up or down together with the Part When selecting an oblique line 8 handles will be displayed Click on the line again and 8 handles will change to 2 handles one at either end Click ing and then dragging on one end s handle fixes the opposite end in place and releases the dragged end and allowing the line to pivot freely Multiple parts may be selected and then scaled up down However the following parts are not scaled up down but their positions are moved Half pie Graphs Pie Graphs Meters Trend Graphs Alarms Keypads and Picture Displays To move and scale up down an object designating its coordinates can be used 2 3 16 Changing Coordinates LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creatio
340. letion click on the icon 2 140 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 10 Here the procedure for aligning and centering object s are explained E Alignment Dialog Box Alignment a Resets the X axis OWS me pe settings current align ETE g ment settings q Aligns above the X axis p Aligns on the X l axis Resets the Y Aligns below the l axis settings gA ac Hep X axis Aligns to the left Aligns on the Y Aligns to the right of the Y axis axis of the Y axis E Aligning Object Positions PROCEDURE REMARKS 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Align command or click on the Fa icon 3 Select the type of alignment from the Alignment dia While an individual label can be log box aligned groups of labels cannot In this example select the icon X axis Bottom Click on an object to select its handles and then click on its Label to select the Label s handles Text characters on both Numeric or other and do not select any vertical Y axis position ox types of Displays can be aligned in EA the same manner TO To align objects combine the se lections shown below aion Hee _ Horizontal position Up Center Bottom 4 Click on the button to align the objects vet position Left Center 1g To cancel the alignment click on the icon LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0
341. lf sized characters will be centered DIMENSION Dimension Indicator During conversion the breaking down of a grouped object Block is performed by referring to the Block s sections which indicate the Block s component Part objects However dots will not be converted INSERT Inserting Object A grouped object defined in the Block section will be broken down into each drawing object and converted Up to 10 layers of nested data will be converted However since all the data will be converted into a single layer on a single screen the objects over the limit file capacity will not be converted Although the rotating angles and the number of lines and columns can be converted lines and columns of the objects over the limit will not be converted their ratio scaling will not be converted The grouped object created in Layer 0 will be converted based on the inserted layer s colors and line types however a grouped object created in an other layer level will not be converted based on the inserted layer s colors and line types In this case if BYBLOCK is specified to the grouped object the inserted layer s colors and line types will be used Simulated object sectioning hatching data cannot be converted since when the Block section s hatching data pattern 1s converted into each drawing object that data size can exceed the LT file capacity If another file s grouped object has been inserted or another fil
342. lias Change GP Change PLC Change Project Manager Convert Address Copy Screen Delete Project Device Monitar What is it Display Type Editor GP Type GP PE communication New Project New Screen PC GP communication Preview E Calling up Help from a Dialog Box When you click on the button in the dialog box or press the F1 key during execution of a command a description of the currently executed command will be displayed Bit Switch Settings BS_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Description Operation Bit Address ei a on or kloniko Monitor Bit Address 0000 Bl Function i2 Bit Set Browser i Bit Reset 7 Momentary i Bit Invert E Interlock Interlock Address jee konan Blii Touch available condition 2 Bik Oiu G Bik Oth Pe LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 2 Browsing the Home Page The procedure to connect to Digital Electronic Corporation s home page is described here To browse the home page you must have hardware environ J ment to access the Internet You also must have a browser to view the home page and subscribe to an Internet provider Please understand that Digital Electronics Corporation can not respond to any questions about your Internet connection Operating procedures Heip Connectto _ Add Edit Delete _ button
343. lick on the E icon 2 Select the type of screens to be listed By checking the Preview check The screens will be automatically listed box the selected screen image can oven Screen be viewed in the dialog box Project File Factory Alte Screen M tren Di ee E By changing the Open Screen dia log box s size the screen list dis play area can be enlarged so that more screens can be displayed To print the screen list refer to 9 1 E Print Settings 4 2 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 1 Screen Editing E Copying Screens This feature copies a screen from the current project file PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the icon 2 Select a screen to be copied from the list and click on the Con button 3 Specify the Start Screen Number of the copy desti To select several screens simulta nation and copy count Then click on the OK neously dr ag the mouse down the button list or click on the target screens while pressing your PC s key The screen will be copied for the designated number ae key consecutively from the Start Screen No When selecting multiple screens si multaneously copy will be per formed only one time E Important Once the Copy command is performed it cannot be un d
344. ll screens to be printed Ee Note When the summary of the Part list is printed its right edge may get outside 2D the paper In this case open the Option dialog box by clicking on Options button in the Print tab and then reduce the left margin LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 9 5 9 1 Print Settings 9 6 Chapter 9 Printing By selecting the Project menu Print Preview you can preview the screen image to be printed Setting items are the same as those of printing Instead of clicking on the button click on the Preview button E Print Preview Screen Starts Previews Previews Toggles between Scales up printing the next page Cisol ay Peverse Setting Touch hub H inter Tue FH inter Color G rection Fewer hhe Setting Se tam Start Address hachire ALi Feadi ro Area Size Link Type the previ previewing one page down the ous page per screen and preview previewing two pages per screen Closes the print preview screen Print date aS a 4 1446 Factory B 70 Test pew and project a file name B LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 ADVANCED FEATURES l he filing data recipe and logging functions are advanced features that increase the performance of your LT unit IOT a Filing Data Recipe Features IO E EAA NAN Logging Feature LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation G
345. logging period elapses loop operation becomes the same status as non loop operation e g Start time 09 00 End time 18 00 Time period 3 hrs If the 15 00 logging was skipped due to the LT s power being turned OFF lt Without Loop Operation gt lt With Loop Operation gt Block 1 Logging Logging Logging at 09 00 Logging at 12 00 Read Error Logging C Reader 5 00 Logging at 18 00 Block 2 Logging Logging Data logging at 15 00 is Data logging at 15 00 is stored as a stored as a read error read error Same as withoutloop operation LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging E Display Dats lous satin el Display ON OFF one setae Dov vine see Click on this check box to display data i ie aa using the Logging Display hice Block Nane Ron No of Char tem No of Data Rows No of Data Col Row S ettings venm E Display Block Name a EE ee t Check this check box to display data together with its Block Name No of Block Name Rows Enter a value here to display block names in multiple rows Up to 3 rows can be set up No of Data Rows Set up the number of rows in the data display area No of Calc Rows Set up the number of rows in the calcu lation area Up to 4 rows can be set up Column Settings Display Block Name Check this check box to display data together with its Block Name No of Char Item Designate the maximum number
346. lygon Displays the currently Select one of selected Polygon the tiling patterns Sets the Color oes e and blinking if Bg E U E Blk desired E Drawing a Polygon PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Filled Polygon command or click on the icon 2 Set attributes of a polygon to be drawn Select Colors and Tiling Pattern if desired Filled Polygon Fo DN N a ll E Eo p a a _ E 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on the start point a 2 106 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 4 Left click to designate the positions of the Polygon s vertices Repeat this for as many vertices as needed Here points b and c are also shown 5 After defining the final vertex c right click or press to complete and fill the Polygon Points a and c are joined and the object is filled a About Filling a Polygon REMARKS Up to 100 corners faces can be created In step 4 holding the key causes lines to be drawn at exactly 0 45 or 90 degree angles To cancel the drawing click on the icon Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes When a polygon s segments overlap the filling alternates so that areas next to each other do not display the same pattern As a result areas wi
347. m the Load Screen List Clicking on the left most number of a screen to be changed will select highlight it To delete multiple Load Screen Lists simultaneously simply drag the cursor to select the screen numbers Then click on the Delete button and the dialog box will appear to confirm the command If you click on button the screen will be deleted To cancel the request click on the button When selecting multiple screens click on the Yeal to delete all of them and click on Noa to cancel any dele tions Contirm Delete Are you sure you want to delete 27 mA Display of Screen Level Change Structure The nesting of Load Screens that have been set up on the currently edited screen 1s displayed In this way a multiple nesting condition can be viewed 2 2 10 Nesting Select the View menu Load Screen Nesting Display command Load Screen Nesting Each screen will be displayed via the following symbols Screen Type Symbol Base sereen B LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 229 2 8 DXF Conversion 2 230 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion This feature allows you to convert DXF Drawing Interchange File file data into Base screen data and to convert Base screen data into DXF file data A DXF file is on Auto Cad drawing file Important 2 8 1 DXF filenames must be alphanumeric DXF can be used for the Release 12
348. m will ask about the next alarm If you select Yeste ai all existing alarms will be overwritten If you select Notoal you will return to the menu screen Add Basic Alarm Start Address O01 COO00000 f E Aam Tie Mumber of Bits to Add fe Alarm Summary Cancel a Alarm Message Add Offset Message Message Color REMARKS If a symbol is specified for the start address the added addresses will be displayed as follows Example Assume that the start ad dress is TEST lt Symbol and that the number of added bits is 4 The addresses are consecutively added as shown below TEST TEST 1 TEST 2 TEST 3 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 9 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS PROCEDURE REMARKS Confirm Alarm Replace Alarm No 5 already exists Oyvernyrite E Changing Alarm Attributes You can easily change any alarm s attributes Change Alarm Alarm Type Alam Summary 2 Alarm Message Message Color Fo Bee E e e L O D N _ Bk PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the line of the alarm to be changed If several lines are selected the at In this example we will change an attribute of an item tributes of the selected lines can all in the alarm message alarm summary area be simultaneously changed BitAAddress Tre To select several lines drag the mouse 3 xomo Bulletin b
349. matic address increment is not used Parts will be copied using the same address as their original ones ae When the original object s Address is a symbol Logic symbol the automatic XX address increment is not performed LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 137 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E g When duplicating with the settings shown below BBBRBe BAAB orizontal 4 Di i al Add Offset FT EY if He ical Apply Device Comment EAHA Alias addresses are not increment ed Reflection of Device Comments When the Apply Device Comment check box is marked with a check the device comment corresponding to an address assigned by the automatic address increment will be reflected in the Description Field For Parts designating multiple Addresses however the device comment correspond ing to an Address designated as the Reflected Description Address is re flected The Reflected Description Addresses for different Parts are shown in the table below lt Reflected Description Address Table gt Automatic input address Word Switch Toggle Switch amp h Trend Graph Keypad Input Displa ile Name Displa Data Logging Displa Numeric Displa Message Displa ispla Time Displa hic Displa Data Samplinc 2 138 Operation bit address Word address en Operation bit
350. matically Send Changed Screens mode Send User Selected Screens Select the transfer 5e y i Automatic Setup Use Extended Program tA Force System Setup 2 Do NOT Perform Setup Setup CFG file t English i Japanese ta Selection Sends the simulation protocol to the LT unit SANIT 8 1 Simula Select the setup mode Transferring Information Locate the setup information file tion Procedure CLO GITOUCHS protocol gpsetupe cfg Send Information im LT System Screen W Control Data Upload Information Check this box if you wish to send upload information to receive data from the LT unit Upload parameter data must be included to Receive data from the LT unit If the LT unit s memory is insufficient to include the important Upload parameter data data can still be transferred from your personal computer to the LT unit However if the upload pa rameter data is omitted your personal computer cannot re ceive data from the LT unit LT System Screen Check this box if you wish to transfer LT system settings information along with other data to the LT unit T4 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Control Data Check this box if you wish to send logic programs along with other data to the LT unit When transferring system programs or protocol programs however l
351. may take a very long time for a large number of messages Continue 3 Specify the file name and file type ALA or CSV with which the exported alarm data is saved and click onthe Save _ button Enter a comment if desired If the same ALA file name already exists the system asks if the existing file must be overwritten If it must be overwritten select Pove If it should not be over written select Aalam 1 4L File name Alarm product 1 Save Save as type ala F Com Desoinions Do oo CMY Documentstest ala already exists Do you want to replace it 5 Click on the export mode LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS 5 13 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS E Alarm Import Alarm data saved as a file is imported to the currently open Alarm Editor Files with the extension of ALA or CSV can be imported To import alarm data from a CSV file only the specified type of alarm can be imported from all the registered alarm PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Alarm Editor s Alarm menu Import command 2 Click on the button Alarm Editor Thiz operation may take a very long time for a large number of messages Continue 3 Select a file ALA or CSV to be imported or Overwrite enter the file name Then specify an import method All current alarm registration num be
352. mbol Keypad will be accepted with a click on the Enter key A Part s specified address can be entered so that it is displayed during Base screen creation 2 7 2 Property Settings Regardless of whether addresses are designated as either displayed or not displayed during Base screen creation they will not be displayed on the LT panel after screen transfer LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 6 w The ID number of the Part Shape is dis played here Reverse video highlighting indicates it is E Selecting a Part Shape Click on the General Settings Area s Browser button in the dialog box and the Shape Browser hereafter called Browser will be displayed The Browser s Part Shapes are stored in a Part File PDB file separate from the main Project File LTE file Searching through different pre made Part files allows you to easily find useful Part Shapes for almost any applica tion Click on a Part number and then the button or double click directly on the Part number to select a Part Shape Browser disappears Part File and Part Shape lists for each file are included in the LT Editor Parts List Manual Shape Browser Clicking here scrolls through the Part Shapes in this file Calls up a list of the other Part files selected Shows the ID number of the Shows the Path name of the currently selected Part Sha
353. me Method Select this option when performing data logging by triggering logging start at the designated timing Data Logging Start Address Designate the Start Address of the Ex ternal Device device where data to be logged is stored No of Words Designate the desired number of words counted from the Start Address Up to 32 words can be designated 10 33 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features Start Time Designate the first data logging start time Duration Designate the time period that data log ging is performed periodically S sec ond setting options are 00 15 30 and 45 with 15 second inter vals When designating data logging time data logged from the start to end times is handled as 1 block Read Count Designate the frequency of data logging between the Start time and End time Based on the frequency set here the End time is determined Block Count Designate the number of data blocks Data logged for the number of blocks designated here is handled as a file When designating data logging time data for a block is logged per day 1 lt Times x Blocks lt 2048 Data Logging Auth Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When the Bit Address designated here is turned ON and it becomes the designated logging time data logging is performed External Device to LT Block s Finish Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When data lo
354. mouse over desired adjacent screens or you can select screens individually by clicking on them while pressing the key Project File Factory A Ike Screen B Screen Type cove Base Screen i creen Edi View Optio Draw Parts Special Libra window Help SB lela ale aloe tnele 29060 xR well OO amp be ii amp 09 wl fa Ba paa i Al PME e Tel gt eeuveaceenr e 8 Ko_001 0000 10 11 V2 1 T2 w Parts ical Objects 14 S E i 15 Changes Telte haz Ci Link Seect z Change Order r Doui MBE Ready Cs Ce 1 14 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 2 From Start to Finish E Saving a Screen PROCEDURE 1 Select the Screen menu Save command or click on in the Screen Editor The current screen will be saved overwriting the previ ous one Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals REMARKS After the screen is saved it will re main open When you attempt to save a new screen the Save As dialog box will appear 1 2 4 Saving a Screen under a Different Name E Saving a Screen under a Different Name PROCEDURE 1 Select the Screen menu Save As command in the Screen Editor 2 The type number and title of the current screen is disp
355. mports the symbol name Enter the symbol name to be replaced with a number added The symbol If no symbol name is entered the original symbol name name cannot be overwritten plus sequence numbers will be imported Replace The same symbol name will be overwritten Do not import The same symbol name will not be imported 3 Select an import method and execute it To import the specified symbol according to the current settings click onthe ox button To import the cur rent Project file s all the symbols according to the cur rent settings click on the DoFwai button To cancel the import click on the stop _ button Symbol Import Word symbol Line 1 15 ord2 is already defined word symbol Line 11 15word2 3 Replace ta Do not import EX te e Amount of the Symbol data created or imported via the Symbol Editor is X not limited However the number of device comment characters is up to 20 e Items with an inappropriate device name are not imported 4 24 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing E Exporting Symbols and Device Comments Data registered via the Symbol Editor is exported and saved as an LBE or CSV file By importing this data the Symbol Editor data can be shared among Projects Sie NG PROCEDURE ote Logic symbols cannot be imported with the Symbol Editor REMARKS
356. msters Simulation ProroC Ol sesvevdc cassia iaasaasrcccenvextapcssinsesnntaxutantasneccenterticesuncianent 8 8 Gals Petrone Gs til Oe E A 8 9 CHAPTER 9 PRINTING Daw MMMM SOU GS voce cece savevesercessaeesssecesecasesacecseuvesccassseassseeussecasssuasvsceucevecesscossc lt esssvesceeee 9 2 OLL Pinno escenes acter bs ete deouseus aes taedeosteceticesuned suoovsqeacgrentaivensctebehaaubixas 9 2 Awe Wein FRC VIC Wy actscece sees ns apasen ces E 9 6 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 15 Preface CHAPTER 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 101 TA Dala CIR CCID cecececceccavecvavcssecsencssecexucestcoercsnessiacensesencevesvinessocserestesvisiers 10 2 10 1 1 Filing Data Recipe Function s csccaceteccssriuescduntdacdanansbcntdeiatassbentdsadanensbenacedebouseueueds 10 3 PO SOT Data Seting sisisar a EEEE E 10 9 WS PE DN 11S e 10 12 10 1 4 Automatic Filing Data Transmission sietsiscasscsveseoricauncatscericesivatcueisessssacceereivaiiess 10 15 10 1 5 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 0 c0ssssssdacaoncaenaenenssorsesneedacsentennsaonnedes 10 16 10 1 6 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example ccccccccccsssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 10 22 10 2 Logting Function sc seccecvccceescescsssvevesconscescsssucvsceoescesssesueveeconscetssesucesessescesssesuers 10 27 10 2 1 Logging PICO serseri EE EAEE 10 27 102 2 Logeine Data Read MUNE sericese ai 10 31 102 Daa Lorrie ar se ices ester E EA deere EE 10 32 10 24 Displ
357. munication cycle time or 150ms whichever is longer as the trigger s OFF time For communication cycle time details External Device Connection Manual 1 1 4 2 1 3 Special Relays Write Completed Bit Address LS2032 Bit 9 Normal data transmission Data transmission error N 10 10 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe External Device amp SRAM Data Transmission Settings Here select the method used to transmit filing data either from backup SRAM to the External Device or from the External Device to backup SRAM Select this setting when performing automatic data transmission using the Contorl Word Address feature External Device Controlled Transfer SRAM gt External Device When this check box 1s selected automatic data transmission via the Exter nal Device s trigger is set up If this box is not checked data must be transmitted manually using the Editor area Toolbox s Filing Data Display Control Word Address SRAM lt gt External Device Designates a Word Address where the filing data transmission trigger and mode data are stored 0 Control Word Address 1 10987 Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted 5 1 Reservation Reservation All OF F All OF F 1 SRAM External Device 2 Block No OFF ON External Device SRAM 0 Transmit Completed Bit Address SRAM lt
358. must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Bit Operations k lt gt gt amp 1 TA isd Oe jie Cae e lt lt Shift Left Shifts the left side data to the left according to the number of bits designated in the right side data Only logical shift is supported gt gt Shift Right Shifts the left side data to the right according to the number of bits desig nated in the right side data Only logical shift is supported E g When operating the shift left shift one bit to the left Before 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 After OT IOUT OT ONTO OFT 11010 T 1 is rounded off 0 e amp bit wise AND Evaluates 2 bits and returns value 1 if both bits have value 1 if not returns 0 e bit wise OR Evaluates 2 bits and returns value 1 if either bit has value 1 if not returns 0 e bit wise XOR Evaluates 2 bits and returns value 1 1f one bit has value 1 and the other has value 0 if not returns Q0 e bit wise NOT Evaluates 2 bits and returns value 1 if both bits have value 0 if not returns 0 Set Bit Address 0 1 Turns a bit ON 2 192 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e Clear Bit Address 1 0 Turns a bit OFF e Toggle Bit Address 10 0 1 Toggles a bit between ON and OFF
359. n Pie h The frame of the File Name Display size will be dis played in the drawing area LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 65 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 7 Click the mouse button where you want to place each To cancel the placement click on attribute the icon 12348 B7sa0 s EA TA 8 Select the placed File Name Display Then select the The File Name Displays are Edit menu Ungroup command or click on the grouped To change any attribute icon to ungroup the File Name Display and alter first ungroup the File Name Dis each item s position and size plays and then change the attribute 2 3 12 Group Ungroup 2 3 15 Changing Attributes If Use LS Area is selected the address for the LS area can be SRAM DEI changed after ungrouping the File Name Displays 2 66 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS make Data Logging Display Data created in the data logging settings can be displayed and edited on the LT unit iN F After the data logging settings place the Data Logging Display Important For registering logged data refer to 10 2 Logging Function Sr Only one Data Logging Display can be placed on each screen Note The Data Logging Display cannot be set simultaneously with Keypad Input Display Data that could not be logged due
360. n abling you to change the data a aur Le Pets 8 4 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 8 Simulation 8 1 Overview E Selecting a Display Type Select the types of Parts used to display device information Select the Options menu Display Type Settings command Specify the Parts to be displayed When you select All Type information on all Parts will be displayed Display Type Settings All type T Bit Switch T_ Trend Graph im Word Switch im keppad Display T Function Switch im Alarm Display im Lamp T Numeric Display im Bar Graph im Message Display im Fie Graph im Picture Display I Half Pie Graph D Filing Display im Meher im Logging Display E Setting up the Device Memory Even after the simulation function has been closed device information can be saved to the Project File Select the Options menu Device Memory Settings command When the Backup check box is marked device information is auto matically saved when the simulation function 1s quit When the simulation starts up again the same device status will be displayed Clicking on the Device Clear button resets all device settings to 0 Device Memory Settings LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 5 6 l Overview 8 6 Chapter 8 Simulation E Movement Settings LS devices can also be simulated in the range from LS002
361. n Guide 2 127 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 3 4 SCT Si Here the procedure for cutting an object deleting it and placing it on another screen is explained When an object is cut it is stored in the Clipboard E Cutting Moving an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select an object 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Cut command or click on To cancel the Cutting click on the the icon icon Then the selected object will be cut 3 Open the object s destination screen and select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Then the outline of the object cut from the previous screen will appear 4 Position the cursor and click on the point where the To cancel the pasting click on the object is to be placed ian The object that had been Cut from the previous screen will be pasted at the new location I An area where text graphics or both that have been Cut or Copied are temporarily stored The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted copied from the Clipboard using the Paste function However once the Copy Cut command is executed the data stored in the Clipboard is replaced therefore only the data from the most recent Copy Cut command can be Pasted 2 128 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS ED Copy Here the procedure for c
362. n Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 71 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 4 In the Switch Settings tab select the function switch type that is to be placed automatically and specify the number of rows columns scrolled If necessary select a color for the special switch in the Switch Shape Color tab Logging display LG_ O01 General Settings Data type Color Switch setting Switch Shape Color Select Place Switch T Up TF Down J Right I Lett 5 After entering and selecting all the attributes click on the button The border of the Data Logging Display size will be dis played in the drawing area 6 Click on the point where the function switch will be placed 2 1 Parts REMARKS To cancel the placement click on the icon The Data Logging Displays are grouped To change any attribute ungroup the Data Logging Displays by clicking on the E icon before hand 2 3 13 Group Ungroup If you double click on the function switch placed on the screen the ad dress confirmation screen for parts will appear enabling you to change the address 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 72 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 14 Numeric Displays This Part displays host Word Address numeric data as an absolute value E Numeric Display General Settings Attributes Enter Comment Numenc Disp
363. n Switch command or click on the icon 2 Designate the Function on the General Settings tab Function Switch Settings F5_001 General Settings Shape Color Label select Go To Screen o Select Bin a Data Logging Key a Dff line TJ Interlock E nter 1 0 Interlock Address Touch available condition i Bik On ED Bin Ob ose cance tt 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Part Select If desired select Colors and input a Label from the Shape ing a Part Shape Color and Label areas Shape Browser x rei i i Cancel l l l l BIEN sw _ 30002 sw_NO_B SW_3D004 s 30005 Sw_3D006 f Current POE File c propbswirpdbop4 Sd01 pdb Title Sw_3D001 ia 4 After all of Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Switch s outline will appear in the Base screen next to your cursor 2 22 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the point where the Switch s top left corner To cancel the placement click on is to be placed the icon If necessary use the Switch s handles to alter its size To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen calls up that Part s At tribute Setting dialog box 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Here a lamp is created wh
364. n before drawing a filled square also can be drawn Both normal non filled and filled squares can be beveled E Square Attributes Check this check box when draw ing a filled Square Rectangle S quare Rectangle x Displays the Selects the type of ol il currently se Square Rectangle lected Square 9 Solon ae Rectangle type Selects a line border type p es EES JI When selecting Corner this Select a Color and Fo Pe eek number desig blinking if desired 8o iiJIM m e nates the num ber of dots used lt Filled Square Rectangle Setting Screen gt S quare Rectangle 5 I Fil oe Comer 8 Select one of the tiling patterns H MERN AR Fo eee __ Square Shapes and Beveling types Square shapes and beveling types are as shown below Not beveled All corners are beveled with straight lines All corners are beveled with arcs When selecting Beveling input a bevel dot number Rounded 4 Line 4 The dot walue sets up Eoy this spacing 2 98 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Drawing a Square Rectangle PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Square Rectangle com mand or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes of the square rectangle to be drawn 2 2 3 Square At If desired select the colors line types beveling type and tributes Square Shapes and dot When drawing
365. n can be undone and the screen display returned to the previous condition Every time the icon is clicked on depending on memory previous operations will be undone in succession F The Redraw Screen function cannot be undone _ Important E Canceling an Action PROCEDURE REMARKS In this example a circle has been accidentally deleted 1 Select the Edit menu Undo command or click To cancel the Undo operation on the icon click on the icon The circle will reappear and the screen is displayed as it 2 3 23 Redo was prior to the deletion Redo 2 3 23 With this function an operation previously undone with the Undo command can be redone if performed immediately after the Undo command is used E Redoing the Previous Undo Command PROCEDURE REMARKS In this example the undone circle deletion will be re done 1 e deleted again 1 Select the Edit menu Undo command or click on the a icon The circle will reappear 2 Select the Edit menu Redo command or click on To Cancel the Reds operation click the icon on the icon The circle will disappear 2 3 22 Undo LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 157 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items ya Library Items The objects you created can be registered These registered objects are called Libraries You can call up and use the registered Libraries when ever
366. n is clicked on or the pull down View menu s either Normal Adjust to Fit or Full Screen command is selected and the Library display size can be changed When Normal is selected each Library size will be displayed relatively allowing you to check the relationship between Libraries for their size When the Adjust to Fit function is selected the Library item will be enlarged until it fits inside the Library window s borders When Full Screen is selected the Library item will be displayed in its actual LT screen size Library Type When the pull down View menu s All Objects Part Objects or Graphic Objects is selected the Library type s shown on the Browser can be selected All Objects Displays all the Library items in the selected Library file Part Objects Displays only those items that are Parts in the selected Library file Graphic Objects Displays only those items which are not Parts in the selected Library file LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 139 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items 2 160 selected folder E Switching Library Files Creating a New Library File When the icon is clicked on or the pull down File menu s New command is selected the Dialog box shown below will appear When a Description is input and the button is clicked on a new Library file will appear Selecting Calling Up another Library Fil
367. n sofware E Screen Transfer Errors CE rorMessage Cause Solution A different Extended Program is present in This extended program can only be sentto a LT the LT The LT s setup cannot be performed containing the same program Please change the LT type or install the extended task s program in the LT A different Extended Program is present injA differenttype of Extended Program is presentin the LT Do you wish to continue the LT Press OK to overwrite this program or Cancel to stop the transfer Selectng OK will change the LT s internal Extended P rogram Cannot transmit data at 115 2Kbps used ajThis error occurs when the speed of 115 2K bps Slower speed Change Data Transfer Speed cannotbe used Change the Data Transfer S peed to 38400 when sending data seting to 38400 and re try Appendix 8 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix 1 Error Messages E Screen Transfer Errors from previous page Error Message Cause Solution C Command Parameter ERROR Retry data transfer to the designated LT using Auto Setup If this message appears again the PC has a command related problem Or there may be an error inthe cable or in the PC Check both and retry data transfer If the problem persists the cable may be damaged If necessary contactyour local LT distributor Connected Device is not correct LT A device other than the LT or one that is not Supported
368. n your LT Series User s Manual sold separately For details refer to that manual GU E E A E Menu Setting Items LT Setup LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 1 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS me Menu Setting Items LT Setup In the System Settings mode you can easily select the LT unit s initial settings By doing this you don t need to manually set up the LT panel since the System Settings data is sent to the LT panel automatically After the System Settings data is sent to the LT panel you can also change those settings via the LT unit itself LogiTouch Series User s Manual sold separately Chapter 6 INITIALIZE Usage Pattern Screen LT Setup Entereach Click onthe Setup i parameter button to register the LT click on fem system settings Some setting commands are supported by the LT unit but not by LT Editor for Windows or vice versa 1 e are supported by LT Editor for Windows but not supported by the LT unit This section describes only the commands supported by LT Editor for Windows For a description of other commands refer to your LT Editor User s Manual sold separately Setting commands Supported by Only the LT Unit Setting Date Time Self diagnosis command Font settings English Korean etc Commands Supported by Only LT Editor LT Settings Checksum Enable
369. nd return to the previous condition Undo Used to redo the command canceled with the Undo eal Redo command Redo Used to move the dot pattern symmetrically relative to A Mirror X the vertical axis The symmetry axis is the vertical line that divides the screen into two equal sections Used to move the dot pattern symmetrically relative to db Mirror Y the horizontal axis The symmetry axis is the horizontal line that divides the screen into two equal sections Turn i Used to turn the Mark counterclockwise by 90 Used to turn the Mark clockwise 90 E Used to reverse the Used to reverse the whiteblackarea ofa Mark area ofa Mark Transparent ee dots are turned ON ina block 8 x 8 dots this block Background color becomes transparent LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 33 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Mark Drawing Area Structure The mark drawing area has the following structure When you edit a Mark you can use this for your reference Rotation Genter Point gt Mirror Y AKIS Mirror X AXIS 3 1 1 Drawing a Mark When drawing a mark you can use LT Editor s standard drawing functions Here the procedures for using each function are described E Drawing with Dots You can draw a Mark by turning ON OFF each dot When you click the left mouse button in the Mark drawing area each dot turns ON white When you click the
370. nd you to use a 100 or larger display area ieee Tool icon Display The Parts tool box tool bar and status bar can be designated as either shown displayed or not shown not displayed Each time you select the View menu s Screen Data Box Status Bar or Zoom Box as well as the Tool Bar command s Main Edit Draw Option Grid Snap Parts or Parts State Change sub commands these View Hide settings will toggle ON or OFF View Data Sampling List Parts List Load Screen List Load Screen Nesting Cross Reference List Preview 50 w Edit w Draw v Option v Gid Snap w Parts w Parts State Cha w Status Bar Zoom Box LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 25 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help im LT Editor Manuals and Help While you are learning how to use the LT Editor software please refer to the following learning aids Related User Manuals On line Help Topics Digital s Home Page For the help concerning the operation of the Windows operating system see the Windows software s manuals and help screens E Using LT Editor Manuals The following manuals have been created for the LT Editor software CD Jacket Describes LT Editor s installation procedures and system requirements Drawing Operation Manual Provides detailed explanation of operating pr
371. ng 2 212 CQ Setting up the Device Memory 8 5 Quitting LT Editor 1 17 Simulation Protocol 8 8 Quitting the Library Browser 2 174 Software and GP Setting Controls 9 10 Quitting the Screen Editor 1 16 1 17 Spacing 2 137 CRY Specifying Items to Be Copied 4 7 SRAM Information 4 36 Rebuilding 4 13 Starting GP PRO PB III for Windows 1 4 Redrawing a Screen 2 156 Starting LT Editor 1 4 Reflecting a Device Comment on the Parts List 2 222 State 2 11 Reflecting Device Comments 5 11 States 2 8 Reflection of a Device Commen 2 3 Status Bar 1 18 Reflection of a Device Comment 2 3 Structure of the Manual 5 Reflection of Device Comments 2 138 Style 2 112 Registering a Home Page Address 1 29 Style Font 2 11 Registering a Password 7 7 Switching Library Files 2 160 Registering D Script Editor 2 177 Symbol Editor Types 4 20 Registering D Script Settings 2 177 Registering Data Sampling Settings 2 208 Registering Symbols and Device Comments 4 22 Text Attributes 2 111 Rotating an Object 2 142 Text Color ON OFF 2 11 Tiling Patterns 2 95 Time Display General Settings Attributes 2 86 Safety Symbols and Terms 3 Tips for using the Pop up Keypad 2 54 Sampling 2 210 Title Bar 1 18 Saving a Library File Under Another Name 2 173 Tool Icon Display 1 25 Saving a Logic Program 1 11 TRADEMARK RIGHTS 2 Saving a Project 1 8 1 9 1 11 Trademark Rights 2 Saving a Project File under a Different Name 1 9 Transfer Settings 7 4 Saving a Screen 1 15 Transferri
372. ng a Screen to the Clipboard 2 153 Saving a Screen under a Different Name 1 15 Transferring a Screen Using a Password 7 11 Scaling An Object 2 127 Transparent Background Color 3 20 Screen Data Display 2 220 Trigger 2 178 Screen Data List 2 219 Troubleshooting advice 25 Screen Editor Item Names 1 20 1 23 Turn Counterclockwise 3 18 Screens that can be loaded to other screens 2 115 Types of Editing Functions 2 119 Searching for a Topic and then Display Help 1 27 Searching for a Topic by a Keyword 1 28 Searching for a Topic from the Contents Menu 1 27 Used Hairline Cursor 2 217 Selecting a Display Type 8 5 Using a Pop up Keypad to Input Values 2 55 Selecting a Part Shape 2 6 Using GP PRO PBIII for Windows Manuals 1 26 Index 4 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide
373. ng are allowed Not a library file The library fle selected in the library browser Cannot be used in this system Selecta file with a CPW extension Out of memory Memory is not sufficient to execute the operation mee fa other applications re allocate memory and then restartthe operation System error An error occurs when the library fle is being ee Reserve Sufficient free disk space and restart the operation Unable to convert memory block into cell The memory is not sufficient to execute the operation Quit other applications re allocate memory and then restartthe operation Unable to create cell list The library file is corrupt for some reason Use the provided rebuilding tool to repair the fle and then restartihe listcreation E D Script Errors el Error Message Cause Solution C Constant value out of range The preset constant value exceeds the specified range Enter a correct value D Scnpt function name has not been Do not click OK without entering the functon entered name you must first specify the functon name Please type the function s name in the Enter the function name description field Expression too complex Simplify the D S criptexpression See HELP screens for assistance if expression requires a non empty An expression is required in in the if clause If statement no expression is specified the if clause is ignored notbe recognized error Illegal address The entered address seting
374. ngs FI_001 Enter the data here General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Word Pesala Absolute Relative Address The currently ae Word Address used to selected Pie JF TE L Display Mode store graph Graph s image i data appears here w Select the Calls up the Part desired Shape Browser Data Format Parts can be selected directly from the Browser Absolute Data stored in the designated Word Address is displayed in absolute values from 0 to 100 with Display Mode selected 100 to 100 Word Address Here the Word Address location data is entered to show where the desired data is stored Data Format Select either the Bin and BCD display formats Display Mode With this check box W checked and the Bin data format is selected a negative numeric data can also be displayed LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 31 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 32 lt When displaying the data using relative values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter comment Enter the Pie Graph Settings PI_O01 data here General Setings Graph Sating Shape Cal Alam Sating Word Ad Th tl Description t Absolute dress to e currently E store graph selected Pie E ma I Display Mode data Graph S image BitLenath 6 f appears here Input Range Input Code select the i Nin Vaio P JEE Neces desired Data Calls up the Part ks
375. ngs Communication Setir Initial Base Screen Mumber Ss Alarm Character Size LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 5 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS Extended Settings x LT Settings Factory Bite l LT Settings l LO Settings Mode Settings Font Settings Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings Font Settin OO W Online Error Display Keypad Display 1 Europear Delete Error Display Priority Settings 2 Korean C Reset LT On Data Write Error i Taiwanese Phar 2 z a Mode F Keypad Display Priority ant Luvality i Standard 3 Standard fa Re Ty 4 High Watchdog Mii Dog Monitoring SEE f _ bakpsens System Area Backup Address and ite se Command Settings Time Settings l Error Handling Settings String Data Settings Word Address cooo Communication Settings Menu LT Settings Factory Bite LT Settings i IO Settings if Mode Settings Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings ee eee Transmission Speed Communication Param Ai eter Settings Soeren Data Length fe 7 Bits i 6 Bits Busy Ready Control a gt 0N OFF OTR ER Communication Monitor Time Settings 6 6 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS E LT System Settings PROCEDURE
376. ns stated in Appen dix 4 po ttem Check Is your personal computer s OS Windows 95 98 Me NT4 0 or 2000 Is the memory capacity greater than 16Mbytes Is your PC hard disk s amount of free space sufficient LT Editor Are all the environmentsetings correct will notstartup AAAA LT Editor CD J acket Is your personal computer hard disk s free space amounts uficient Double click on the Windows icon Double click on the drive in which LT Editor has been installed Use the File menu s P roperty feature to check the amountoftree disk space If the free disk space Is insufficient empty the trash box or delete unnecessary files from the hard disk Is the PC s RAM memory capacity sufficient Memory of 16 M byte or more is required Click the Windows 95 S tart button first and then click on the S etings Control P anel and System selections Click the virtual memory button in the system property dialog box and check that Auto S eting recommended is selected If M anual S eting is selected change the setting to Auto S eting recommended Restartthe PC and then restart LT E dibr Some applications do notwork well with LT E ditor and such an application may interfere with the startup of LT E ditor Quitall running applications and delete them from the Startup menu S tartup in the Windows 95 P rogram menu Restartthe PC and then restartLT E ditor Do the trigger commands Config sys Autoexec bat etc o
377. oO oo RPP eee 1 Specifying a Label s However specifying the Label s background color as background color as Black and Black does not allow you turning on Blk blink causes to see the background the background color to be color come visible States Only Parts which can have two states are displayed with this feature Dis play colors for Parts can be specified separately for each state Click on either state button to select it and specify that state s color using the color bar LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Alarm Settings In both graph and numeric value displays Alarms can be set up First click on the Alarm Settings tab at the top of the Dialog box When checking the Alarm Display box Check mark fj appears the Alarm setting items will appear Bar Graph Settings BA_001 x General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Sets the Alarm F iam Display Alarm Type val u e S Fo r m at ai to fixed or 9 Indirect variable T Alarm Range Mas Value 100 TH Sets the minimum and maximum Alarm values Fo eee E e Bo Bee e Sets the Alarm colors used Alarm Type The Alarm value can be specified as either direct fixed value or indirect variable value by simply clicking on the appropriate circle Alarm Range Here you can specify the maximum and minim
378. objects selected click on the Tool box s button then proceed with step 2 2 3 1 Selecting Objects How to Select Multiple Objects Selecting Objects by Type from a Multiple Selection LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 147 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E Confirming Addresses If a Part that requires an address has been grouped the Confirm Device Address dialog box shown below will appear whenever its attributes are changed the Part addresses are changed here Allows you to view either the Bit or Word Addresses of all the Parts in the currently selected group of objects Confirm Device Address Part Addresses are displayed here Parts Name Part ID Description Check this box to automatically change all the addresses of the Parts in this group that have the same Device Address Bit and Word Addresses Each Part s address is displayed To change an address click on the inside of each cell As shown above any Switches selected that have state changes will have both their Operation Bit and their Monitor Bit addresses displayed Address Range Conversion ot ote NG 2 148 When an address is changed and this check box is checked any other Part with the same device address will be automatically changed The address conversion is not performed in the case of symbol Logic symbol In the example above if the first bit address is chan
379. ocedures for all LT Editor s commands except those for logic program development Logic Programming Operation Manual Provides tutorials to help you to learn operating procedures of Logic Program Editor Also describes operation of the LT main unit as well as instructions and variables used in logic programs Parts List Describes the LT Editor s pre made Parts and symbols External Device Connection Manual Describes the methods for connecting the LT to the external devices of various manufac turers and system requirements E Using the Help Feature If you have any problems or questions during LT Editor operation you can view the explanations for each feature and setting via each window s Help button or from the main menu s Help feature The Help explains settings of each window and dialog box instructions and functions of a logic program as well as each driver s setting E Using the Home Page You can obtain the latest LT Editor information by addressing the Digital Electronics Corporation Home Page on the LT Editor screen 1 26 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 1 Browsing Help Topics To display the help screen select the Help menu or click on the button in the dialog box When multiple screens are loaded or many Parts have been registered on the screens the PC s system memory may not be Important suffi
380. of block name characters No of Data Col Designate the number of data display columns in the data display area Data Char Size Designate the character size for each data in the data display area No of Char Data Designate the number of characters in the data display area Preview The setting contents can be preview LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 57 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features Maximum Number of Rows and Columns Up to 60 columns and up to 2100 rows of data can be entered However since the file capacity is approximately 58KB depending on the No of Block Name Rows and No of Char Name designated for the cells these column and row limits will decrease lt Row Column Settings gt OQOOOQOOQOO J OQOOQOOQO J OOOQOOQOOQ VOIQVIVVD QQQQQ No of Block OOOQOOQOO J OVNVD OOOOQOO J OOOQOQOQ QQQQQ Names OQOOOQOOQOO J OQOOQOOQO J OOOQOOQOO OQOOQOQOQ QQQQQ 1 to 3 39000 30000 29999 29999 pence 20999 o_o 20999 29999 29999 i aks 29999 ie 20999 aa Loo Lo No of Char Col No of Block Char Col 1 to 16 1 1 1 to 16 No of Data Col 1 to 60 Row Setting When Using Loop Operation When the loop feature is used regardless of the logging frequency the data display will always be only one row The display row settings used during loop operation are as follows Data Display Row Only Block Name Row Data Display Row
381. ogic programs are always transferred regardless of the setting of this screen Communication Port Select a serial port to which the transfer cable is connected and a transfer speed Transfer Method Transfer Method 23 Send All Screens Automatically Send Changed Screens 3 Send User Selected Screens Send All Screens Transfers all screen data in a Project File to the LT unit Automatically Send Changed Screens Any screen data that have been updated in the current Project File are automatically transferred to the LT unit This transfer mode is only La effective when screens have been previously transferred to the LT unit Note When Automatically Send Changed Screens is used screens that have been Ne deleted not just updated from the Project File in the LT Editor program will not be automatically deleted from the Project File stored in the LT unit To completely replace all screens of the Project File stored in the LT unit be sure to use Send All Screens Send User Selected Screens When transferring a screen to a Project File stored in the LT unit you must specify the screen type gt No Filing Data and logged data can be specified to transfer them NG To select screens click on the names of desired screens while holding down the key Alarm Switch 7 Switch Production Ala Untitled Logilogo bmp Alarm File LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 13 7 2
382. oint Color 2 218 Filling a Mark 3 9 formal trade names 2 Freehand Drawing 3 5 Function Buttons 1 19 Function Switch General Settings Attributes 2 20 Functions 2 15 2 180 Functions and Settings 9 General GP Restrictions 9 General Information Symbols and Terms 3 Global Cross Reference 2 226 GP Settings 6 4 GP Type 1 5 Editing D Script Settings 2 175 2 178 2 180 2 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Part Type Summary 2 2 181 2 182 Editing Items on the Part Reference List 2 221 Editing Library Items 2 159 Editing Tools 3 3 Editing via the Load Screen List 2 228 Entering a Comment 2 3 Entering Addresses 2 4 Entering from a keyboard 2 4 Entering from a pop up keypad 2 5 Entering from a pull down list 2 4 Entering from the Address Keypad 2 5 Entering Text 2 113 etting Screen Property Display 2 215 Exporting a CSV File 2 223 2 224 Index 2 Grid Snap Settings dialog box 2 213 Grouping Objects 2 144 Ca How to Move an Object 2 126 How To Register a Home Page Address 1 31 How to Select a Single Object 2 121 How to Select Multiple Objects 2 122 2 132 2 134 How to Use This Manual 5 GQ I O Settings 6 4 ID Numbers 2 11 iling Setting Example 10 17 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Index Importing Symbols and Device Comments 4 23 Mode Settings 6 5 Modifying Library File Names 2 161 Modifying Library File Names Titles 2 161 Monitor Bit Address 2 14 Moving Symmetrically 2 143
383. oject file at the copying source Source The project file selected as the copying source is displayed Specify the screen area to be copied and a screen type If you are not copying a screen but other settings only select Internal Settings Destination The current project file is displayed When copying a screen from another project file specify the start screen number in the project file at the copying destination to start copying the screen Internal Settings Select the items to be copied among the global settings for each project file which are not dependent on any screen Also specify whether the settings existing in the current project file are deleted by overwriting them or merged added with additional settings without deleting them If Over write is specified the settings at the copying destination will be deleted and all the settings at the copying source will be copied If Merge is specified the settings at the copying source will be copied while those at the copying destination are left as far as possible When such a merge is made using D Script Functions or Filing Data you will be prompted to confirm whether any identical existing number or function name is to be overwritten When the combination is made using Data Sampling or Global D Script all the settings will be merged LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 7 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PRO
384. ol editor to enter the actual symbol addresses ERROR Out of Memory The LT s internal memory is full Delete any unnecessary screens LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 9 Appendix 1 Error Messages Appendices E Screen Transfer Errors from previous page Error Message Cause Solution Network C onnection Failed Connection to the specified party node is failed Check the PC network setings and the network cable connection If the problem stil remains contactthe network manager No Upload Information in LT Data File Because the LT does not have the data required for sending the data to the PC the PC cannot receive the screen The screen originally may have been sent with the upload information set to Not transfer A screen that is not sent together with the upload information cannotbe received PGO command failed The power supply to the LT may have been PLD command failed turned OFF or the cable has been un plugged Resetthe LT and the PC and retry data transfer Protocol file not found The External Device protocol file to be sent to the LT is not found in the system s directory Re install the LT s system starting from the master disk Send SIO Error Unable To Open a Com Port The COM port cannot be used In the transfer seting menu s serial port seting specify the available serial port and retry data transfer Send File Error Bad File Data The data to be sent is not corr
385. on Then a dialog box that is the same as for the adding of a registered address will appear Deleting a registered address You can delete a registered address Select an address to be deleted and click on the button Then a dialog box will appear to confirm the command If you execute the delete command click on the but ton and if you cancel it click on the button AN Selected address will be deleted Copying and pasting a registered address Select an address to be copied and click on the button Then click on the button to add the copied address at the end of the list LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 7 8 1 Overview Chapter 8 Simulation 8 1 2 Transferring Simulation Protocol To simulate the LT panel s actual operation using the LT Editor program transfer the screen data created with the LT Editor program along with the simulation protocol to the LT unit MEEK 7 2 Transferring Screens Usage Pattern Check fil the Project Manager Transfer Setup Transfer Use Extended or or Settings Program area s Simulation Click on i Click on Check Box Compile the Project Click on the icon File with the LT Editor to transfer the screen Transfer Prepare program so that itis data and simulation formatted for the LT protocol to the LT unit used for the unit simulation E Simulation Protocol
386. on USA Digital Electronics Corporation Pro face Flex Network P in Japan and other countries Ethernet Western Digital Electric Corporation USA IBM VGA PC AT nipeng Business Machines Corporation IBM USA Microsoft Corporation USA The following terms differ from the above mentioned formal trade names and trademarks Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows Me Operating System Windows NT Microsoft Windows NT Operating System Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System MS DOS Microsoft MS DOS Operating System LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Preface MANUAL SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY This manual uses the following symbols and terminology E Safety Symbols and Terms This manual uses the following symbols and terms to identify important information related to the correct and safe operation of this product Symbol Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could result in serious injury A N or death WARNING BN ee A N equipment damage CAUTION Indicates a potentially damaging action or dangerous situation that could F Careful correct product use A E General Information Symbols and Terms This manual uses the following symbols and terms for general information Symbol Provides hints on correct product use or supplementary information Indicates an item s related
387. on the Transfer menu Settings area s Simulation selection then retry the Simulation E Filing Data Errors Error Message Cause Solution Cannot import CSV file Data is out of range The number of blocks or data amounts is or format is incorrect inappropriate in the CSV file t be imported Enter the correct value s Data is larger than designated data range Data from outside the Filing Data s range is Please check the data settings present Check the designated data range setings and change them ifnecessary Exceeds folder addition limit Up to 64 folders can be stored in the internal memory and up to 8999 folders can be stored in the CF card Any folder cannotbe added because the number of folders will exceed the limit Internal memory is not sufficient to save data The current setings will overfow the LT s Please reduce the block or data settings memory Please reduce either the block or data setings Please enter a Block name Nothing has been entered for the Filing Data s Block data Please enter a name The currently selected data range exceeds P lease reduce either the amount of data copied or the maximum amount allowed Paste cannot the number of blocks copied be performed Ww When using 32 bit data settings the When using 16 bit data up to 40 items can be maximum number of data items is 20 OK to used with 32 bits maximum is 20 Be sure the delete items over 20 data type fts your data needs
388. on Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Ungrouping Objects This function changes a Group of objects to a selection of multiple objects PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select a group of objects 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Ungroup command or click To cancel the ungrouping click on on the 82 icon the a icon LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 145 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing yee Bring to Front Send to Back When graphics and Parts overlap each other you can change the order of the layers with these two commands E Changing the Order of Overlapping Objects PROCEDURE REMARKS In this example you will move the oval partially hidden 2 3 1 Selecting by the rectangle to the front Objects Bringing an Object Forward 1 Use the cursor to select the filled oval 2 Select the Edit menu Bring to Front command To cancel the movement click on or click on the icon the icon Sending an Object Behind 1 Use the cursor to select the black rectangle 2 Select the Edit menu Send to Back command or To cancel the movement click on click on the icon the icon 2 146 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS rA GS Changing Attributes Here you can change any of an object s attributes 1 e
389. on to dis Displays negative values where device information is to play device information with a minus sign be displayed Select which to screen to be Selects the format of the displayed on the LT panel display and input data during the simulation the simulation COEN r a Se alls Register an a y A Ie oo Starts Stops address Qu its the Si mu fi Name Description Function Address lation function 5_001 Word Set T ha A 5_002 ford Set iE ponon E4 O01 Data Address 00000 poggi EA_002 Data Address 00000 Blinks while a the simula A 000 Monitor Word Address _ DOOO00 Data Storage Address DOO000 tion Is being _003 ford Set b00003 executed onone BS O03 Bit Set Operation Bit pO0003 ene e device informa tion of Parts i i i C N Z placed on each Sener Changes the Changes the Displays the current device status system status status of the system The toolbar icons have the following functions Starts a simulation Registers the address 3 ml uf Stops a simulation Quits the simulation function LogilTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 3 8 1 Overview Chapter 8 Simulation Chg Scr When the Check Box is marked the LT panel screen is changed accord ing to the Simulation screen When this Check Box is the LT panel screen can be separately changed independent of the Simulation screen Displayed Function Selection T
390. one LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 3 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Deleting Screens This feature deletes a screen from the current project file PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the E icon 2 Select a screen to be deleted from the list and click on the Delete button Project File Factory Akte Screen B Switch 1 To select several screens simulta neously drag the mouse down the Switch2 list or click on the target screens Alarme i i Switch 1 ag Z while pressing your PC s Shift key 3 or key D Preview Screen Type Base Screen i A Important Once the Delete command is performed it cannot be un done Open Screen Project File Factory Akte Screen E Switch 1 Alarm Switch Alarme Preview Screen Type Base Screen 4 4 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 1 Screen Editing E Changing Screen Numbers and Titles This feature allows you to change screen numbers and titles in the current project file PROCEDURE REMARKS Changing only One Screen 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the E icon 2 Select a screen to be changed from the list and click on the Change bu
391. operation are rounded e Remainder Detects a remainder of a division performed on the data in two word ad dresses or the data in a word address and a constant The operation result may depend on the sign of the left and right sides e Multiplication Multiplies the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded e Division Performs division on the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Decimal places and overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded e Assign Assigns the right side value in the left side The left side can state a device address only while the right side can describe both a device address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded ote For details about overflowing digits and errors and rounded decimal places Nel resulting from a remainder operation 3 1 5 Notes on Operation Results Comparisons tna for fot F E gt e Boolean and AND Conjunction ANDs the right and left sides Value O zero is regarded as OFF and other values as ON N1 and N 1s true if both N1 and N2 are ON and false if otherwise 2 186 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e or OR Disjunction ORs the right and
392. opying an object without deleting it and placing it elsewhere is explained When an object is copied it is stored in the Clipboard E Copying an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the desired object s 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Copy command or click To cancel the Copying click on the on the icon icon The selected object s will be Copied to the Clipboard 3 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click When pasting the Copied object on the je icon on another screen be sure to open I l that screen first Then the outline of the object copied from the previous screen to the Clipboard will appear Selecting and dragging an object to anther screen while holding down 4 Position the cursor and click on the point where the the key can also be used to object is to be placed copy the object The object stored in the Clipboard will be Copied to the To cancel the pasting click on the specified location icon I An area where text graphics or both that have been Cut or Copied are temporarily stored The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted copied from the Clipboard using the Paste function However once the Copy Cut command is executed the data stored in the Clipboard is replaced therefore only the data from the most recent Copy Cut command can be Pasted LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 129
393. or Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS FAD LoadScreens S Graphics created on screens in a project can be loaded and used repeatedly on others with LT Editor Thus a single screen s contents can be used repeatedly elsewhere The Load Screen function is also a good way to cut down on your screen s actual size since you only need to call up items to your screen not save them on it E Screens that can be loaded to other screens The screen currently being edited cannot be loaded on to itself B Base screen B Base screen Image screen es e The screen currently being edited cannot be loaded on to itself Na e If a portion of an Image screen extends over a Base screen s Y axis border that portion will not be displayed on the LT screen When the Image screen is placed over the Base screen laterally however any part that extends over the Base screen X axis border will be squeezed onto the LT screen i e not cut When using LT Editor When using the LT Example panel display Drawing Areas LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 145 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing E Nesting Screens can be nested up to 10 times 11 layers However if your PC s system memory is low a loaded screen object may not be displayed Later however when the data is transferred to the LT the display will appear normally
394. or combin ing the LT main unit with the LT Editor 1 4 1 Logic Program Editor ltem Names and Functions Here basic item names and functions of the Logic Program Editor main window are explained MOCAN For details please refer to online help a Title Bar c Pull down Menu Te Logic Program Editor Factory A File Edit View Search Insert Data Coyitroller Help Faz POLE w i Program Descr b Menu Bar d Tool Bar lt 1 START 2 END 3f PEND fo e Programming Area f Status Bar a Title Bar Displays the project file name screen number and title b Menu Bar Displays the menus used to operate LT Editor When you select a desired menu using the mouse or keypad the pull down menu c appears c Pull down Menu When you select a desired menu from the menu bar the pull down menu appears This menu includes various commands d Tool Bar The Tool Bar provides icons representing such commands as Creating Editing a Logic Program and RUN STOP Clicking one of these icons performs that command The Tool Bar can either be hidden or displayed 1 20 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 4 Logic Program Editor Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals e Programming Area Creates a logic program The entire program may not display depending on the size of the window or program In such cases use the window s scroll bar to change the display area
395. or other applications which require the communication port The printerdoes Is the OS s Windows printer seting correct notrun hard copy Check the printer setting using the Control P anel s printer property is not printed The desired Did you selectthe required E xternal Device and LT type when installing LT Editor External Device and Custom Installation LT type are not When customizing the system installation you can selectthe External Device and the LT listed when types Y ou cannotinstall an E xternal Device or a LT type ifithas notbeen selected ce ane previously Re install the system with the desired External Device and LT type projec Simulation cannot Possible causes are thatLS area data is being backed up b the LT via the LT System be performed Settings or thatan LS area Special Relay is being used by D Scriptstartup bit Ifany of these are true the simulation cannotbe performed Deselectthe O ption menu S ettings LS Device S imulaton Appendix 18 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables w Address Conversion Tables Addresses can or cannot be converted depending on the address combina tion The combinations which cannot be converted vary with the external device manufacturers See the following address global conversion table to convert the addresses correctly E How to Read the table The symbols used in the table
396. othing will be displayed on the Picture Display For example when the number of messages is 16 and only states 0 to 3 actually have a message registered designating states 4 to 15 displays only background square frames LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 93 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing Straight lines rectangles and oval objects can be drawn using drawing tools An object s attributes such as line types and colors are designated in its dialog box After designating the object s attributes move the cursor and start to draw the object directly in the drawing area Usage Pattern Draw gt Selecta drawing _y Set any attributes gt Draw the object or command Select a desired drawing icon from the Draw Tool Bar E Drawing Tools Icons contained in the Draw Tool Bar and their corresponding drawing objects are as follows Icon Object Types _ of w TEL eroe E se E sete O creo O ee Ca E Selecting Line Types 10 selections are available for straight and poly lines and for graph divi sions 6 selections are available for rectangles circles arcs and pie sections fe fy Polyline pi DY Select one of these SSS patterns Fo Ps ee oe Bo ne me ek E Selecting Colors For color and blink attribute settings use the procedure same as for Parts 2 1 Parts Part Attributes Selecting Colors 2 94 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1
397. ouch keys perform any data changes and then transmit the edited data to the External Device Use the Filing Data Display to transfer data to from the External Device using the LS External Device touch key and the External Device gt LS touch key LT 2 3 p LS Area Internal memory 1 Backup SRAM lt External Device Filing data 1 External Device Trigger 10 1 2 Filing Data Setting Control Word Address Filing Data SRAM 2 Screen touch keys 10 1 6 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 1 Writing filling data to SRAM LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 7 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features 3 Screen touch keys 10 1 6 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 5 LS Area to External Device E Filing Data Setup Procedure 1 Filing data registration 2 Enter Write Settings for sending Filing Data to SRAM 3 Enter External Device amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings 4 Setup Filing Data Display and their Screen Placement 5 Setup Keypad Display and its Screen Placement Automatic Data Transmission Completed Manual Data Transmission 1 Completed Manual Data Transmission 2 Completed 1 Filing Data Registration via Filing Data Filing List 2 Setup of Write Settings Send Filing Data to SRAM via Filing Data Filing Set
398. over objects as described in Selecting an Object will not select it The entire Object by Dragging see above Be sure to enclose object must be specified to make all of the objects to be selected completely if part of selection possible an object is not enclosed within the box it will not be included in the multiple selection Handles will dis play on the objects that have been selected When two or more objects are se lected the Change Attributes command cannot be used The editing commands available depend on what objects have been selected Selecting All the Objects on a Screen 1 Select the pull down Edit menv s Select All Ob jects command All object handles will appear to show that they have been selected 2 122 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing PROCEDURE Excluding Objects From A Multiple Selection 2 When multiple objects are selected to de select an object while preserving the selection of the other ob jects first move the cursor over the object then while holding down the key left click on the object When the object s handles disappear that object is no longer selected Repeat this process as many times as desired Adding Objects To A Multiple Selection 2 When multiple objects are selected to add an object either left click on the object or Left drag over it while holding d
399. own the Shift Key The imaginary box that encloses the multiple selec tion represented by its own handles will expand to in clude the added object which now has handles Using this process you can add as many objects to the multiple selection as you want _ LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 123 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS Selecting One Object in a Multiple Selection 2 First make a multiple selection then click on the Selection Tool box s icon All the objects in the multiple selection will become de selected except for one If you wish to re select all the objects originally in the multiple selection click on the Selection Tool box s oar button 3 Use the and gt icons to scroll through all the objects originally in the multiple selection clicking on these arrow keys will change the selected item one at a time Clicking on the gt icon will select the next object and clicking on the lt 1con will select the previons object in the order that they were drawn To select an Object from over lapped Objects How to Select a Single Object 2 124 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE Selecting Objects by Type
400. p Fro 5 FS ProPB win PFE Edition 2 Select the Action menu Decompress Project File command or click on the icon a Pack Tool Action Help Status LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 33 4 3 Project Compression Decompression Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE 3 Select a folder and Project file to be decompressed or enter the file name and click on the button If the same file name already exists the system asks if the existing file must be overwritten If you select the existing file will be overwritten If you select the existing file will not be over written and you will return to the previous dialog box UnPack Packed File File Name Factory 6 Olt Cancel Pack Tool AN File Factory B lte already exists Okay to overvrite this file Cancel 4 Select the Action menu Exit command or click on the icon REMARKS To select a folder click on the Browse button importa To decompress a com pressed project file that has been divided into several files make sure that all divided files are available However when you specify the file name to be decom pressed the system dis plays the first file name OLT only The decompressed project file will be stored in the same folder as the compressed file 4 34 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AN
401. p file option for the Screen to bitmap file command from the Edit menu When a file name is created automatically the bitmap file is saved now 4 If Prompt for filename when saving was selected in step 2 specify a file name and output destination and then click on the Sse button Save As File name ltestbmp O O X Save as ype Bitmapfie bmp M cma LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 155 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing RE Redraw Screen This command updates the current drawing area display to reflect the latest drawing data When the Auto Redraw feature is not used filling and editing objects can cause after images to remain on the screen Use this function to remove these images and show the screen as it will appear on the actual LT display E Redrawing a Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS Sometimes when removing an object s filled color only the fill point area s color will be removed resulting in a small non colored square Fill point is deleted 1 Select the Edit menu Redraw command or click on the icon The screen will automatically be refreshed and all the fill color will be removed 2 156 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS With this function an operatio
402. p it re E Filing Data Transmission Flow LT Internal memory Filing data E xte rnal Device 10 20 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Filing Data to SRAM All the filing data is written into the SRAM when the Trigger Bit is turned ON Control Word Address 1 to D00200 T ON Write Completed Bit Address i es re M0001 A Data processing SRAM gt External Device Filing data selected by the LT s touch key is written to the External Device Actual Process 1 Select an item Here select Block 3 36 C 21 G5 TS SRAM DEV DEL ERAN 2 Touch SRAM gt External Device key SRAM 3 Filing data is transmitted from SRAM to the External Device Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 External Device D00100 D00101 D00102 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 21 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features WARS Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 Here select an item using the File Name Display from a screen and fine tune minutely adjust the data via the LS area and then transfer the data manual transfer 2 E Screen Example as E 7 External Dey Devices E Filing Setting Example data transmission is performed Filing Setting When the check box of External Device Cont
403. pe currently open Part File PDB File Click on the button and a list of the Part files will appear After clicking on a Part File the information displayed will change to reflect that file Next click on the button and the selected PDB File s Part Shapes will appear in the Browser Shows the Moves to the next higher Creates a currently file directory level new folder open folder a Displays file names and details Op4 sp01 pdb Op4 mmOt pdb fi pdb pdb Displays file names Lists the heOl pdb fa Op pI0 pdb in summary form hrf Op4 pl02 pdb names of all 4c a Opd scO1 pdb the PDB Irn 3 Op4 smO1 pdb files in this tordar Fle name Files of type PDE files PDE Shows the cession pora currently selected PDB file s Shows the name of the currently selected PDB file A comment name can also be entered here to select a file LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Note When the LT Editor software is first installed all Part Files will be included XN in a folder named PDB and automatically installed in the same directory folder as the LT Editor program If desired these Part Files can be moved to other folders and to find a Part File that has been moved use the Look in area to display Part Files located in other folders E Selecting Colors Specify Part colors using the Shape Color setting screen The setting items w
404. perate correctly Restartthe PC Press F8 when Starting windows appears When the menu appears select S tep by step Confirmation to check thatthe commands all operate normally Ifan error message appears correctthe error For details refer to the P C s operation manual LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 17 Appendix 2 Troubleshooting Appendices Error Cause Solution Cannot draw Is the LT Editor s screen open graphic data With LT Editor you mustselectthe projectfile and open a drawing screen before you can draw any objects Create a new a Screen or open an existing one Prepare a disk which has enough free space Is the symbol editor started The screen editor and the symbol editor cannotbe started atthe same tme Check thatthe Symbol editor window has been closed Cannotsavethe _ Is the file write protected Does the disk you are saving to have enough free space Is the proper cable being used Be sure to use the DIGITAL transfer cable option between the PC and s the LT in the Screen Data Transfer M ode or Run M ode Ifnot communications between the PC and the LT will notbe possible LogiT ouch Series User M anual When receiving data from the LT does your PC s hard disk have enough space Is the communication portsettng correct Does another application use the same communication port Check whether there is competition between the LT and a modem
405. perly click on the button and select the part again from Shape Browser Axis Divisions The number of segments the Pie Graph will be divided into is entered here If the number of Axis Divisions is specified as 10 10 division lines will be displayed When no divisions are necessary simply enter 0 E Pie Graph Shape Color Attributes A Pie Graph s border color division line color Axis Color data display color Graph Color Fg and Bg and data display pattern can all be selected here 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Pie Graph Alarm Settings Attributes Clicking on the Alarm Display check box will call up the Alarm Settings 2 1Parts Setting Alarms LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2533 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Pie Graph The procedure for placing a Pie Graph is shown below Data stored in D00102 displays on the Pie Graph sis ssr When the value 34 22h is stored in D00102 the graph appears like this PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Pie Graph command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings area input a Word Address and select a Data Format Pie Graph Settings PI_ 002 General Setings Graph Setings Shape Cobr Alam Stings Enter D00102 Description 2 Absolute 3 Relative h e re Select BCD 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Selecting a You can al
406. pletely enclosed with solid lines Dotted lines can not be used as an enclosure A space of only one dot on the border of an enclosed area Is enough to allow Fill to leak into other areas of the screen Be especially careful when drawing polygon vertexes and filling an object while the display ts set to 50 DO NOT attempt to fill objects that have been designated as blinking When filling an image that uses an arc Fill may leak when that image is actually displayed on the LT panel display To prevent this use a line to connect any gaps in the image E Fill Attributes Displays the currently selected Select one of the Fill type tiling patterns Fo eo e B Bei ek Select a Color Bd ee vo ssi To select the background color for all the screens used use the Option Nel menu s Screen Settings command 2 7 2 Settings Screen Property Color To cancel the application of a Fill due to a mistake such as having desig nated the wrong Fill point press the key 2 104 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Filling an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Fill command or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes Select Colors and Tiling Patterns if desired Fill spreads outward from the se lected point until it reaches a bor der with one of the colors Fg Bg Bd selected in step 2 Select the
407. point and drag the mouse to the end key down a straight line at an angle point of either 0 45 or 90 degrees can also be drawn When using the keyboard to draw a straight line use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the start and end points and press the J key to start and finish the line To cancel the placement click on the icon Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 4 Click again a straight line is drawn registered E Drawing Polylines When the Polyline check box is checked Polylines can be drawn Click on the starting point then drag the mouse clicking the left mouse button at each point of the desired directional change of the line and click on the right mouse button at the end point of the line ge te When drawing if the Keyboard s key is pressed instead of clicking XVX onthe mouse right button the start and end points of a polyline object will be automatically connected You can draw a line that looks hand drawn by holding down the mouse s left button when drawing a polyline LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 97 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing we Square Rectangle To draw a square click on and designate the diagonal two points To draw a regular square perform this operation while holding down the key By selecting a patter
408. program simulation procedure a P E E IN IIIA AA N AENA IE EA AEEA Overview LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 1 8 1 Overview Chapter 8 Simulation 8 1 Connect the LT unit to your personal comprter via the transfer cable Turn ON OFF bits on the LT Editor program s Simulation screen and change the data corresponding to the specified word address This enables you to check the operation in the LT unit and the data changes resulting from the Part functions Ee Note The Simulation function can be used only when the LT is Type C vice operations on a PC For this is only a simulation its perfor Important mance such as processing speed may differ from the actual one which is performed when the LT unit is connected with a Exter nal Device ura The Simulation feature is provided for simulating External De Connecting method between your personal computer and the LT is the same as the one for data transfer 7 1 Prior to Transferring Data Personal Computer PC LT Screen transfer cable Dsub 9 pin socket To the PC s serial port an AP a a E E T To errr iar ee if Pe a a a F A ye ee ae To the Tool Connector E Precautions When using the Simulation function keep in mind the following restrictions e The Simulation function can be used only when the LT is Type C e When the external device is either THERMAC NEO Seri
409. question If Yes all is selected all the screens or settings will be overwritten If Ho all is Selected only the screens or settings that do not exist at the copying destination will be copied LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 9 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS Destination Factory A Ibe ES z Sak Fian 3 Seen Fon E Li l w D JA Feesn Tps Al Pe 2 Internal Settings Internal Settings w System Information w Filing Data JF Data Sampling Overwite 3 Merge Dvere 3 Merge w Data Loging Settings w D Script Functions Ovenwite 3 Merge JF Global D Script Overwite i Merge Screen Copy x oe E Destination Image screen number 1 exists Do you want to overwrite 7 Important Ji rem AT e After replacing the screens you must re enter all Parts de 7 Click on the OOo button to exit the screen copy Vice addresses mode The number of screens copied will be displayed in the didlon Gos To subsequently copy any other screen in the same project file re peat the procedures starting with step 3 Screen Copy Bate Screens Copied 0 Mark Screens Copied Image Screens Copied 1 Sistem Information Copied 1 Data Sampling Information Copied 0 D Sccript Functions Copied 0 Global D 5cript Copied 0 Data Logging Settings Copied 0 Filing Information Copied 0 Destinat
410. r Description This is necessary for data import No of Data Bock S No ofData Items 75 OU Address m Data Format T g 16 Bit 0 32Bt1 Display Format OO l Dec 0 Hex 1 BCD 2 Code rn g 0 Ri Block0 Bloc Block2 Datal Data2 Data3 Q 10 1000 2 20 2000 4 30 3000 6 40 4000 8 50 5000 Ifthis data is incorrect CSV data cannot be imported E Setting up Filing Data Entering File No Description No of Data Blocks No of Data Items and Data Storage Start Address File No 1 File No E No of Data Blocks is Description Heat Control Description Heat Control No of Data Items a No of Data Blocks 3 Data Storage Start Address C ogog pow F pooo FE Data Format No of Data Items 10 oa Maa ET Data Storage Start Address E D00100 a7 Poe ANAL LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Filing List Display lt When using multiple folders gt lt When using a single folder gt Filing Data List Filing Data List Folder r a Internal 1 Temperature Settings Add Temperature Settings 1 Filinig Data a WAR gt Automatic Filing Data Transmission Here data transmission via the external device s trigger automatic data transmission is explained Previously entered filing data is transmitted to the External Device as shown below File No
411. r 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendices Appendix 4 Software Trouble Report Aw Software Trouble Report E When problems continue after following Troubleshooting advice If following the steps outlined in the troubleshooting section does not solve your problem please make a copy of the next page s Software Trouble Report fill in any relevant information and fax it to your local Pro face service center Please include any relevant details including project data and or screens so that the problem can be duplicated We guarantee all this data will remain confidential Also please take the time to use the OSCHECK tool installed with your LT Editor software and include a printout of its result with your fax Using the OSCHECK Program This program after it completes its test produces a text file txt Please be sure to print out this data and include it with your Software Trouble Report 1 Click on the Windows main screen s Start button and then on the Run selec tion 2 Here use the Browse feature to find the OSCHECK EXE program located in your PC s LT Editor folder Once you find it click on OK to start the program 3 Designate the status report s Save folder and filename Click again on OK and the text file will be created e When inquiring be sure to write down your software s serial No Without your software s serial No your question s can
412. r 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS This Part creates an area where a External Device s Word Address numeric data is displayed as absolute or relative values in a Meter i e a needle moves to show the value The graph s display will change to reflect Exter nal Device Word Address data changes E Meter General Settings Attributes lt When displaying data in absolute values gt Select Absolute or Enter comment Relative display data here a i Enter the eneral settings Graph Settings Shape Color Marn Settings The currently Descitin desired Word ro Word Address Address data selected Meter Graph s image appears here FE im Display Mode t Select the desired Data Format Calls up the Part Shape Browser Parts Shapes can be selected Hel directly from the Browser Absolute Data stored in the designated Word Address is displayed as absolute values from 0 to 100 with Display Mode selected 100 to 100 Word Address Enter the Word Address where the data will be stored Data Format Select the display data format from Bin and BCD Display Mode When this check box is checked and Bin data format is selected nega tive numeric data can be displayed 2 41 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 42 lt When displaying data in relative values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter comment Enter the data here Meter Graph Settings
413. r 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items 2 4 2 Placing Library Items Here items registered in a Library file are placed on a drawing area PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Library menu Call Up Library command or click on the icon on the Draw Tool Bar Library items Cut Copied or Pasted between the screen and the Browser Simply select the desired Library item and perform the com mand 2 Select a Library Item to be read out from the Browser When calling up an item from a file different than the currently dis played file click on the icon to bring up a file list 3 Drag the Library item to the desired position in the 2 4 Libraries drawing area E Switching Library files The Library item can be placed on any open screens and will be displayed in the drawing area If desired use the sizing handles to alter the item s size The Library item s top left corner is the placement point Parts Special Library Window Help To cancel the placement click on the screen editor s icon TUM S 11 operation To change a Li brary item s size refer to 2 3 3 p Scaling Up Down e E Items called up are automatically grouped They can be freely edited im after ungrouping them by clicking on the icon 2 3 13 Group Ungroup EEEa ae g Grouped library items containing Parts cannot be scaled up or down 2 166 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation
414. raph selected Half Pie poo FE E Dsp Mode data Graph s image a Bit Length f6 f appears here po Input Code Selects the Mnvas P E AoA desired Data 2 s Complement Calls up the Part Max Value 6555 JET Wey mse Format Shape Browser 7 Specifies the pare canne e A odi selected directly p from the Browser 7 p Code Specifies the data s Specifies the data s effective Bit Length Input Range Relative According to the Input Range designated for the Word Address Data the data is converted and displayed as relative values Word Address Here enter the Word Address used to store Half Pie Graph data Display Mode When this check box checked negative number data can be displayed Bit Length Specifies the Bit Length of all data stored in the Word Address Input Range Specifies the data s Input Range Input Code With No Code selected only positive numeric data can be entered To enter negative numeric data select either 2 s Complement or MSB LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Zo Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Half Pie Graph Graph Settings Attributes Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alam Settings Enter the The Half Pie Display Direction is Divisi graph s graph s display Cheka E number of direction is divisions fixed to clock wise Display Direction Here the Half Pie gr
415. ration Mode Bit Designate a message for each state ON and OFF Operation Mode Word offi f2 3 As many buttons as the number of the specified messages will be displayed Designate a message for each state Selected Message Messages are entered here After entering a message the message will be displayed in the selected color s The default value setting is Undefined Color Here each message s display colors can be selected Default settings are Char color White Plate background color Blue LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 19 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Message Display The Message Display setting procedure is shown below When using a Word Address Message No 0 None Message No 1 Signal A Operation SE Message No 2 Signal B Operation Message No 3 Signal A amp B Operation ST A message from those listed displays in response above allocated to the specified to changes in the Word Word Address Address data PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Message Display com mand or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings tab input a Word Address Select the message s Border Color Text Alignment and Character Size 1f desired Hessage Display Settings M4 _001 General Settings Messages Description Address Border Color EET mE C e Alignment Character Size 2 Word ba F
416. red Word Address When Sample Only On Trig ger option is selected The 00 and 01 bits of the Word Address settings control the Data Read Start and Clear operations 15 01 00 0 Pause 1 Start 1 Data clear With 0 gt 1 data is cleared Change Data Import With 0 1 or 1 0 data is imported 2 210 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 6 Data Sampling D e ay O Please wait until the LT confirms the status of the control bits i e whether they are 0 or 1 For Direct Access communication either the communication cycle time or 50ms whichever is longer A delay of up to 1 second may occur from the time of data import start to actual data sampling E Deleting Data Sampling Settings Here the registered Data Sampling Settings can be deleted Select a Data Sampling to be deleted from the list When the Deete button is clicked on a dialog box will appear to confirm your command If you click on the button the Data Sampling will be deleted 1f you click on the button the deletion will be canceled E Editing Data Sampling Settings Here the registered Data Sampling Setting attributes can be changed Select a Data Sampling to be changed from the list When the Est button is clicked on the Add registration dialog box will appear If you click on the button the Data Samplin
417. reen s num Interlock Address from the Browser oe oe ber and data f 7 Buzzer Selects the pra uate ae al la be Interlock function entere state Function Switch Operation The Function Switch s attributes are as follows Previous Screen When the Switch is pressed the currently displayed screen on the LT will change to the previously displayed one Go To Screen When the Switch is pressed the currently displayed screen on the LT will change to the specified screen Input the screen number to be changed jumped to The Data Format can be either Bin or BCD Sx If a screen number is specified in the BCD data format to place the corre Note sponding screen it is still displayed in the BIN data format when the screen is X closed and then opened 2 20 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Reset LT When the Switch is pressed the LT will be reset to the save status as when the LT s power was turned ON Resetting the LT turns the I O signal off Consider this when TE designing your system File Name Key This is a function switch corresponding to the File Name Display and is the same as the one that is automatically placed together with the File Name Display Designate the same ID number as the one of the File Name Display and select a opera tion mode 2 1 13 File Name Display Data Logging Key This is a function switch cor
418. reen is placed over the Base screen laterally however any part that extends over the Base screen X axis border will be squeezed onto the LT screen i e not cut Example When using LT Editor When using the LT for Windows panel display Drawing Areas E Pasting Other Software s Bitmap Data When another drawing software s bitmap image is copied and the Paste command is executed with the Screen Editor the Paste bitmap dialog box like the bitmap conversion one will automatically appear In that case start from step 2 in the same way However since a Bitmap File name does not need to be selected the Bitmap Conversion tab will not be displayed This operation can be performed only for BMP file data When using another file format be sure to use that software s BMP file format save option to create a BMP file 2 152 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yxy Transferring a Screen to the Clipboard The current screen is transferred as an image to the clipboard The trans ferred screen can be utilized by pasting it to other drawing software The screen types that can be transferred to the clipboard are the Base B screen Mark M screen E Transferring a Screen to the Clipboard PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Screen to clipboard command from the Edit menu The current screen will be transferred to the clipboard 2 Paste
419. responding to the Data Logging Display and is the same as the one that is automatically placed together with the Data Logging Display Designate the scroll direction and the number of lines being rolled up or down 2 1 14 Data Logging Display OFFLINE When this switch is pressed the LT enters the OFFLINE mode Interlock Only when a bit designated via Interlock Address 1s in a state that has been selected via Touch available condition radio buttons the switch becomes effective Whether the switch is effective in ON state or in OFF sate 1s selectable here Touch Available Interlock Address Touch Available Condition Status Not Available ON Touch Available OFF Touch NotAvailable ON Touch Not Available OFF Touch Available E Function Switch Shape Color Attributes The Switch s color and pattern are selected here 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors The color and pattern settings available will differ depending on the switch shape E Function Switch Label Attributes Here the characters shown drawn on the Switch button face are entered 2 1 Parts Creating Labels LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Za Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Function Switch The Screen Switching Function Switch s placement procedure is shown below Pressing this button shifts to screen B10 PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Functio
420. ress o0 0000 PEE o0 LS0020 FE oovoo0000 Flee 00 0000 gt eee oo LSo020 ae y paa oO000000 Chapter 10 Advanced Features Write Settings When Writing to LS Area Stores logging data in the LS area Dis plays logging data items in combina tion with Keypad Display Perform Data Write On Off Although all logging data can be dis played at a single time via the display settings using the LS Area allows each piece of logging data to be displayed separately together with Keypad Dis play Click on this check box to use this setting Control Word Address Designate a Word Address that is the trigger or mode change for writing data to the LS Area This Trigger Bit is turned ON or OFF by the External De vice When writing backup SRAM log ging data to the LS area logging data transfer is performed by designating a Block No when using loop operation set to O and turning the Trigger Bit OFF and then ON 10 Reservation All OFF p Block No Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted Control Word 0 1 Write to LS Address Designates the LS Area Address where data is written to Write Complete Bit Address Designates the Bit Address that will be turned ON when data write to the LS Area is completed After turning the Bit Address ON is detected use the External Device to turn it OFF When there is no designated Block No the Perform Data Write Bit Address is not turned ON
421. rite nn Error code line Line No of the DXF file causing the error E DXF File Conversion Errors Code Error Message Cause Solution Length Over in 1 record line The single record length of the DXF file exceeds 256 characters Edit the error line so that the length is less than 256 characters DXF Format Error line Non DXF data may be included Correct the HEADER SECTION Not Found a notfound Add the header secton LIMMIN Not Found The header section ofthe DXF file to be read does not have a LIM MIN setting Set the opton DXF size to Use EXTMIN EXTMAX and re execule the program or add the LIMMIN seting LIMMAX Not Found The header section ofthe DXF file to be read does not have a LIM M AX seting Setthe opton DXF size to Use EXTMIN EXTMAX and re execute the program or add the LIMMAX seting SEXTMIN Not Found The header section of the DXF file to be read does nothave a EXTMIN setting Set the opton DXF size to Use LIMMIN LIM MAX and re execute the program or add the EXTMIN seting EXTMAX Not Found The header section ofthe DXF file to be read does nothave a EXTM AX seting Setthe option DXF size to Use LIMMIN LIM MAX and re execute the program or add the EXTMAX seting DXF file to be read Add the EOF record Me the DXF file to be read Add the ENDSEC record ENDTAB Not Found line The ENDTAB record Is notspecified atthe end of the
422. rnal Device type than the current project Imported addresses may be invalid Do vou want to continue 6 Click on the l Since you selected Add to End in this example the im ported messages were added after the last line Processing Alarm Messages Processing Alarm Messages Done Operation Status LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide als 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS When alarm data does not have an identifier Block for the T first 4 lines which indicate Reserved 1 to 4 the alarm will not Important be imported _ If the address es registered in the alarm data to be imported are incorrect set correct addresses via the Symbol Editor 4 2 5 Symbol Editor When the number of message characters exceeds the limit the message is imported only for the effective number of charac ters When data is imported from a file in which only a message is registered the initial value is used as an address 5 16 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide a LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS Y ou can select many of the LT unit s initial settings through the LT Editor for Windows program This program area 1s called System Settings When System Settings data is sent to the LT unit you will not need to manually perform the initial setup of the LT unit A description of each LT unit setting item 1s provided i
423. rolled Transfer is off manual J Filing ON OFF Write Setting From Filing Data To SRAM Write Settings Fram Filing Data To SARAM an Control Word Address D00200 Write Completed Bit Address M00001 Write Completed Bit Address Em Estemal Device amp SAAM Direct Data Transmission Settings ia Extemal Device Controlled Transfer Control Word Address External Device amp SRAM Direct Data m Transmission Setting Transmit Completed Bit Address Mppp00000 Pe ES External Device Controlled Transfer Not selected 10 22 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe E Filing Name Display Settings When manual data transmission is performed you must place the Filing Name Display 2 1 12 Filing Name Display General Settings File Display FD_OO1 External Device Transfer I Use Transter Completed Bit Address Transfer Completed Bit Address OOO00000 Pel EE Display File Display FD_001 Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ype Color Ir No of Display Lines 5 r No of Display Characters 15 J Direct Selection Jeil Cursor Position Control Description Heat Control Use LS Area Use LS Area Selected Filing data 1s first transferred to the LT s LS area before being transferred to the External Device While filing data is being transferred from SRAM to LS and LS to S
424. rrent screen If any Parts are placed on this screen the screen data volume will be increased 4 4 3 Version Information Version Information displays the LT Editor Project Manager and Editor s version information To see this data select the Help menu About command lt Project Manager Version Information gt About LogiT ouch Editor LogiT ouch Editor Version 1 0 Copyright C 2001 Digital Electronics Corp LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 37 Memo 4 38 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide lt a CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS his feature allows you to register text data to be displayed as alarm mesages This chapter describes how to create and edit these alarm messages e E E EE Alarm Creation and Editing LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide ol 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 2 mm Alarm Creation and Editing With this feature you can register the messages to be displayed in the Alarm Summary Part menu s Alarm Display and Alarm Message right to left scrolling display You can also set up a monitor bit for each message According to the monitor bit s ON OFF status the specified messages are then displayed in the Alarm Summary or Alarm Message mode The Alarm Summary lists messages in the Alarm Display Part 2 1 11
425. rs 1 to 8999 will be overwrit Open Lokin a e E Ada to End Imported messages will be added af ter the last message line If there are any gaps between the current regis tration numbers the sequence num File name bers will be re assigned to fit into Files of type all existing lines and the imported Description Overwrite messages will be added after the last i Add to End line di 4 When selecting CSV file as imported file type specify When selectin g ALA file as im the type of alarm to be imported ported file type skip step 4 Only the type of alarm specified here will be imported Open Look in 3 My Documents r A ae Add to End 2 14 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 After entering all the necessary items click on the button WK If the selected External Device is different between the cur rently open project and the imported ALA file the system Once you complete the asks if the preset addresses should be overwritten If the Import command it cannot preset addresses must be overwritten select If pe undone they must not be overwritten select Open BE Look in GA database F ice Ej test ala Important Fie name eh Files of wpe alal ia Cancel i Add to End Alarm Editor The source is of a different Exte
426. rwrite the old one and when the button is clicked on the new num Lown Lovet Lie ber will not overwrite the old one 7 After the conversion is completed click on the button The DXF lt gt LTE Converter dia log box will reappear File Convert DXF gt Screen J x Do You wart to overwrite This screen already exists From DMF File C sLogiT ouchdatabasesecrewrock To Project File C LogiT ouch databaseFactory LT Cancel Reading DF 16902line rg Seon otis To convert another DXF file DO n T NOT cancel here rather start from step 3 again M DXF lt gt Screen Converter x DF Screen Screen gt DF LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 229 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 2 Conversion from Base Screen to DXF File Screen DXF Base screen data 1s converted into DXF file Drawing Interchange File data n we LT Edit pe sai C gt O gt p file screen aa Convert Can be used for CAD software for a personal computer such as AUTO CAD E Requirements and Restrictions when Converting Data Screen DXF e Only Base screens can be converted e Image screens called up on the Base screen will not be converted e Tag data will not be converted so for example M tag s Marks will not be displayed after conversion e When text is converted the c
427. s Designates the maximum number of alarm message lines that can be dis played on one screen Up to 50 lines can be displayed No of Display Char Designates the maximum number of characters that can be displayed on a line The screen s limit is 100 characters per line However the maximum number of characters for each LT unit will vary depending the model E Alarm Style Color Attributes The display area color when a message is cleared Clear Color is selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors 2 58 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing an Alarm Summary Display Area The Alarm Summary Display Area s setting procedure is shown below Tine e ErrorCode030 Unit 0D5 2 mAr ErrorCode040 Unit 0D5 Errorcode041 Unit 0DE ErrorCode041 Unit OD6 Appear on the screen ina me enn messages nave Summary Display at 10 lines been assigned to bits M0800 to oiad eharciers oer disna M0896 in the Alarm Editor y Pon lee PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the oe menu Alarm Display command or click on the g icon 2 In the General Settings tab input the Word Ad 2 1 12 Alarm dress No of Monitor Words and select one of the Summary Display Alarm Sum Show Border options mary Description Attribute Here since the Word Address range is from M0800 to Word Address M0896 enter 7 for the number of Monitor Words Alarm Summary Se
428. s the standard cross reference and address map display Usage Pattern Utility List or Start address search Map Select either Word or Close or Bit Address o On the key Global Cross Reference The following is the overview for the global cross reference screens List Display For local settings which screen is used and for global settings function type will be displayed respectively Selects whether setting conditions are dis played for Bit Addresses or for Word Addresses x Global Cross Reference List Bit Address Word Address Ooo000 Data Sampling 67 Changes the display start address to be displayed Addresses d Used Al Selects the range of Addresses to be displayed Address Map Display When selecting Word Address the table cells from Word Address Bits O to 15 for 32 bit device from O to 32 will all be filled When selecting Bit Address only bit cells currently used will be filled Displays the Bit location Selects whether setting condi tions are dis played for Bit Addresses or for Word Addresses 2 226 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Ge a Parts that corresponding to both bit addresses and word addresses are cross referenced with both of those addresses on the Cros
429. s Reference List even if they were placed by specifying their bit addresses Example A part placed at bit address X0000F is displayed as the word address X00000 E Changing Display Addresses For cross reference and global cross reference list display when selecting Used addresses that have been used for the Parts and other items used in the currently open screen or Project will be displayed When selecting All Addresses all the addresses beginning with the Start Address will be displayed To change the Start Address click on the button and the Dialog box shown below will appear Set the Start Address and click on the button and the display will show from that address on Start Address Start Address Enter the Start Address For the global cross reference s address map display the map display start address can be designated when toggling Bit and Word display When clicking on or Bit Address the following dialog box will appear After selecting Bit or Word designate the start address Then click on the button and the cross reference display will start from the designated start address Start Address fe Word a Bit Start Address Cancel Enter an Address LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 22 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 8 Load Screen List The Load Screen List will be displayed on the currently e
430. s checksum verification LT Settings Screen Level Change Flow Used to switch screens in the hierarchical display mode LT Settings Change to Screen No Specify the number of the screen used to replace the current one after the preset standby time has passed If you enter 0 no screen will be displayed T O Settings Offline Mode Specify how to change from on line mode to off line mode Mode Settings External Device Displays the name of the host External Device connected to the LT panel Mode Settings Option LT Editor External Device Connection Manual If any font setting other than Japanese is selected Font Setting requires specifying whether alphanumeric characters and symbols are to be displayed at the high quality level 6 2 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup Extended Settings Keypad Display Priority Designates the Keypad Display processing mode Standard mode executes the processing of the Keypad Display once per scan time and Twice mode executes the processing two times per scan time Extended Settings Backup Settings Used to back up the LT panel s LS area data Specify the initial address of the backup range and the number of words used Extended Settings Delete Error Display Only for programless type Displays an error message when an communication error occurs w
431. s to the condition where the circle has been deleted and harmony is restored LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 21 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 22 3 1 3 Registering and Placing a Mark Library Item You can register a mark created in the mark drawing area and the registered Mark can be loaded whenever required The Mark Library Item mark list can be saved as a Mark library file MRK file The LT Editor enables you to manage MRK files independent of project LTE files This function allows you to use the sameMmark for several projects since you can select a desired Mark while checking the image displayed in the browser Registration placement and other editing operations of Mark Library are performed in the same manners as those of the standard Libraries 2 4 Libraries LT Editor has pre made MRK files in correspondence with the ISO7000 Series Marks and symbols Parts List Manual umer MAK Aleneme Tite number 0001 0200 0001 0200 0201 0400 0201 0400 0401 0600 0401 0600 0601 0800 0601 0800 0801 1000 0801 1000 1001 1140 1001 1140 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen wap Creating an Image the Image Screen When you convert image data bitmap BMP file read with an image scanner into an Image screen for the LT series the
432. s written to SRAM Trigger Bit Address a 1 to D00200 OFF Write Completed Bit Address ae ee M0001 OFF 1 SRAM gt External Device When the 0 Bit of the data transmission s Control Word Address D00201 is turned ON the designated filing data is written to the External Device To designate filing data prior to transferring filing data a file number is stored in D00202 and a block number is stored in D00203 directly follow ing the Control Word Address Trigger Bit Address 1 to D00201 OFF Write Completed Bit Address a ee ee M0002 OFF 1 pane PIOGe se lt more Y written into PLC s D00100 to D00102 D00201 D00202 D00203 0 3 J 55 202 30 J 56 6 D00100 62 Transfer satan D00102 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe WARY Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 1 The following explains how to transfer data by selecting the desired screen setting Manual Transmission 1 The same filing data as in 10 1 4 Automatic Filing Data Transmission is used E Screen Example In this example data from File No 1 s Block No 3 is sent by touching the LT screen 21 g TS SRAM DEV DEV SRAN E Filing Setting Example When External Device Controlled Transfer 1s not checked manual transfer is performed Filing Setting Je Filin
433. same color for the Bd border Color and boundary Fg foreground Color Ey A Aiia ling Fo PPO Fills Bd color Bue t JE O O Jm N eK Bd M a a a vo amp Fg color Blue Left clicking on a line will not cause it to be filled Be sure to only 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on click in an area enclosed by lines the area to be filled The designated area will be filled in When drawing via the PC s key board press the e button to indi cate a fill point Fills and fill points can be specified to either display or not display via the drawing board 2 7 2 Screen Envi ib ronment Settings To cancel Fill due to a mistake such as designating a wrong Fill point press the key To cancel the filling click on the al icon Double clicking on a filling point of any filled object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that filled object s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 105 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing Ye Filled Polygon To draw a Polygon either Left click or press the qu key to indicate the Polygon s vertices To complete the Polygon either right click or press the to automatically connect the beginning and end points Holding down the key while drawing a Polygon will snap the polygon s segments to 45 degree angles E Polygon Attributes Filled Po
434. signed to the Part before it is placed on the screen This number shows how many of that kind of Part were previously placed on the current screen When a Part is deleted from a screen all following Part numbers will be adjusted downwards Example of an ID number BS 010 Indicates that this Part is a Bit E Indicates the placement Switch creation order of the Part in Varies according to the Part this case it is the 10th The ID number is displayed in the title bar at the top of the Setting dialog box Bit Switch Settings BS_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Description Operation Bit Address CJ Bm He State On oF ttamniten LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 11 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Ge re The ID number can be entered so that it is displayed during Base screen w drawing 2 7 2 Screen Property Settings Even if the ID number is entered to be displayed during Base screen draw ing it will not be displayed on the LT panel after screen data transfer lt ID Number List gt Part Name ID Number BiSwih o WordSwith SS Function Swich SSS Meer B JHE EE gt DD RK KK E Maximum Number of Automatically Created Part Libraries When a Part is used in a project a Part Library will be automatically created in preparation for data transfer The number of Part Library items are limited to 6000 per project If this numb
435. signed to the small est number currently available B Scrpt List O Sccript 2 182 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yaw D Script Commands You can enter D Script commands Statements and constants using D Script tool box E D Script Tool Box The D Script tool box contains icons for D Script commands and State ments and constant input icons When the tool box check box is checked the following tool box will appear D Script Tool Box Statements li H iF nee x 7 ied Jag E Operators Draw ser P O This function is used to call up a previously registered Library Item The designated screen Base screen will be called up at the designated X Y coordinates Load Screen Screen Ho 1 Fosition gt 420 REY BI Position r LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 183 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Landscape type Designate apie type display these isplay X Y di coordinates X Y coordinates 0 0 X Y COOFr inates 629 399 Y 0 0 y e Dot Draws a dot at the designated point Designate a dot type its X Y coordi nates and its display color 2 3 and 5 dot groups cannot be selected e Polyline Draws a line at the designated position Designate the line s type color attributes
436. sions is display selected will Direction this selection appear Display Direction Here the Meter s display direction either Clockwise or Counterclockwise can be selected Axis Divisions Here the Meter increments are entered If the number of Divisions is specified as 10 11 division lines are displayed When no divisions are necessary simply enter 0 E Meter Shape Color Attributes Here a Meter s border color division color Axis Color and needle color Meter Color can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Meter Alarm Settings Attributes If desired an Alarm s settings can be set here 2 1 Parts Setting Alarms LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 43 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Meter The procedure for placing a Meter is as shown below Data stored in D00102 displays on the Tank Graph TT gt When data 34 22h is stored in D00102 the Meter will appear as follows PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Meter command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings area input the Word Ad dress and Data Format Heter Graph Settings MHT_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Enter Description 2 Absolute 3 Relative D001 02 Word Address Eome FE 1 Display Mode v Data Format X San Select BCD BCD 3 Select a Part Shape
437. so use the Alarm Settings area to choose an Part Shape Alarm and select Colors if desired Shape Browser PDE File Curent POB File c propbwinkpdbs pdb pdb Tite CG_3D001U F Heb 2 34 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Graph Settings tab select the display direc The area to enter the number of the tion and input the number of Axis Divisions divisions will appear only for a graph type which has axis divisions Pie Graph Settings Pl_001 Enter 10 Select Clkws From Top 5 After all of the Graph s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button A Pie Graph s outline will appear on the Base screen next to the cursor 6 Click on the point where the Pie Graph s top left cor To cancel the placement click on ner is to be placed the icon If desired use the Pie Graph s handles to alter its size To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 20 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Yana Half Pie Graphs This graph displays a Word Address numeric data received from a External Device as absolute or relativ
438. ss 7 ON oF a FE iet itf 5 Create a program in the Action area by clicking the buttons in the Opera tors Statements and Operands areas Action if i w p0200 70 wi L00304 100 w L00300 w LS00300 1 i endif Program Example if w D200 gt 70 If 70C or above w LS 302 100 70C or above alarm message screen No 100 assigned w L 300 w LS300 1 Count up errors endif if w D200 lt 30 lf 30C or below w LS 302 101 30C or below alarm message screen No 101 assigned w L 301 w LS301 1 Count up errors endif LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 205 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script 6 Click on the OK button The ID number and description you have entered will appear in the D Script List window D Scrpt List O Sccript 00001 Alarm Display 2 206 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 6 Data Sampling Yas Data Sampling Designated address data is sampled and stored backed up in the LT unit When using this function for a graph Part s channel Trend graph data can also be stored backed up Up to 20 sets of Data Sampling can be entered including the number of channels the setting attributes can also be confirmed in the Data Sampling Settings of the View menu 2 7 6 Data Sampling List E Overview
439. t ALLM 2 ALLM 2 gt ALLM 3 ALLM lt 3 gt SX te For details of variables please refer to the Logic Programming Operation 2 Manual or online help E Device Comment Types There are two types of bit device comments the word device comment corresponding to a word address and the bit device comment corresponding to a bit address Word Device Comment Bit Device Comment 4 20 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing E Edit Commands To edit symbols you can use the following commands ll dB Used to delete a symbol s line of data and store it on the clip board The Paste command allows you to then move that symbol to another line amp Used to copy a selected line of data to the clipboard RA Used to insert the line of data temporarily stored on the clip board into the desired row after the Cut Copy command has been performed aca Used to cancel the command previously performed and return to the previous condition However an edited symbol character cannot be restored E Using the Cut Copy Paste Commands Cut Copy Paste commands can be used to move data between different Symbol Editor files To do this simply open another LBE file and select a desired line Then use the Cut or Copy command and then the Symbol Editor s Paste command Do not register the same symbol name
440. t Back Ground Square gt The Library item to be displayed while the LT is running needs the filled square for the background to be the rearmost so that the items images do not overlay each other when they are switched When designating a Library item the LT Editor program will draw this colored square automatically Right after the Library item s is are placed the background square will match the size of the largest Library item designated After the items are placed it can be scaled larger or smaller independently from the Library items For a state with no designated Library item only a background square will be displayed and it will become the Library s deletion screen 1 e it will be overlaid on top of an existing item to delete that item 2 90 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Picture Display The Picture Display s creation procedure is shown below State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 The 3 pictures registered as libraries as illustrated above will change in response to changes in the state of Word Address D00250 PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Picture Display command or click on the Zm icon 2 In the General Settings area enter an Address and select a Mode Picture Display Settings LE_001 l General Settings Library Image Enter D00250 Description Address Mode Select Word
441. t Device Comment Data CSV Format gt GP_COMMENT Word Address Device Comment Name lt Give one line feed between a word address and a bit address gt Bit Address Device Comment Name Example GP_COMMENT DO0100 Machine A stops D00101 Machine A is now operating gt One line feed X00100 Pump B X00101 Pump B GP_SYMBOL and GP_COMMENT are identifiers indicating they are Symbol and Device Comment Data respectively important Give a line feed only between a word symbol and a bit symbol If an unnecessary line feed is given in any other place data cannot be imported LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 23 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS Import symbol data To import a device comment se lect the Import Device Comment 1 Select the File menu Import Symbol command command or click on the icon 2 Select a file LBE or CSV to be imported or en ter the file name and click on the Gren button ura Important pe A To import a device com sai Plant Project LBE ment select the Import Device Comment com mand Fie none HER Files of type LBE Files LBE a Cancel ly a If the same symbol name already exists the system asks If the same symbol name exists as if you wish to replace the symbol name a Logic symbol name Import as Import as command i
442. t Editing E Pasting a Part placed to the screen to a Logic Program Here the procedure for copying and pasting a part placed to the screen to a logic program is explained When pasting the Part the type of instruction to be converted to must be selected from the list Before copying a Part you have to allocate a variable Logic symbol to the Part Parts without a variable allocated cannot be E r P importan COpied to a logic program ives A variable will be registered with the Symbol Editor as a Logic symbol when Nel the logic program is saved PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the desired Part on the Screen Editor 1 2 3 Creating B Drawi Screen Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Library window Help Editing Saving a Logic Program Ose o e 88le gt elloo sees L006 ORX Ik OOC Gh OB amp ww fa 2 paa 7 ore IOFHUNGeS Y ORBRERi b BCH 293 237 s82 2 Mu l ee a r r A A Ty Dn Ul IN QUIT Fill Timer PT ld A1000 Logit ouch Type A 2 Select the Screen Editor Edit menu Copy com To cancel the Copying click on the mand or click on the icon icon The selected Part will be copied to the Clipboard 3 Select the rung where you wish to insert an instruc tion on the Logic Program Editor and then select Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon
443. t corresponding to an entered device address can be entered on the Parts list by clicking on a specified button This can be done in either of the following two ways 1 Select the address setting field and click on the Apply De vice Comment button The device comment corresponding to the selected address will be reflected in the Description field 2 Select a Part by its line and click on the Apply Device Com ment button If there are multiple address setting items for that Part the descrip tion corresponding to the address specified in the Address Table for Automatic Input of Device comment will be reflected in the Description field 2 3 8 Reflection of Device Comments LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques E Exporting to a CSV File The Parts list information can be saved as a CSV file You can also select whether the currently selected page tab s information will be exported or the entire page will be exported ik it View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help F yl eec o ee A 8 3 ju ajA w HI B 5 3 in SE El amp A u B s ge aje F Bit Switch B
444. t ves otherwise Image Screen Conflict El Do you wish to overwrite existing Screens A To cancel conversion click on the button If data conversion is executed with the Edit menu Convert Place Bitmap command the converted image will be placed in the Image screen immediately after data con version 3 27 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS sw Compressing Decompressing an Image Screen If an Image screen has a large data volume you can compress the bitmap data to reduce the data size and send the compressed Image screen directly to the LT series With the compressed Image screen however the LT series display speed will be lowered PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Utility menu Compress Bitmap com mand of the Project Manager 2 Select the screen to be compressed or decompressed_ To compress an Image screen bit from the list map data of another project select the project 1 2 2 Selecting an Existing Project Compress Bitmaps To select several screens click on the screen numbers while press ing the key To select a specified screen click on the screen number while The compression and decompression procedures are pressing the Ctrl key separately described as follows Compression 3 Click on the Compress button to execute data com pression The process is finished when the word Compressed appears
445. tai UOT r OON CONTO Enter the number of Specify the characters cursor position used for the retention names being Pee cer i displayed No of Display Lines Specify the number of Filing Data rows displayed on the LT A maximum of 50 rows may be specified No of Display Characters Specify the number of Filing Data characters used on each row A maximum of 100 characters may be specified Direct Selection Select a File Name Display being placed on the LT by directly touching its border If Direct Selection is not used select the file name using the data scroll switches Roll Up Roll Down E File Name Display Switch Settings Attributes Cursor Position Control Even when the screens are changed on the LT the current screen s cursor position can be retained When turning the LT s main power switch ON or resetting the LT however the cursor will appear in the first line Sr The cursor position will be stored for each ID No To retain the cursor posi Note tion be sure that the File Name Display ID Nos will not be overlapped XV through all the screens E File Name Display Style Color Attributes Specify a color display color Fg for characters in the Filing Data display area and a color display color Bg of the Filing Data display area 2 1 Selecting Colors 2 62 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E
446. tax check is available during program creation e Syntax auxiliary function provides a pop up keyboard for address settings to enhance programming efficiency e Programming commands can be entered via icons LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 21 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script NEVER use the D Script Global D Script function A for the control of machines or actions which have Warning the possibility of resulting in either operator injury or damage to equipment A e D script and Global D script cannot be registered as Libraries Important To select Global D Script open any Base screen in advance 2 5 1 D Script Settings D Script can be added edited and deleted on the D Script list D Script is programmed with the D Script Editor For details of the D Script s com mands please refer to 2 5 2 D Script Commands D Script Add Modify or or Special gt or Global Delete 4 ie D Script key An example of the D Script dialog box the initial screen is shown below Adds a D Script D Script List D Sccript Deletes a Lists the D registered D Script ID eHPh numbers and Allows you to descriptions edit the con tents of a D Script Copies the contents of a D Script Pastes the copied contents of a D Script 2 176 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATIN
447. ted via Interlock Address is in a state that has been selected via Touch available condition radio buttons the switch becomes effective Whether the switch is effective in ON state or in OFF state is selectable here Touch Available Interlock Address Touch Available Condition Status Not Available ON Touch Available OFF Touch NotAvailable ON Touch NotAvailable OFF Touch Available E Bit Switch Shape Color Attributes Here the Switch s border color Frame ON OFF state colors On Color Off Color and pattern can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors The color and pattern settings available will differ depending on the switch s settings E Bit Switch Label Attributes Here the text of the Label to be displayed on the Switch button is entered 2 1 Parts Creating Labels LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide pra We Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Bit Switch An example of how to place a Bit Invert switch is shown below ye CORO First press of the Switch 2 1 Parts oo CKO The next press resets M0016 sets M0016 PROCEDURE 1 Select the Parts menu Bit Switch command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings screen input the Bit Ad dress and select the Bit s Function Bit Switch Settings B5_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Enter M0016 Description Operation Bit Address oon
448. tem aterm vate toe General Info The General Info page provides information about the current settings for Totals Settings Total Settings eneral Info Size Style Alarm Settings 3 Total G Row Number Column Humber Aow Type Data Calculation 5 ettings Alam Settings Display Style Mo of Display Digits Decimal Places Size Style Total Settings General Info Size S tyle Alarm Settinas Display Format No of Display Digits E Decimal Places jo Calor ettirig s M Display Color Fg BOO i am a No Bik I s BOOS SCORE nook Display Style Ci Shift Right JA Zero Suppress Preview shit Lett 00008 C Data Calculation Settings Select the desired calculation item from Total Average Maximum and Mini mum The calculation attributes can be set up for the entire Data row or Value column At this time the applicable column s attribute is Date Time or Char Col and the Data Calculation Set tings cannot be designated Data cal culation is performed via the 32 Bit for mat Display Format No of Display Digits Enter the number of display digits The numbers displayed after the decimal point is also included However the decimal point is not included itself Enter a value in a range from to 16 Decimal Places Enter the number of digits after the deci mal point in a range from 0 to 14 This setting 1s
449. ter Alarm settings and select Colors if desired 2 1 Parts Se lecting a Part Shape Shape Browser HG_3D003 HG_3D004 Curent PDE File o spropbsvinpdbop4 3d01 pdb Title HG_3D001 ia LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 39 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 4 In the Graph Settings tab input the number of axis divisions Half Pre Graph Settings HP_001 General Settings Graph Settings ShapeColor Alarm Settings Display Direction i Clachuioe E nt er 1 0 5 After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Half Pie graph s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Half Pie Graph s top left corner is to be placed If desired use the Half Pie graph s handles to alter its SIZe 2 1 Parts REMARKS The area to enter the number of the divisions will appear only for a graph type which has axis divi sions To cancel the placement click on the icon To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 40 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapte
450. tered in the Filing Data list 1 to 2047 The names under this number are displayed when the file is opened Tag Reference Manual 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Function Use LS Area When Filing Data is transferred between backup SRAM and the External Device it can be modified on the LT screen by routing it via the LS area the data is stored temporarily in the LS area If data transfer via the LS area is used specify the LS area s start word address where Filing Data will be stored from The address where the data can be stored is from LS0020 to LS2031 and LS2096 to LS4095 External Device Transfer If set this bit will turn ON when transfer of filing data to the External Device is completed Since this Bit does not turned OFF automatically to use the External Device Transfer Completed Bit again turn it OFF before hand Note When the External Device Transfer Completed Bit Address has been entered in the case where filing data cannot be transferred to the External Device the LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 61 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E File Name Display Display Attributes File Display FD_001 x General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ype Color Enter the No of Display Lines A mj number of No of Display Characters an E names being Specify the name displayed Direct Selection selection method T Cursor Padiionton
451. tes the case where upload information is sent to the LT panel and the case where upload information is not sent to the LT unit separately The ratio of the current total data volume to the LT unit s total memory capacity is displayed in Referring to the LT unit s total memory capacity you can calculate the approximate number of screens that can be accepted by the LT panel When the data volume is indicated as select the Project s Trans fer menu and then select the Prepare command 7 2 3 Transfer Preparation LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 35 4 4 Information Display Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT Use this value only as a guideline Depending on the size of the memory stored in the LT a screen of allowable size may not be entirely transferred Extended Screen Count Displays the number of screens that will be created in the LT unit relative to the current project file Since this value includes the LT unit s internal screens it is larger than the number of screens that have been created with LT Editor for Windows 95 To display this information set up the current project file in the Transfer Preparation mode If the project file is not in the Transfer Preparation mode the number of screens is indicated as LTI E Screen Information This screen shows the number of screen types alarm messages and channels contained in the current project
452. text will be centered E Text Attributes Enter text here A maximum of 100 characters can be entered per line and 100 lines per screen Selects the text s display direction Specifies the character width and height Character Size Style te Normal it Bold Aaited Font Size Bx16 F oD e M ENE Display a sample of the current text s attributes Selects the Character Type Rotates the text in 90 degree increments Selects the Fg and Bg colors and blinking Clicking on the font size display area displays the current character size used after text is placed on the drawing area Move the cursor to where the X and Y axis lines cross and drag the cursor As the axis lines move the character size will change Click on the text block again or press the key to register enter the change Font Size LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 111 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing Style Characters can be either Normal Bold or Raised Style Normal 9 Bold i Raised Siw When text character background Bg is specified to Black BIk Blink transparent mode is used thereby displaying that area as transparent If an object has been drawn underneath these characters they the characters will appear transparent showing the object behind This function is useful when overlaying text on objects i e over the face
453. the point clicked on a dot move the cursor to the de sired point and press the J key To cancel delete the dot click on the a icon Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s Attribute Set tings dialog box 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 2 2 Line Poly line In order to draw a line simply click to designate the line s start and end points A continuous straight line can also be drawn holding down the key allows you to draw lines at precisely 0 45 or 90 angles E Line Polyline Attributes When drawing a polyline check this box Lx Selects a line type imal with or without arrows The currently selected line s image appears l here Selects a line type Fo Oe E JE Pee ko Select a color and blinking if desired 2 96 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Drawing a Straight Line PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Line Poly line command or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes of a straight line to be drawn If necessary select the color and line type If an arrow is selected the oe Polyline E line s end point will become an ar ie H T_ Folyline a row ie SS SS Fo Pelee me MEMME O E 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area click on the In step 4 while holding the line s starting
454. the screen to other drawing software ia P AA A AA A EAE RR EEN EEEE E For Help click Help Topics on the Help Mill i An area where text graphics or both that have been Cut or Copied are temporarily stored The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted copied from the Clipboard using the Paste function However once the Copy Cut command is executed the data stored in the Clipboard is replaced therefore only the data from the most recent Copy Cut command can be Pasted LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 153 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing rewu Converting a Screen to a Bitmap File The current screen is converted into a bitmap file and then saved The screen types that can be converted are the Base B screen and Mark M screen Usage Pattern Screen to Setting Edit bitmap file 2 Specify how to save the bitma bitmap file file i Screen to Screen to Edit bitmap file bitmap file E Designating a Bitmap s File Name Before converting the screen to a bitmap file specify how to save the bitmap file Specify a file name and output destination to save the file Setting bitmap file name ia Prompt for filename when saving 24 Automatically create file name Specify how a Automatically Fle Hene wne Ea file name is to 1 Type Humber BMP be created creates a file name
455. thout any fill white may develop inside the polygon If fill is desired in these areas as well click on the icon E e LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 107 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing To draw or create a Scale input the number of divisions desired and then left click the mouse s cursor to designate the scale s beginning and end points Scales can be either horizontal or vertical linear straight line or curved semi circle E Scale Attributes Scale ny Type Divisions e ect the E Curved Scale s type fe Linear Vertical Select the line type 5 Jee e E Drawing a Scale PROCEDURE 1 Select the Draw menu Scale command or click on the avai icon 2 Set the attributes of the divisions to be marked Select the Scale s colors line type and Scale type and in put the number of scale divisions If Linear is selected as the type select the orientation direction by clicking on the Vertical check box x Type Divisions 2 Curved a Diner K Vertical as See eee Fo eee Ba eee ek 2 108 Saas H oo eK Enter the number of divisions desired x Displays the cur rently selected object s image Only with straight line Scales Changes the scale s orienta tion to vertical default is horizontal Select the Color and blinking if desired REMARKS lt Number of Divisions gt
456. ting 3 When performing automatic data transmission setup the External Device amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings via the same dialog box Automatic Data Transmission is completed here 4 When performing manual data transmission type 1 setup the Filing Data Display and designate its placement Manual Data Transmission type 1 is completed here 5 When performing manual data transmission Type 2 setup the Keypad Display and designate its placement Manual Data Transmission Type 2 setting 1s completed here 10 8 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe me Filing Data Setting Use the following setting items to create multiple folders and a trigger for transferring data Select Filing Setting from the Screen Setup Filing Data menu Filing Setting J Filing ON OFF Write Settings Fram Filing Data To SAAM Control Word Address 00 0000 gt EE Write Completed Bit Address on oo00000 ia TE External Device amp SAAM Direct Data Transmission Settings T_ Extemal Device Controlled Transfer Control Word Address 000000 Fel ee Transmit Completed Bit Address qqeqgooon fe TE Filing ON OFF Check this check box in order to use the filing data Use Multiple Folders Check this check box in order to register 2 or more folders Write Settings From Filing Data To SRAM In response to a trigger
457. ting dialog box Label TN As with Parts Label display colors can be created for each of a 2 state Part s states up to 4 lines of text can be used for each state lt OFF state gt lt ON state gt When a lamp s Text Display changes This Switch s ON OFF colors are also selected x re The Part must be large enough to display the entire Label D Enter the charac Bit Switch Settings B5_001 When the Part has two states the appropriate Label can be selected with these buttons switched On Off Select the character s size Selects the character s type Label OFF Test Turn Off the OFF Text Color Fo ieee E e Bo HE E N E A cd ters here General Settings Shape Color Label Copies the charac ters in the Descrip tion field to the label for the se lected state Copies the charac ters to the label for the Off state Settings required only when the text extends to more than one line Select the label s color here Here you can type in the text displayed on a button When typing in text press the l key to move to a new line When the Tracking check box is checked fj enabled after the Part has been placed on the screen if the Label s size or position is changed for either state the alternate state s Label size and position will be also automatically changed If however the Label s size and position need to be specified independently for eac
458. ting Alarms 2 28 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Bar Graph An example of the Bar Graph s creation and placement procedures are shown below Data stored in D00102 displays on the Bar Graph ste ssr When the value 34 22h is stored in D00102 the graph will look like this PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Bar Graph command or click on the gih icon 2 In the General Settings tab input a Word Address and select a Data Format Bar Graph Settings BA_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Desci ption fe Absolute i Relative E nte r D001 02 j Word Address h e re E ie L Display Mode Data Format T ads Select BCD i BCD 3 Select a Part Shape that has graduations from the sarin ett e 2 1 Parts Se Here you can enter Alarm settings and select Colors 1 lecting a Part Shape desired TET If the Bar Graph s Alarm value is specified as Variable a pointer showing levels will be displayed This pointer s position will move according to the specified Alarm value Level pointer BG_3D003U v PDE File Curent POB File c propbswinpdbop4 3d01 pdb Title BG_3D002U i LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 229 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS
459. tion E Filing Data Transfer Flow Filing data is first written from the LT s internal memory then to the LT s backup SRAM and then is transferred to the External Device either directly or via the LS area LT Internal memory Backup SRAM lt Filing data External Device E Managing Filing Data in Group Filing data is organized into folders files blocks and data Also to use as much filing data as possible multiple folders can be used in the LT s inter nal memory to register multiple filing data items You can register multiple folders by selecting Use Multiple Folders from the Filing Settings menu Folder 1 Folder 2 When multiple folders are not used Only 1 folder is registered In this case the folder number is usually not designated however whenever it is necessary the number is designated as 1 When multiple folders are used Multiple filing data folders can be registered In the LT the folder numbers need to be designated to transfer data to the LT s internal memory and backup SRAM Since only one filing data folder can be used on the LT at one time select which folder will be used e Multiple folders can be registered in both the LT s internal memory e Up to 64 folders can be registered in the LT s internal memory e Select a folder to be used on the LT e Only one folder of data can be transferred to the LT s backup SRAM LogiTouch Editor Ver 1
460. tion area are performed Edge Bit Address GN ap l FIE 1 taf 2 178 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS f t Expression becomes Non Zero When the LT detects true of a given condition in a triggering program the statements described in the Action area are performed only one time at the detection t f Expression becomes Zero When the LT detects false of a given condition in a triggering program the statements described in the Action area are performed only one time at the detection Trigger _ Simple Edge Expression iy FEJ P g P mA ON OS fei fot fa tof e The bit designated for the Bit Rising Falling option must be held ON or OFF for longer than the Part scanning time stored in LS2036 e Printing or drawing operation may cause a timer delay e The Timer feature when a screen change is performed will reset to 0 with D Script When using Global D Script the timer continues the current counting e The timer may produce designated time or Part scanning time errors External Device Connection Manual 1 1 4 4 1 3 Special Relay e Writing on the external device must be performed at an inter val longer than a cycle time If writing on the external device is frequently performed using a part scan counter of the special relay inside the LT as a trigger communication
461. tion of the file or disk failure Solve the problem and try again to read the file Disk Error File Error During Write The disk is write protected Take off the write protection This error also occurs when the disk is defective Unable to open file A porton of the fle cannot be found To recover Would you like to try to find it elsewhere _ divided files and recreate the original project file all the divided fles are required Unable to open file for reading The file cannot be opened The file is corrupt or aborting the disk has a problem Afer correcting the problem re try opening the file The file named is inserted here E Rebuild Tool Errors ErrorMessage _ _ _ Cause Solution File version does not match The specifed fle contains setings for a version which is not supported by this rebuilding tool Re specify a projectfile LTE file Rebuilding the File has Failed Recovery of the file has failed This file is OS PMNS letegt dct LTE header is destroyed The file header information is corrupt This file AI leetereadcomateuse LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 11 Appendix 1 Error Messages Appendices E DXF File Conversion Errors The error messages generated during DXF file conversion are as follows xynn lt message gt line gt a Conversion direction 1 DXF gt LT 2 LT DXF y Procedure 1 Read 2 Conversion 3 W
462. to Direct designate the Alarm Range When se lecting Relative value display the Dis play Range designated in the Data For mat tab is used as normal display s Min and Max Values automatically The possible Alarm ranges varies depend ing on the Data Format selected Alarm Color If the data exceeds the Alarm Range the Alarm display appears in the desig nated colors gt COM SCOME oni eo MOUS MCCMe NEF lt Alarm Range List gt Data Format Alarm Range 327608 to 32 67 0 to 65535 0 to FFFF h so J to 9999 10 50 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 2 Logging Size Style Column Settings General Info Data Foma Sizer Style Alarm Settings E Format Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink Mo of Display Digits E Decimal Places 0 i Color Settings Display Color e BOOM EF No ek Display Style Previ fi Shift Right J Zero Suppress ee E Shift Lett oo008 General Info Column Type Char Col Char Col Displays text 2 Column Type 7 Value j Date Time fe Char Col General Info Column Mo Data Type tee Display Format wee Input nen Alarm Settings Display Style No of Display Digits Decimal Place 3 Row Settings Display E Attribute Settings Select either Item Name or Data ro
463. to save the file 1 Tipe t umber t Comment BHP automatically Tutput Falher D PROPB3 DATABASE Specify an output pecity put p oo o destination of the Se eee file when a file name is being created automati cally i Prompt for filename when saving When the Screen to bitmap file command is executed the Save As dialog box will appear where you can specify the location and name of the file to be saved Automatically create file name When the Screen to bitmap file command is executed a file name will be created automatically and the file saved in a previously specified location Example If the No 1 screen of the Base B screen named Menu is converted into a bitmap file Screen type number BMP gt B1 BMP Screen type number screen title BMP gt B1 Menu BMP 2 154 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing E Converting a Screen into a Bitmap File PROCEDURE 1 Select the Setting bitmap file option for the Screen to bitmap file command from the Edit menu 2 Select a method for saving the bitmap file and es tablish it by clicking on the button Setting bitmap file name 4 Prompt for filename when saving 17 Automatically create file name FIE Hame bpe i Type Humber BHP i Tips Hambert Conment BHE Durau Falher DAPROPBADATABASE Ewe i DK or Cancel f Help 3 Select the Screen to bitma
464. ton A cover page with a title company name to display the date time name and a bit map can be Options dialog included with the document box A te The printing setting information can be saved by clicking on the X button e The printing orientation is Vertical Portrait e Only A3 BP or AJ paper can be used for printing 9 2 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 9 Printing 9 1 Print Settings Cover Page Dialog Box Check this box to Cover Page print a title on the cover page Check this box to print a company name on the Enter a title ora cover page company name of up to 3 lines 40 charac Check this box to ters per line Oy Date amp Time L Name print a name on j the cover page Check this box to PN ver pag i Eitma include the date and 1 Bitmap Enter the name time of printing on ioe Layout her Check this box to include a Bit map on the cover page Click on this button to preview the cover page layout When Bit map printing is selected the placement of the Bit map on the cover page can be changed Comment Information Dialog Box Comment Information Enter a comment of up to 40 lines 80 characters per line Options Dialog Box Settings in the Options dialog box allow you to format the pages of the document to be printed You can specify the range of page numbers to be printed the screen color
465. top of the current window If this option is not selected selecting another screen will place that screen over the Library screen hiding it from view LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 161 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items 2 4 1 Registering Library Items Here the procedure for registering a Library is explained PROCEDURE 1 Select objects to be registered as Library items 2 Select the Library menu Register Library com mand or click on the a icon lt A When registering a new Library item to the currently open Library file gt 3 Enter the Library s registration number and descrip tion In the Cell Number area the smallest of the currently open Library file s unused numbers will be automati cally displayed To change it simply enter the desired number Save Library Cell Number OF Description pach 4 Click on the button to register the number The registered Library will then be displayed in the Browser pment A 100 switch F e 47 Yolume SW se 48 Volume SW ci tif 50 Numeric Input REMARKS 2 3 1 Selecting Objects Registering Library Items If the Library Browser is already showing click on either or icon 1n the screen editor drawing area and the icon in the Library Browser which will perform the function of step 2 The following procedures will differ depending on the Libr
466. tor The Symbol Editor enables you to assign an address to a symbol and then register that symbol and to assign a device comment to an address and then register it The Symbol is the registered name used to indicate the address of any Part Thus when you change the address corresponding to a symbol you will automatically change a Part s address es without having to re setting the Part The device comment indicates a comment assigned attached to each address When setting a Part s address es simply clicking on Apply Device Comment reflects the registered device comment to the Part s comment field 2 1 Parts Part Attributes Entering a Comment In all the address entry fields such as of Parts addresses registered via the Symbol Editor will be displayed in a pull down list together with the sym bols or device comments Addresses can also be specified here by selecting them from this list 2 1 Parts Part Attributes Entering Addresses The symbol and device comment data can be shared between multiple Projects by import and export ae The registered symbol and device comment information can be printed as a XX symbol list 9 1 1 Print Settings Usage Pattern Select Word Enter a Save the Screen Symbol symbol or Bit symbol symbol Setup Editor symbol name data Symbol Editor Select a desired File Edit Wiew Help symbol or com Zetia le Bllgele Pop up Keypad
467. ttings AL_OO1 General Settings Display Format Style Color Description Word Address Border Type 3 No Border Ho of Monitor fords z z 3 In the Display Format tab input the Display Start Line No of Display Lines and No of Characters In the Style Color tab select the Clear ing of Data Color if desired Enter M0800 Enter 7 Select Border type Alarm Summary Settings AL_OO1 General Settings Display Format Style Color Enter 1 Display Start Line 1 Enter 10 Mo of Display Char 30 Mo of Display Lines i 0 Enter 30 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2257 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Alarm Summary display area s border will appear in the Base screen next to your cursor 5 Click on the point where the Alarm Summary dis To cancel placement click on the play area s top left corner is to be placed icon If desired use the Alarm Summary display handles to To change the Part size refer to alter its size When the Alarm Summary display is scaled 2 3 3 Scaling Up up or down the displayed character size will also change according to the border s size Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s Attribute Settings dialog box
468. tton 3 Change the screen number and title and then click onthe OK button to delete the screen Important Hain EJ If any existing screen num Project File Digital Plant Fok Bpi 2 Screen Type Base Screen e ber IS specified It will be Scheer overwritten The currently open screen cannot be changed LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 5 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS Changing Multiple Screens at a Time 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the E icon 2 Select multiple screens to be changed from the list To select multiple screens at a time and click on the Change button drag the mouse through the desired screens on the list or click on those screens while holding the Shift or key down The currently open screen cannot be changed 3 Specify the start screen number at the destination and then click on the COo button 13 is specified here The difference between the start The specified number comes to the top and the subsequent screen number at the destination numbers are changed automatically with increments of off and that at the source is taken as an set values offset value Since the start screen Screen Change x number 1 IS to be changed to 13 se E wa here the offset value is 12 This SEER Cancel offset valu
469. tton the system saves sereen the Save As dialog box ap ears the updated data If you click on the button P the system closes the screen without saving the updated 1 2 4 Saving a data Screen under a Different Name Drawing Board E Quitting the Screen Editor PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Screen menu Exit command or click on in the Screen Editor 2 The Screen Editor will close If you attempt to close the Screen Editor without first When you save a new screen the saving the currently edited screen LT Editor asks if you Save As dialog box appears wish to save the updated screen If you click on the 1 2 4 Saving a button LT Editor saves the updated data If Screen under a Different Name you click on the button LT Editor quits the Screen Editor without saving the updated data Drawing Board D save changes to Screen Untitled 1 16 LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 2 From Start to Finish E Quitting LT Editor PROCEDURE 1 Select the Project menu Exit command or click on exit in the Project Manager 2 The Project Manger will quit If you attempt to close the Project Manager without sav ing the currently opened screen s updated data LT Edi tor asks if you wish to save your project s data If you click on the button LT Editor saves the up dated data If you click on the button LT Edi tor quits
470. uction you have to allocate a variable L to the instruction Instructions without a variable allocated Important cannot be copied to the screen e Before pasting an instruction be sure to save the logic pro gram PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the desired instruction on the Logic Program Editor GE Logic Program Editor Soda File Edit View 1 2 3 Creating Editing Saving a Logic Program Search Insert Data Controller Help Hal eo xka aka eee ee lele F aa el e e E wx1 0 3 Small_pushbutton 6 IPI EN ON o 4000 IN QUT Fill Timer PT 2000 Number_of Smalls CTU ole 0 4 Mediurn pushbutton MIO 7 P EN DON Ott BOOO IN QUT Fill Tirner PT 2000 ca 2 Select the Logic Program Editor Edit menu Copy To cancel the Copying click on the command or click on the icon a icon The selected instruction will be copied to the Clipboard een Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Library Window Help omaja ejoo seals Soasoxxeealely Pcl cece Bowe eee eet a ogic Program Editor Soda ioe Nae ia Ae LY Ory amp File Edt View Search Insert Data Controller Help De E trate A eee alal xla4 eae 1Hal ol2 21 S o o Pee a eA a AS A ST NS F alol r n ujel t l 2 IORPaHRUGS SOLA 0 3 Srmall_pushbuttan Man IPI EN DN Of
471. uide 10 1 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 Advanced Features UWAP Filing Data Recipe Setting data that you have created and stored on the LT can be easily trans ferred to the External Device whenever necessary using LT touch keys or by specifying bit addresses in the External Device Also Filing Recipe Data that has been transferred to the External Device can be then sent back to the LT edited and then transferred again to the External Device LT External Device Designated Word Address E Overview 10 2 There are two methods of transmitting filing data to the External Device One is automatic transmission where filing data is sent to the External Device via a External Device trigger The other is manual transmission where data selected on the LT screen is sent to the External Device When using manual data transmission select the Filing Data Display from the Tool Box or Parts menus Filing data can be controlled by file numbers for each project file Filing data can be stored in the LT s internal memory Filing data is stored in the External Device in a series of addresses Setting up filing data so that it is transmitted via an LS Area allows filing data to be edited on the LT panel and then written to the External Device LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 10 1 Filing Data Recipe 10 1 1 Filing Data Recipe Func
472. um Alarm values When the Alarm value has been specified as indirect the maximum and minimum values can also be specified as indirect In this case the Word Address number used to store these values will be automatically assigned continuously from the Word Address currently specified The following example uses n to denote where the Word Address display data is stored lt Indirect Alarm Settings gt Alarm Range Min Value 10 Word Addresses are automati cally allocated in sequence starting from the Address desig nated Bi Max Value SU a lt Relationship between display data s storage address and Alarm register address gt With 16 Bit data With 32 Bit data n Display Data n n 1 Data value Max n 1 Display Data n 2 Data value Min n 2 Data value Max n 3 n 4 Data value Min n 5 When a variable Logic symbol is used as a start address an integer array must be designated For an integer array an ap important propriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Alarm Color Here you can select the colors used for an Alarm display 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 9 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 10 E Creating Labels Here a Label means the text characters shown on the faces of the Switch and Lamp button Parts Labels can be registered via the Part s Set
473. up or down to view the entire screen e Screen Center Mark Indicates the center of the screen This mark is not displayed when the data is sent to the LT unit LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 23 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 5 Screen Editor f Grid Points Used as reference points when you draw or paste an object in the drawing mode Grid points will not be displayed on the LT unit s screen The Option area s Snap function allows you to position your screen objects using a pre made grid You can also set the interval and display ON OFF status of the grid points SLEEK 2 7 1 Grid Snap g Status Bar Displays information related to the current screen and provides messages explaining the screen operation you are currently performing 256 142 e j Ready Coordinates Amount of Screen Description of the of current memory currently currently selected Project s sia ee gt mouse used Ratio of used command External a a position screen area to entire Device pega ean ae screen h Tool Bar The Tool Bar provides easy to use icons for drawing and editing Clicking on one of these icons performs that command The Tool Bar can either be hidden or displayed and individual Tool Bar areas can be moved freely around the Screen Editor screen 1 e top bottom left or right The following Tool Bar areas are available Main Tool Bar Edit Tool Bar Draw Tool Bar Option Tool B
474. us Screen Next Screen from the Screen menu or opening a screen with the Open Screen switch 4 specify whether the next screen is opened with the currently active screen open or after that active screen is closed Up to 20 screens may be opened continuously Display in Load Screen Object You can specify whether Part addresses and ID numbers on a screen which has been called up using the Load Screen command are displayed or hidden Load Screen Double Click Specify an edit method for editing a screen that has been called up on another screen where the Load Screen command was executed or for editing a screen on the Screen List If Change Attribute is specified the Load Screen dialog box will be opened enabling you to select a screen to be called up screen number If Edit Screen is specified the screen that has been called up will be opened allowing you to edit the data LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Technmiques Parts ID Designates whether or not a Part s ID number is displayed on the Base screen Device Address Designates whether or not Part Addresses are displayed on the Base screen Part Addresses appear below the ID number Information Data Size Selects the character size displayed from Standard half size and Minimized 1 4 size for ID No and Address Used Hairline Cursor Changes the
475. using any of the following External Devices specify the Ex Start Address Start Address if l l ternal Device number as well pagg Tera oO00 eee e H FACTORY ACE 1 n communica m tion Yokogawa Electric Corp aa SDC Series Yamatake Electric w Base Screen i All Corp J Alam Message 2 Selection THERMAC NEO series J Sampling Data Screens From OMRON y Filing Data E w Data Logging Settings Le i Global D Script Line No From JA D 5 cript Function 7 External Device No 3 Enter the address conversion range and the updated initial address Before this step is performed be sure that the first and last device codes used are the same You cannot specify an address conversion range for a different device Address Conversion l When converting addresses be sure that the address settings meet the following condition Final address before conver sion Initial address before i paa conversion lt Final address af mow e po ii ter conversion Initial ad End ddress dress after conversion If the left side is larger than the al Seer sae l right side in the above formula the eared a Parts corresponding to the surplus screens From 1 F addresses will be assigned to the al Filing Data Data Logging Settings final address of the same device w Global D 5 cript m D Scrnpt Function Taf i LineNo From f To i i LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Oper
476. using the product 5 Even though the information contained in and displayed by this prod uct may be related to intangible or intellectual properties of the Digital Electronics Corporation or third parties the Digital Electronics Corpo ration shall not warrant or grant the use of said properties to any users and or other third parties 6 The specifications set out in this manual are for overseas products only As a result some differences may exist between the specifica tions given here and for those of the identical Japanese product _ Oe en ee SO re Oo re Oe CO A ee ee ee ee Css es ee ee Mii IM ee ee eee eee lo Copyright 2001 Digital Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Digital Electronics Corporation May 2001 For the rights to trademarks and trade names see TRADEMARK RIGHTS LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide l Ne e e e a o o o E O E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E O O E A E A Preface TRADEMARK RIGHTS All company or product names used in this manual are the trade names trademarks including registered trademarks or service marks of their respective companies This product omits individual descriptions of each of these rights Trademark Trade Name Right Holder Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows Explorer Microsoft Excel 95 Intel Pentium Intel Corporati
477. verwritten from the Ist top data area loop operation Also the LT s backup SRAM storage area becomes one large storage area that has a linked buffer like structure lt Without Loop Operation gt Block 0 Logging Data 1 Each logging data item uses the same Logging Data 2 number of Words The range of the number of Words is from 1 to 32 Se Logging Data n Block 1 Logging Data 1 Logging Data 2 Pa Logging Data n Block m 1 Logging Data 1 Logging Data 2 Logging Data n Ste e When data logging is performed for the designated number of blocks the XX LT will turn the File Full Bit Address ON and data logging will stop e To resume data logging turn the Data Clear Bit Address ON from the External Device The LT then clears all logging data and will start data logging from the beginning LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 29 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features With Loop operation When data logging is performed to the end of a loop cycle data logging repeats from the beginning and overwrites the existing data Only one block is used which has a linked buffer like structure and is similar to the link buffer After data logging is completed and control jumps from the end of the block to the beginning the LT will turn the File Full Bit Address ON Turning this Address ON simply indicates that data logging has been per formed from the beginning to th
478. viously registered 2 1 15 Message Displays message according to External Device Word Address data changes A maximum of 16 messages can be displayed in a single Message Display Date Display Displays the current date using the LT s 2 1 16 Date Displays obi intemal calendar Time Display Displays the current time using the LT s 2 1 17 Time Displays 7 internal clock Picture Display Displays a single registered Library 2 1 18 Picture Displays image only graphic data according to Extemal Device Word Address data changes A maximum of 16 different Library images can be displayed in a single Picture Display One at a time E Entering a Comment If desired a comment can be entered for a Part Bit Switch Settings BS_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Applies the Up to 20 Description Operation Bit Address device com alphanumeric ee ment single byte State On on Hanita characters can Monitor Bit Address be entered 24 enom Function f Bit Set Browser a Bit Reset i Momentary i Bit Invert GG Interlock Interlock Address fe konna Bl Touch available condition 2 Bik Ory I Bib Of Reflection of a Device Comment If you click on the Ral Apply Device Comment button after entering an address the device comment entered using the Symbol Editor 1s automati cally searched for and the comment corresponding to the entered device appears in the Description field 4 2 5
479. w and click on the Settings button to edit each row s attributes Display Settings aa copy Paste cue tern oe General Info Selecting Item Name Row The General Info page provides infor Bo mation about the current settings for E Item Name Settings General Info Rom Type Color F LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 51 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features Color ltem Settings Bran Car Color Settings Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore seskNene Fo MCI OWE noe ground Bg background and Blk oo OOS Oe eee blink ok i cancer Heo Gees The row color settings have priority over the column color settings General Info Selecting Data Row The General Info page provides information about the current settings for Data settings Row Type Select the desired type of display from the Data and Char Col settings G eneral Info Row Number 2 Row Type t Data i Char Col Saneeeeeeeet on cance Hew 10 52 Logilouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 Advanced Features 4 Totals Display E Attribute Settings 10 2 Logging To set up the calculation attributes select the Totals cell and click on the Settings button Display Settings Settinas aa copy eects E cuz O Ki
480. when this data was downloaded please delete Blocks 2 and 3 a L Quit other applicatons re allocate memory and paste the messages again Low Memory not all alarms were copied Memory is not sufficient to paste all the messages Try copying a smaller group Quit other applicatons re allocate memory and paste the messages again Not enough memory to perform undo Memory is not sufficientto undo the messages The Do you want to continue deleted message s cannotbe undone restored Not all alarms were saved Disk capacity is not enough to store the data Insufficient disk space Create more free disk space and store the data again Not all alarms were read Memory is not suficient to read the alarm Insufficient memory messages Quit other applications create more memory and read in the alarms again Some data is incorrect and all data cannotbe The format of CSV data to be imported is incorrect Data in and below the line with the incorrect data will not be imported Check Alarm data s CSV format LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 7 Appendix 1 Error Messages Appendices E Symbol Editor Errors Cause Solution Addresses cannot be used as symbol names E nter a standard address in the address column a OA Disk space is insufficient The disk in which the data is stored has no free a ae T This Symbol Name is already in use A symbol of the same name has already been
481. ws Specify the ON OFF status of each dotby clicking on each dotor dragging the mouse within a specified area Specify the startand end points of a line and draw a line Line S by clicking on desired points Draw a square or rectangle by clicking and dragging to Filled square __ the desired size on a diagonal axis Filled rectangle eCie ia Draw a circle or oval by clicking and dragging to the Filled circle desired size on a diagonal axis Filled oval aama LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Drawing Tool Drawing Tool Description o Fillin an area with a desired color by clicking In the area enclosed within lines and shapes at m Enter the text to be displayed in the mark drawing area Call Up Mark carpe Merk Selecta Mark from the Mark Library Register Mark Registera created Mark as a Mark Library E Editing Tools The Editing Tool Bar icons and their corresponding functions are as follows eon ing Toot vewnpton Used to delete an entire Mark screen and store itin the mjo e pe Using the Paste command you can then paste the Mark screen onto another screen clipboard Used to paste the _ temporarily stored in the S a Ble Used to Used to duplicate a Mark screen s specifed area a Mark screen s specified area Delete eee to delete a mark tren e to cancel the command executed a el before a
482. y style from the Shift Left and Shift Right The data will ap pear starting from the side designated here Shift Left has been selected as the default setting Zero Suppress Check this check box to omit the lead ing zeros of display data e g When the Display Length is 4 and the Zero Suppress is NOT selected 25 appears as 0025 Input Style Auto Clear OFF In this mode the previously entered val ues are not cleared and newly entered values are added to those values To clear the previously entered values press CLR of the touch keyboard Auto Clear ON When the first character of a value is entered excluding moving the cursor entering ENT DEL and BS the pre viously entered value is cleared LogiTouch Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 49 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 Advanced Features EX re Date Time and Value data except for the text characters are centered Also Y a2 dot space is automatically inserted in the upper lower left and right sides 5 dots For example when the number of characters are 7 and the number of nu meric value s digits are 5 in a cell space for one character is saved on both left and right sides and displayed data is centered Alarm Settings Alarm Display On Off Column Settings Select this check box to display the Genel Data Fomat Ske Suiel Mom Salire Alarm display Alarm Range Min Value Max Value When the Alarm Type is set
483. yed data using the Rotate command After editing be sure to check the displayed data Example ech O M lt Horizontal type Vertical type W Creating Editing Saving a Logic Program To create a logic program you must move from the Project Manager to the Logic Program Editor Only one logic program can be created for one project E Creating Editing a Logic Program When the Logic Program Editor is started the logic program being created in the current project file 1s displayed PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Project Manager s Controls menu Cre ate Edit Controls command or click on The Logic Program Editor starts File Edit View Search Insert Data Zontroler Help Blej ea gt lt ee aa gt He O18 e ele Peale ww Tm mr ones Bi q ENGI Fung Programming Wod 2 Create Edit a logic program For details on logic program devel opment please refer to the Logic Programming Operation Manual You can insert a rung and instructions as well as set I O configuration Br Ti Logic Program Editor Soda File Edit View Search eet Data Zontroler Help ten elx ala lawl ole 2 SPAR elal F Pala wi 00A z ME Tals program rens a cypicel fast food restacrant soft drin puskbuttoy starts lt he to

procedure - Pro

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents